Firearms/Tool Marks

Training Manual

December 2016
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Table of Contents

A. ADMINISTRATIVE MATTERS AND PROCEDURES 5

B. BACKGROUND/HISTORY OF FIREARMS IDENTIFICATION AND

CURRENT TRENDS 10

C. FIREARMS & AMMUNITION DEVELOPMENT AND CURRENT TRENDS 22

D. MANUFACTURE OF MODERN FIREARMS 27

E. MANUFACTURE OF MODERN AMMUNITION 38

F. INSTRUMENTATION 43

G. EXAMINATION OF FIREARMS 47

H. BULLET EXAMINATIONS AND COMPARISONS 69

I. CARTRIDGE/CARTRIDGE CASE EXAMINATIONS AND COMPARISONS 85

J. SHOTSHELL AND SHOTSHELL COMPONENT EXAMINATIONS AND

COMPARISONS 97

K. GUNSHOT RESIDUE EXAMINATIONS AND DISTANCE

DETERMINATIONS 108

L. TOOLMARK EXAMINATIONS AND COMPARISONS 121

M. SERIAL NUMBER RESTORATION 143

N. RESEARCH PROJECT, REPORT WRITING, EXPERT TESTIMONY AND

EXTERNAL LABORATORY REVIEW AND TOURS 152

FATM Training Manual Page 2 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

INTRODUCTION

The following training manual will allow you as an examiner trainee to guide yourself through the
various areas of knowledge integral to the field of firearms/toolmark identification. This manual is
generic in its layout and allows some modification by the individual training scientist or technical
lead to meet local conditions. It is paramount that you keep before you the primary and ultimate
objective of this training period: to independently and competently examine and compare
evidence relating to firearms and toolmark identification; to independently and competently render
an opinion and reach conclusions relating to your examinations and comparisons; and to give
expert testimony in court in matters encompassed within the broad definition of firearms/toolmark
identification and to do this in a professional, competent and an impartial manner. The obligation
is yours to maximize on the effectiveness of the training period as an opportunity to learn
everything possible in this field. The extent to which you exert yourself during this training and
evaluation period will bear directly on the quality of your performance in the laboratory and on the
witness stand. Note well that your technical abilities and your testimony will, in turn, bear directly
on the future situations of accused persons, and especially in the discipline of firearms/toolmark
identification, the lives of accused persons can hang in the balance. You have a moral and
ethical obligation to prepare yourself technically and professionally during training in order to be
able to perform according to the most rigid standards.

You will be expected to carry out a study of all pertinent section equipment, the Firearms and
Toolmarks Technical Manual, the Standard Operations Manual, the Quality Procedure Manual,
the Safety Manual, and this training manual, as well as print, video and physical reference files.
Integral to your course of study will be frequent daily contacts with section personnel with special
expertise in certain areas. Do not hesitate to ask anyone a question, whether an examiner,
supervisor, or technical lead.

Your study will include many printed references, including the basic material listed after each area
of study. It is expected that during the training period that you will become thoroughly familiar
with these basic references. Further, it should be noted that you should not restrict your efforts
and research to those basic references. One of your primary sources of additional information
will be the Firearm Section reference library. Familiarize yourself with the library's contents of all
types, including the reference files, related indices, manufacturers' literature and the journal of the
Association of Firearm and Tool Mark Examiners.

It is required that you keep a loose-leaf notebook of your study notes on each of the items shown
in the syllabus for research, discussion, demonstration, study or practical work. Your notebook
can include handwritten notes, charts, graphs, photographs, brief photocopied material, etc., at
your discretion, but it must address and broaden on each of the required items of study set out in
the syllabus. Organization of your notebook in a format that parallels the syllabus is suggested.
This notebook will serve as a ready reference in the months and even years following your
qualification, and will assist in documenting your progress during training.

A research project or projects, in addition to certain collateral duties assigned as a learning

experience may supplement your training syllabus. You should be prepared to discuss your
preferences in regard to a project or projects and collateral duties with your supervisor.

This training manual provides a framework for addressing the most important part of your training:
preparing you to independently and competently examine firearms/toolmark related evidence and
independently and to competently reach conclusions and render opinions concerning your
examinations and comparisons. This on-the-job, hands-on experience is the core of your training
and you will be assigned to work with experienced examiners during your training period. This
will insure that you have sufficiently covered each aspect of this training manual and have a basis
for continuing to develop after you have graduated beyond your initial qualification and
certification.

FATM Training Manual Page 3 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Your training will be monitored and assisted by your Technical Lead, who has responsibility for
training matters. The Technical Lead may coordinate outside schools, tours, lectures and
contacts. The Laboratory Director, Supervisor and/or your Technical Lead will evaluate your
progress through this training manual and will generate IOCs as modules are completed.

The order of completion for the training modules may be modified from the original order due to
external training opportunities and/or the trainer’s discretion. If the trainee attends NFEA, CCI or
another training program for the majority of their training, the trainee along with their trainer will
review the training material supplied by the external training program and compare it to the WSP
training manual to assess whether the training objectives set forth in each module were achieved
thorough the external training program. If an objective was not completed, the trainer will
determine an appropriate procedure for completion.

External training courses (i.e. armorer’s courses) and reworked cases may be used as a
substitute for training assignments and practical exercises according to the trainer’s discretion.

If a firearm listed in a training assignment or practical exercise is not available within the WSP
CLD firearms reference collection, a similar design or type of firearm may be substituted with the
trainer’s approval.

Continuing Education

This manual is based on the Association of Firearm and Toolmark Examiners (AFTE) training
manual, and serves as a basis for training. The trainee is expected to continue training after the
completion of the modules in order to stay current with the field. This continuing education may
include AFTE meetings, factory tours, armorer’s courses, gelatin tests, local police ranges, the
SHOT show, and reading current firearms literature.

FATM Training Manual Page 4 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

A. ADMINISTRATIVE MATTERS AND PROCEDURES

1. Discuss the laboratory Quality Assurance Process and the Proficiency Testing
with your Laboratory Director or Supervisor. Become knowledgeable about
the proficiency-testing program administered by the outside independent
testing services. Particularly be aware of testing and the results of testing
conducted within the field of firearms and toolmark identification by this
organization.

____________________ __________
Lab Director/Supervisor Date

2. Discuss the laboratory policy regarding the reexamination of evidence with

your Laboratory Director/Supervisor.

____________________ __________
Lab Director/Supervisor Date

3. Discuss the opportunities for advancement within the Firearm Section and the
laboratory system with your Lab Director/Supervisor.

____________________ __________
Lab Director/Supervisor Date

4. Meet with the Lab Director and discuss the laboratory's mission, organization
and capabilities.

____________________ __________
Lab Director/Supervisor Date

5. Meet with representatives from other functional areas to observe how

evidence is processed by their section and discuss how evidence may be
examined by more than one functional area, which may affect firearms
evidence examination.

_______________________ __________
Supervisor Date

6. Discuss with your Lab Director/Supervisor the laboratory policies regarding

the following:

a. Providing verbal results prior to release of a written laboratory report.

b. Inquiries from submitting agencies and/or attorneys.

c. Handling of phone logs and subpoenas.

d. Administrative documents commonly seen in case files.

e. Providing a laboratory report to user agencies.

f. Laboratory policy concerning confidentiality.

____________________ __________
Lab Director/Supervisor Date
FATM Training Manual Page 5 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

7. Become familiar with the requirements and the facilities available for the
secure storage of evidence within the section. Observe the evidence
submission process and discuss this with a Property and Evidence Custodian.
Review the request for laboratory examination (RFLE), and understand the
importance of maintaining the chain of custody.

_________________ ________
Lab Director/Supervisor Date

8. Become familiar with the requirements of section security in regard to

firearms, evidence while under examination, controlled access, and section
space security. Discuss this with the Supervisor and/or an examiner from the
section.

_________________ ________
Supervisor/Examiner Date

9. Familiarize yourself with the Firearms Reference Collection (FRC):

a. Learn how to locate firearms in the FRC using the FRC inventory listings.

b. Know the correct procedure for checking a firearm out of the FRC.

_________________ __________
Supervisor/Examiner Date

10. Be briefed by the Supervisor in regard to their files, records and procedures in
regard to delinquent cases, annual and sick leave, time and attendance,
report files, ordering expendable supplies, purchase orders and obtaining
necessary tools, equipment and protective clothing.

______________________ _________
Supervisor Date

11. Review the use of the Laboratory Information Management System (LIMS).

______________________ _________
Supervisor Date

12. Read the WSP CLD PowerPoint presentation on Cognitive Bias and be able
to discuss types of bias and identify ways to minimize cognitive bias.

______________________ _________
Supervisor Date

13. Read the pertinent sections of the Safety Manual regarding the use of
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) as well as the proper handling and
examination of evidence that may be contaminated with infectious diseases.

(Use Training Assignment #1 to complete this objective.)

FATM Training Manual Page 6 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

______________________ _________
Student Date

REFERENCE MATERIALS/ ADMINISTRATIVE MATTERS

The following reference materials serve several purposes:

• to provide a wider range of resources for use in completing pre-course assignments

should you have a particular interest in a given topic.
• to provide reference materials for your future professional use.
• to allow you to gain additional depth in particular subject areas.

Should you encounter other references in this category, you are encouraged to make additional
notes about them at the end of this listing.

Basic

Policies and procedure manuals for the laboratory

Firearms Safety

Dutton, G., “Firearms Safety in the Laboratory”, AFTE Journal, 1997;

29(1):37-41.

National Laboratory Center, Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms,

“Firearms Safety Guidelines for the Forensic Firearms Examiner,”
current edition.

Chemical Safety

Safety Data Sheets (SDS), as applicable, can be obtained in print or on disk from chemical
supply houses.

National Laboratory Center, Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms, “National

Laboratory Center Safety Procedures Manual,” current edition.

Occupational Safety and Health Administration, 29 CFR Part 1910, Occupational

Exposures to Hazardous Chemicals in Laboratories; Final Rule.

Biohazards

Bigbee, P.D., “Collecting and Handling Evidence Infected with Human Disease-Causing
Organisms,” FBI Law Enforcement Bulletin, Jul. 1987.

---. The Law Enforcement Officer and Aids, U.S. Government Printing Office, current
edition.

FBI Laboratory, Bloodborne Pathogen Exposure Control Plan, current edition.

Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Bloodborne Facts - Hepatitis B

Vaccination, Protection for You, current edition.

---. Bloodborne Facts - Holding the Line on Contamination, current edition.

---. Bloodborne Facts - Personal Protective Equipment Cuts Risk, current edition.
FATM Training Manual Page 7 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

---. Bloodborne Facts - Protect Yourself When Handling Sharps, current edition.

---. Bloodborne Facts - Reporting Exposure Incidents, current edition.

---. 29 CFR Part 1910.1030, Occupational Exposure to Bloodborne Pathogens; Final

Rule, current version.

"AIDS/HIV Carriers, An Organizational Response" FBI Law Enforcement Bulletin,

June 1989.

Personal Protective Equipment

Ball, P. and Mikko, D., “Protective Optics,” AFTE Journal, 1992; 24(1):80-81.

Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Hearing Conservation, current edition.

---. Personal Protective Equipment, current edition.

---. Respiratory Protection, current edition.

Lead Poisoning

Cayton, J.C., “Blood Lead Tests,” AFTE Journal, 1975; 7(1):40.

Geibel, J., “Ammunition Can Be Hazardous to Your Health (In More than the Obvious Way),”
Police and Security News, May-Jun. 1992, p. 11.

Gregory, A.M., “At Close Range,” American Society of Law Enforcement Trainers Journal, Vol. 4,
No. 2.

Martinez, A.M., “Lead Poisoning,” FBI Law Enforcement Bulletin,

Aug. 1993, pp. 1-4.

Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Standards for Occupational Exposure to Lead,
Chapter XVII, Title 29, U.S. Department of Labor, Section 1910.1025.

“Publication Availability: Lead Poisoning in Shooting Range - A Menace or a Hoax,” AFTE

Journal, 1980; 12(4):101.

Physical Plant Safety

Occupational Safety and Health Administration, 29 CFR 1910.155, Fire Protection

Regulations, Subpart L.

Quality Assurance

Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division Quality Manual.

Association of Firearms and Tool Mark Examiners, “Association of Firearm and Tool Mark
Examiners Quality Assurance Program, 1986,” AFTE Journal, 1986; 18(3):10.

Bradford, L.W., “Barriers to Quality Achievement in Crime Laboratory Operations,” AFTE Journal,
1983; 15(2): 71.

---. “Forensic Firearms Identification, Competence or Incompetence,” AFTE Journal, 1979;

11(2):12.

FATM Training Manual Page 8 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Brundage, D.J., “Proficiency Testing in Illinois,” 1980; 12(4):76.

Hodge, E.E., “Guarding Against Error,” AFTE Journal, 1988;

20(3):290-293.

---. “Guarding Against Error,” AFTE Journal, 1989; 21(2):450-453.

Serrill, M.S., “Forensic Sciences: Overburdened, Underutilized,” AFTE Journal, 1980; 12(4):58.

Lucas, D.M., “American Proficiency Testing Program,” AFTE Journal, 1985; 17(1):26.

“Proficiency Testing Recommended for Crime Labs,” AFTE Journal, 1979; 11(2):22.

Thornton, J.I., “Nationwide Crime Laboratory Proficiency Project,” AFTE Journal, 1979; 11(2):23.

Individual Certification

Kopera, J., “Summary of the Study of the Feasibility of Certification,” AFTE Journal, 1992;
24(1):84-90.

Kowalski, K.F., “AFTE Certification Program,” AFTE Journal, 1996; 28(4):287-290.

Laboratory Accreditation

American Society of Crime Laboratory Directors, Laboratory Accreditation Board

Manual, current edition.

Rabren, C.L., “Laboratory Accreditation,” AFTE Journal, 1982; 14(3):36.

AFTE History and Development

“Association of Firearm and Tool Mark Examiners Bylaws,” AFTE Journal, 1990; 22(1):61-70.

Howe, W.J., “Report on the Formation of the Association of Firearm and Tool Mark Examiners,”
AFTE Journal, 1989; 21(2):118-119.

Ethics

“AFTE Code of Ethics,” AFTE Journal, 1991; 24(3):342-345.

“AFTE Code of Ethics,” AFTE Journal, 1993; 25(1): ix.

“AFTE Procedures for Enforcement of the Code of Ethics,” AFTE Journal, 1990; 22(4):457-470.

WSP CLD Cognitive Bias PowerPoint presentation, WSP CLD Intranet

FATM Training Manual Page 9 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

B. BACKGROUND/HISTORY OF FIREARMS IDENTIFICATION

AND CURRENT TRENDS
1. Define the following terms:

Firearm identification
Ballistics

(Use Training Assignment #1 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _________
Examiner Date

2. Read the applicable sections from the basic references and prepare a report
on the history, principles, evolution and scope of firearms identification in its
broadest sense. Support your report by data accumulated in your notebook.
Discuss this with the Training Officer from the section who will review your
report.

(Use Training Assignment #1 and #2 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _________
Examiner Date

3. Formulate an answer to the following questions:

a. Is the Forensic Science Discipline of Firearm and Toolmark Identification

an art or science?
b. What are the types of conclusions that can be reached in firearm
identification comparisons?
c. What is the basis for each of the above conclusions?
d. Is it possible for experts in the Forensic Science Discipline of Firearm
and Toolmark Identification to disagree regarding their conclusions?
Why or Why Not?
e. How does "probability" relate to firearm identification?

(Use Training Assignment #2 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _________
Examiner Date

Familiarize yourself with the "Association of Firearm and Tool Mark

4.
Examiners" (AFTE), to include its history, current officers, criteria for
membership, committees, the AFTE glossary and the AFTE journal and be
able to discuss them.
__________________ _________
Examiner Date

FATM Training Manual Page 10 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

5. Discuss with system operators the status of the ongoing research initiatives to
link shootings using computer imagery such as NIBIN (National Integrated
Ballistics Information Network-formerly DRUGFIRE and IBIS). Attend training
at NFSTC in Largo, FL if applicable.

__________________ _________
Examiner Date

6. Visit and tour the various laboratories that provide firearms and toolmark
examinations within your region. Coordinate these visits with your Technical
Lead.

__________________ _________
Examiner Date

7. Be able to demonstrate a practical working knowledge of firearm terminology

using the AFTE Glossary as the standard.

(Use Training Assignment #4 and #5 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _________
Examiner Date

8. Select a topic for a research project to be completed during your training

period. Obtain approval from your Technical Lead before initiation of the
project. This project should contribute to the overall fund of information in the
field of firearm identification. These results will be shared with the section
upon completion. In addition, your results should be formatted for publication
in the AFTE Journal and for presentation at an AFTE Meeting.

(Use Training Assignment #3 to begin this objective.)

__________________ _________
Examiner Date

REFERENCE MATERIALS

FIREARMS IDENTIFICATION - HISTORY, PRINCIPLES, EQUIPMENT AND CURRENT

DEVELOPMENTS

The following reference materials serve several purposes:

• to provide a wider range of additional resources should you have a particular interest
in a given topic.
• to provide reference materials for your future professional use.
• to allow you to gain additional depth in particular subject areas.

Should you encounter other references in this category, you are encouraged to make additional
notes about them at the end of this listing.

FATM Training Manual Page 11 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Books

Association of Firearm and Tool Mark Examiners Standardization Committee, Glossary of the
th
Association of Firearm and Tool Mark Examiners 6 edition, available on ATFE’s website.

Burrard, G., The Identification of Firearms and Forensic Ballistics, 1st edition, Charles Scribner
Sons, NY, 1934, revised edition, A.S. Barnes & Co., NY, 1964.

Davis, J.E., An Introduction to Tool Marks, Firearms and the Striagraph, Charles C. Thomas,
Springfield, IL, 1958.

Gunther, J.D., and Gunther, C.O., The Identification of Firearms, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New
York, 1935.

Hatcher, J.S., Hatcher’s Notebook, Military Service Publishing Company, Harrisburg,

PA, 1947.

---. Firearms Investigation, Identification and Evidence, and Textbook of Pistols and Revolvers,
Small Arms Publishing Company, Plantersville, SC, 1946.

Hatcher, J.S., Jury, F.J. and Weller, J., Firearms Investigation, Identification and Evidence, 2nd
edition, Stackpole Books, Harrisburg, PA, 1957.

Himmelwright, A.L.A., “Forensic or Legal Ballistics” in Pistol and Revolver Shooting, The
Macmillan Company, NY, 1928.

Heard, B.E., Handbook of Firearms and Ballistics: Examining and Interpreting Forensic
Evidence, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1997.

Mathews, J.H., Firearms Identification, Volumes I - III, Charles C. Thomas, Springfield,

IL, 1962.

NRA Firearms Fact Book, 3rd edition, National Rifle Association, Fairfax, VA, 1989.

Rowe, W. H., “Firearms Identification”, Forensic Science Handbook, Vol. II, 1988,
Saferstein, R. (Ed.), Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, pp. 393 – 461

AFTE Journal

AFTE Criteria For Identification Committee Report, “Theory of Identification, Range of

Stria Comparison Reports and Modified Glossary Definitions”, 1992; 24(3)

Barrett, M.R., “Microchip and the Bullet: A Vision of the Future, 1991; 23(3): 876-883.

Bates, J.S., “Investigation of the Assassination of President John F. Kennedy,” 1981;

13(1):64.

Berg, S.O., “Drama of Forensic Ballistics,” 1979; 11(3):44.

---. “Firearms Evidence and the Kennedy Assassination,” 1970; 2(2):2-3.

Beck, R., “Alexander von Inostranzeff and the Technical Development of Optical
Comparison Systems,” 1989; 21(1):67-72.

Biasotti, A.A., “Bullet Bearing Surface Composition: Variables: Fired Bullets,” 1981;
13(2):94.

FATM Training Manual Page 12 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

---. “Characteristics in Firearms and Toolmark Identification,” 1980; 12(4):81.

---. “Firearms and Toolmark Identification: A Forensic Science Discipline,” 980;12(3):12.

---. “Methods Applied to the Comparison of Class and Individual Characteristics in

Firearms and Toolmark Identification,” 1989; 21(2):260-263.

---. “Photomicrography and Illumination: Some Critical Factors,” 1979; 11(4):60.

---. “Proposal for a Computer Based Firearms Class Characteristics Information

System,”1970; 2(1):12.

Biasotti, A.A. and Murdock, J., “State of the Art of Firearm & Toolmark Identification,
“ 1984; 16(4):16.

Blackwell, R.J., and Framan, E.P., “Automated Firearms Identification System (AFIDS) Phase I,”
1980; 12(4):11.

Bradford, L.W., “Forensic Firearms Identification: Competence or Incompetence,” 1979; 11(2):12.

Brent, W., “Proved Guilty by Ballistics (Hadley vs Arizona),” 1973; 5(6):5.

Byron, D., “Computerized System for Identifying Firearms,” 1982; 82(3):157.

Cassidy, F.H., “Information on History of Comparison Microscopes,” 1989; 21(1):67-72.

Chamberlain, D., “Microscope Comparison Bridge,” 1972; 4(1):9.

Collins, J.M., “IBIS Manual Bullet Acquisition: Mounting Stub Modification,

“1997;29(1):70-72.

Crossman, E.B., “Qualifications of a Ballistics Expert,” 1985; 17(3):119.

Dillon, J.H. and Sibert, R.W., “FBI Laboratory’s DRUGFIRE Program,” 1990; 22(2) :216.

Gardner, G.Y., “Computer Identification of Bullets,” 1979; 11(2):26

Garland, P.V., “Reexamination of Firearms Evidence in the Robert F. Kennedy Assassination,”

1976; 8(3): complete issue.

Garrison, D.H., “Guns of Brownsville,” 1986; 18(4):65.

---. “Gunsmith and the Soldier”, (Churchill vs. Burrard), 1987;

19(2): 181-187.

Goddard, C.H., “Criminal Investigation Laboratory as an Aid to Law Enforcement in the

Far East,” 1985; 17(3):100.

---. “Firearms as Evidence,” 1980; 12(4):93.

---. “History of Firearms Identification,” 1980; 12(4):38.

---. “History of Firearms Identification,” 1985; 17(1):55.

---. “History of Firearms Identification,” 1989; 21(2):263-278.

---. “History of Firearms Identification to 1930,” 1993; 25(3):214-228.

FATM Training Manual Page 13 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

---. “Identification of Projectiles in Criminal Cases,” 1987; 19(4):393-402.

---. “Scientific Identification of Firearms and Bullets,” 1979; 11(4):97.

---. “Valentine Day Massacre: A Study in Ammunition Tracing,” 1980; 12(1):44.

Goebel, R., “Comparison SEM First Experiments in Forensic Application,” 1983; 15(2):47.

Grove, C.A., Judd, G, and Horn, Horn, R., “SEM: A New Technique for Firearms Examination,”
1972; 4(1):19.

Hall, A.L., “Missile and the Weapon,” 1980; 12(4):85.

Howe, W.J., “Report on the Formation of The Association of Firearm and Toolmark
Examiners,” 1989; 21(2):118-119.

Hueske, E.E., “Preliminary Report on the Application of Fiber Optic Videomicroscopy to

Firearm and Toolmark Examination,” 1990; 22(3):280-287.

Inbau, F.E., “Scientific Evidence in Criminal Cases: Firearms Identification - Ballistics”, 1981;
13(2):75.

---. “Scientific Evidence in Criminal Cases: Firearms Identification - Ballistics,” 1989; 21(2):280-
293.

Juling, R.J. and Stern, W.W., “Overview of Firearms Identification Evidence for Attorneys, I.
Salient Features of Firearms Evidence,” 1981; 13(4): 128.

Katterwe, H., “Comparison Scanning Electron Microscope,” 1983: 15(3):141.

Lambert, R.R., “Firearms Identification,” 1971; 3(3):23.

Lansing, J.F., “Customized Comparison Microscope,” 1973; 5(5):25.

Lee, H.C., “Firearm Related Evidence: The Nicola Sacco and Bartolomeo Vanzetti Case,” 1985;
17(3):13.

Lawyers Cooperative Publishing Co., “Firearms Identification AM JUR PROOF OF FACTS,”

1983; 15(3):31.

Lutz, M.C., “Consecutive Revolver Barrels,” 1970; 2(5):24.

---. “Evaluation of New Fiber Optics System,” 1986; 18(1):12.

Mann, M., Espinoza, E.O., and Scanlan, M.D., “Firearms Examinations by Scanning
Electron Microscopy: Observations and An Update on Current and Future Approaches,
“ 1992; 24(3): 294-303.

Masson, J.J., “ Confide nc e Le ve l Va ria tions in F

Computerized Technology,” 1997; 29(1):42-44.

Matty, W., “Comparison of Three Individual Barrels Produced from One Button Rifled
Barrel Blank,” 1985; 17(3):64.

---. “Comparison of Three Individual Barrels Produced from One Button Rifled Barrel Blank,”
1989; 21(2):370-374.

FATM Training Manual Page 14 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Meyers, C.R., “Firearms and Toolmark Identification: An Introduction,” 1993; 25(4):281-285.

---. “Objective vs. Subjective Boondoggle,” 1987; 19(1):24-30.

---. “Objective vs. Subjective Boondoggle,” 1989; 21(2):413-419.

---. “Mythical Striation Match,” 1992; 24(4):364-365.

Miller, J., “Book Review: The Law and Forensic Ballistics by T.A. Warlow,” 1997; 29(2):239, 173.

Molnar, S., “Comparison Scope Effects Simulated by Use of Photography,” 1971; 3(3):18.

---. “What is a Firearms Examiner: Some Provocative Thoughts,” 1970; 2(7):36.

---. “What is a Firearms Examiner: Some Provocative Thoughts,” 1989; 21(2):128-131.

Moran, B., “Building an Inexpensive High Intensity Fluorescent Lighting System for the
Comparison Microscope,” 1997; 29(1):49-54.

---. “Manual and Automated Bullet and Cartridge Case Comparison Systems: A Commentary,”
1997; 29(1):55-57.

Murdock, J.E., “Effect of Crowning on Gun Barrel Individuality,” 1970; 2(3):12.

---. “Forensic Examination of Firearms and Ammunition,” 1987; 19(2):188-197. (Lecture by

Robert Churchill Feb. 25, 1931.)

---. “Gun Barrel Individuality and Button Rifled .22 Caliber Rifle Barrels,” 1981; 13(3):84.

Ogihara, Y., “5000 Consecutively Fired Bullets and Cartridge Cases from .45 Caliber M1911A1
Pistol,” 1983; 15(3):127.

Ogihara, Y., Kubota, M., Sanada, M., Fukudo, K., Uchiyama, T., and Hamby, J.E., “Comparison
of 5000 Consecutively Fired Bullets and Cartridge Cases from a .45 Caliber M1911A1 Pistol,”
1989; 21(2):331-343.

Prieto, M.A., “Firearms Identification Preface”, 1982l, 14(2): 17- 43.

Rathman, G.A., and Ryland, S.G., “Use of the SEM-EDXA as an Aid to the Firearms
Examiner,” 1987; 19(4):338-392.

Starrs, J.E., “Once More Unto the Breech: The Firearms Evidence in the Sacco and
Vanzetti Case Revisited: Part I,” 1987; 19(1):37-60.

---. “Once More Unto the Breech: The Firearms Evidence in the Sacco and Vanzetti Case
Revisited: Part II,” 1987; 19(1):61-89.

Thornton, J.I., “Origin of the Term Land,” 1983; 15(4):8.

---. “Some Historical Notes on the Comparison Microscope,” 1978; 10(1):7.

---. “Some Historical Notes on the Comparison Microscope,” 1989; 21(2):215-217.

---. “Validity of Firearms Evidence,” 1979; 11(2):16.

Thomas, F., “Striation Matching and Forensic Firearms Identification,” 1980; 12(3):31.

FATM Training Manual Page 15 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Thompson, R.M., Desrosiers, M., and Hester, S., “Computerized Image Analysis for
Firearms Identification: The Integrated Ballistic Identification System: IBIS,” 1996;
28(3):194-203.

Uchiyama, T., “Automated Landmark Identification System,” 1993; 25(3):172-196.

---. “Automatic Comparison Model of Land Marks,” 1988; 20(3):252-259.

---. “Change of Rifling Marks of the Bullets Fired from a Revolver,” 1986; 18(4):40.

---. “Correction: Automatic Comparison Model of Land Marks,” 1990; 22(3):346.

---. “Criterion for Land Mark Identification,” 1988; 20(3):236-251.

---. “Criterion for Land Mark Identification Using Rare Marks,” 1988; 20(3):260-268.

---. “Similarity Among Breech Face Marks Fired from Guns with Close Serial Numbers,” 1986;
18(3):15.

Uchiyama, T., Igarashi, N., and Nagai, M., “Frequency of Occurrence of Individual
Characteristics of Firearms on Fired Bullets,” 1988; 20(4):376-390.

Williams-Sorenson, “Barrel Corrosion and Its Effect on Identification,” 1971; 3(2):34.

Ziegler, P.A., “Examination Techniques: The Beam Splitter and Reverse Lighting,” 1983;
15(2):37.

Professional Journals

Belveal, D.N., “Firearms Identification Based Upon Bullet Comparisons: Expertise or

Guesswork,” California Attorneys for Criminal Justice Forum, Vol. 4, No. 2, Mar. - Apr. 1977, p.
17.

Biasotti, A. A., “A Statistical Study of the Individual Characteristics of Fired Bullets,

“Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 4, No. 1, Jan. 1959, pp. 34 - 50.

---. “The Principles of Evidence Evaluation as Applied to Firearms and Tool Mark Identification,”
Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 9, 1964.

Blackwell, R., “Automated Firearms Identification System (AFIDS),” JPL Report SP 43-8:
Phase I, July, 1974.

Brackett, J. W., “A Study of Idealized Striated Marks and their Comparisons Using Models,” The
Journal of Forensic Science Society, Vol. 10, No. 1, Jan. 1970, pp.27 - 55.

Burd, D.Q., and Kirk, P.L., “Tool Marks. Factors involved in Their Comparison and Use as
Evidence,” Journal of Criminal Law and Criminology, Mar. - Apr. 1942.

Burrard, G., “The Identification of Fire-Arms in Murder Cases,” Game and Gun, Vol. 10, No. 92,
May 1933, pp. 214 -219.

Buxton, J.T., “The Science of Ballistics: Judicial Applications,” Law Notes, Vol. 34, May 1930, pp.
24 -28.

Cassidy, H.E., “Ballistics Forensically Applied,” Journal of Criminal Law and

Criminology, Vol. 20, Nov. 1929, pp. 439-448.

FATM Training Manual Page 16 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Churchill, R., “The Forensic Examination of Firearms and Projectiles, “ The Police
Journal, Vol. 2, Jul. 1929, pp. 367 -380 (London).

Crossman, E.C., “Some Questions Not in the Program,” The American Journal of Police Science,
May - Jun. 1930.

Davis, J.E., “The Striagraph: A New Police Science Instrument,” Police, Nov. - Dec. 1956, pp. 26
- 29.

Goddard, C.H., “Evidence in Shooting Cases,” Chicago Police Journal, Nov. 1913.

---. “Forensic Ballistics,” Army Ordnance, Nov. - Dec. 1925.

---. “Scientific Identification of Firearms and Bullets,” Journal of Criminal Law and
Criminology, Aug. 1926.

---. “The Valentine Day Massacre: A Study in Ammunition Tracing,” The American Journal of
Police Science, Vol. 1, 1930, pp. 60-79.

---. “Firearms as Evidence,” The American Journal of Police Science, Vol. 2, 1931, p. 3.

---. “A National Firearms Bureau,” Chicago Police Journal, Jul. 1934, pp. 15-16.

---. “In Search of the Firearm,” Chicago Police Journal, Part I, Jan. 1935;
Part II, Feb. 1935.

---. “A History of Firearm Identification,” Chicago Police Journal, 1936, pp. 1-14.

Dougherty, P.M., “Report on Two Early United States Firearms Identification Cases,” Journal of
Forensic Sciences, Vol. 14, No. 4, Oct. 1969, pp. 453-459.

“A Federal Firearms Identification Bureau,” editorial in Army Ordnance, Vol. 14, May - Jun. 1934,
p. 365.

Grove, C.A., Judd, G., and Horn, R., “Examination of Firing Pin Impressions by Scanning Electron
Microscopy,” Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 17, No. 4, 1972, pp. 645-658.

---. “Evaluation of SEM Potential in the Examination of Shotgun and Rifle Firing Pin Impressions,”
Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 19, No. 3, 1974, pp. 441-447.

Gunther, C.O., “Markings on Bullets and Shells Fired from Small Arms,”
Mechanical Engineering, 54, 1932, pp. 341-345.

---. “Markings on Bullets and Shells Fired from Small Arms,” Mechanical Engineering,
53, 1930, pp 107-113.

---. “Markings on Bullets and Shells Fired from Small Arms,” Mechanical Engineering,
52, 1930, pp. 1065-1069.

---. “Principles of Firearms Identification - Fingerprinting Ordnance in the War on Crime,

“Army Ordnance, 12, 1932, pp. 339-340.

---. “Principles of Firearms Identification - Further Analysis of Accidental Characteristics,

“ Army Ordnance, 13, 1932, pp. 40-43.

Hall, A.L., “The Missile and the Weapon,” The Buffalo Medical Journal, Jun. 1900. (Reprinted in
American Journal of Police Science, Vol. 2, 1931, pp. 311-322.)

FATM Training Manual Page 17 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Hatcher, J.S., “The Identification of Firearms,” Army Ordnance, Vol. 14, Jul. - Aug. 1933,
pp. 27 - 32; Vol. 14, Sep. - Oct. 1933, pp. 89-95.

Inbau, F.E., “Firearms Identification - Ballistics’,” Journal of Criminal Law and Criminology, Vol.
24, 1933, pp. 825-845.

Judd, G., Sabo, J., Hamilton, W., Ferriss, S., and Horn, R., “SEM Microstriation Characterization
of Bullets and Contaminant Particle Identification,” Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 19, No. 4,
1974, pp. 798-811.

Katterwe, H., Goebel, R., and Gross, K.D., “The Comparison Scanning Electron Microscope
within the Field of Forensic Science,” Scanning Electron Microscopy/1982, SEM Inc., pp. 499 -
504.

Korda, E.J., Macdonell, H.L., and Williams, J.P., “Forensic Applications of the Scanning Electron
Microscope,” Journal of Criminal Law, Criminology and Police Science, Vol. 61, No. 3, 1970, pp.
453-458.

Murdock, J.E., “The Effect of Crowning on Gun Barrel Individuality,” The Journal of the Forensic
Science Society, Vol. 12, 1972, pp. 305-308.

Nichols, R.G., “Firearms and Toolmark Identification Criteria: A Review of the Literature”; Journal
of Forensic Science, 1997:42(3): 466-474 (contains 35 references)

Peterson, C.A., “A Camera for Bullet Photography,” Chicago Police Journal, May 1934,
pp. 7 - 8.

Roche, G.F., “The Use of Photographs in Forensic Firearms Identification,” Identification News,
Vol. 3, No. 6, Jun. 1953.

Serhant, J.E., “The Admissibility of Ballistics in Evidence,” American Journal of Police

Science, May-Jun. 1930.

Sibert, R. W., “DRUGFIRE: Responding to Gang and Drug-Related Shootings,” Crime Laboratory
Digest, Vol. 19, No. 1, January 1992, pp. 6 - 9

Sibert, R.W., “Drugfire: Revolutionizing Firearms Identification and Providing a National Firearms
Identification Network,” Crime Laboratory Digest, Oct. 1994.

Smith, S., “The Identification of Firearms and Projectiles,” The Police Journal, Vol. 1,
Jul. 1928, pp. 411-422 (London).

Sullington, D., “Ballistics, a New Science,” The Criminologist, Vol. 5, Jun. 1929, pp. 32-
34.

Tangen, E., “The Schopflin Case,” The American Journal of Police Science,” Vol. 2, 1931, pp.
518-528.

“The History of Firearms Identification,” The International Association of Identification Firearms

Sub-Committee, Identification News, Vol.15, No. 6, June 1965, pp. 5 – 15

Thomas, F., “Comments on the Discovery of Striation Matching and on Early Contributions to
Forensic Firearms Identification,” Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 12, No. 1, Jan. 1967, pp. 1-7.

Thornton, J., “The Validity of Firearms Evidence,” California Attorneys for Criminal Justice Forum,
Vol.5, No. 4, Aug. 1978, p. 15.

FATM Training Manual Page 18 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Wescott, A.P., “The Firearms Expert,” The Police Journal, Vol. 7, Oct. - Dec. 1934, pp. 472-485
(London).

Wiard, S.W., “Ballistics as Applied to Police Science,” The American Journal of Police Science,
Vol. 1, 1930, pp. 538-542.

Wiard, S., “Application of Ballistics in Legal Cases,” American Journal of Police Science, Vol. 2,
1931, pp. 174-179.

Wigmore, J.H., “Evidence - Homicide - Identification of Bullet and Firearms,” Illinois Law Review,
Vol. 25, 1931, p. 692.

Periodicals

“Art of Photographing the Unseen is Museum-Artgravure Subject,” Newark News,

Feb. 4, 1934. (Phillip O. Gravelle)

Barton, A., “You Can’t Get Away With Murder,” Guns, Jul. 1979.

Braverman, S., “Forensic Ballistic Errors,” The Gun Digest, 1966, pp. 280-283.

Coggswell, J.F., “Is There a Perfect Crime?”, Popular Mechanics, Aug. 930, pp. 194 - 199.

Crawford, W.J., “Bullet Identification,” The Edison Monthly, May 1926.

Crossman, E.C., “The Scientific Side of Firearms and Crime,” The Sporting Goods
Dealer, June 1930.

Dunn, H.H., “Trade-Marks of Crime,” Popular Mechanics, Jul. 1929, pp. 50-56.

Goddard, C.H., “Who Did the Shooting?” Popular Science Monthly, Nov. 1927, pp. 21-23.

---. “Forensic Ballistics,” Medical Times, Jul. 1929.

---. “Forensic Ballistics - Popular Style,” American Rifleman, Vol. 77, Jul. 1929, pp. 14,
15 and 20.

---. “The Bullet and Microscope,” The Rifleman, Nov. 1929 (London).

---. “Gang Guns”, American Rifleman, Vol. 78, Jan. 1930, pp. 16 and 38.

---. “How Science Solves Crime: II. Identification of Firearms,” Hygeia, Vol. 10, Mar.
1932, pp. 219-233.

Gorman, S.F., “Scientific Criminology - How Bullets and Firearms are Matched for Identification,”
Scientific American, Oct. 1930, pp. 265-267.

---. “Scientific Criminology - The Pistol Witness,” Scientific American, Dec. 1930, pp. 456-457.

“His Camera Sees Where Human Eye Fails,” Newark News, Feb. 17, 1941. (Phillip O. Gravelle)

“How the St. Louis Ballistics Expert Operates in His Part of Crime Detection,” St. Louis Globe-
Democrat, Jul. 14, 1929.

Herrich, R.E., “Ballistic Jusrisprudence,” Arms and the Man, May 1923.

FATM Training Manual Page 19 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Landis, C.S., “Winchester’s Ballistic Chief Has Helped to Unravel Many Crime Mysteries,” The
Sporting Goods Dealer, Nov. 1931.

“A New Way of Examining the Inside of a Rifle Barrel,” Scientific American, April, 1926.

“Optics and the Detective,” Bausch and Lomb Magazine, Jul. 1925.

Pardua, R., “What’s in a Name....Ballistics for Instance,” Spring 3100, a Magazine for Policemen,
Vol. 22, No. 2, (NYCPD).

Souder, W., “Firearm Identification,” Army & Navy Journal, Mar. 1932.

“South Orange Man is Awaiting Medal for Photomicrography,” Newark News, Jun. 24, 1924
(Phillip O. Gravelle).

Stout, W.S., “Fingerprinting Bullets - The Expert Witness,” The Saturday Evening Post,
June 13, 1925.

---. “Fingerprinting Bullets - The Silent Witness,” The Saturday Evening Post, June 20, 1925.

“Photomicrography Authority Started Career as Hobbyist,” Newark News, Feb. 16, 1936.
(Phillip O. Gravelle)

“Photomicrography Expert to Address Camera Club,” Newark News, Jan. 25, 1934.
(Phillip O. Gravelle)

Teale, E.W., “Secrets of Crime Read on Bullets,” Popular Science Monthly, Feb. 1932.

Thompson, W., “How Who Dunits Are Solved,” Guns Magazine, Aug. 1955.

Williams, C.G., “Fingerprints on Bullets,” Outdoor Life, May 1922.

“Wizard in Ballistics: Phillip O. Gravelle of So. Orange, Expert with Microscope, Dead at
77,” Newark News, Feb. 4, 1955.

FATM Training Manual Page 20 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Other Documents

“Benchmark Evaluation Studies of the Bulletproof and DRUGFIRE Ballistic Imaging Systems,”
Executive Summary, Published by the Executive Office of the Presidents’s Office of National
Drug Control Policy

Biasotti, A.A., “Bullet Comparisons - A Study of Fired Bullets Statistically Analyzed,” unpublished
Master’s thesis, School of Criminology, University of California, Berkeley, 1955, 97 pages.

Boyd, K.T., “Use of Probability Theory in Making Identifications Through Common

Characteristics,” paper presented at AFTE meeting in Washington, D.C., Feb, 1974.

Devaney, J.R., and Bradford, L.W., “Applications of Scanning Electron Microcopy to Forensic
Science at Jet Propulsion Laboratory, 1969 - 1970,” Scanning Electron Microscopy/1971 (Part II),
proceedings of the Workshop on Forensic Applications of the Scanning Electron Microscope, IIT
Research Institute, Chicago, IL, pp. 561-568

Kingston, C.R., and Kirk, P.L., “The Use of Statistics in Criminalistics,” unpublished paper
presented at California Association of Criminalists, Fall Seminar, Oct. 1973.

“Study of Fired Bullets and Shells in Brownsville, Texas, Riot.” Annual report of Chief of
Ordnance, U.S. Army, Government Printing Office, Washington, DC, 1907.

The Waite System of Bullet Identification (undated pamphlet) Bureau of Forensic

Ballistics, New York.

FATM Training Manual Page 21 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

C. FIREARMS & AMMUNITION DEVELOPMENT AND CURRENT

TRENDS
1. Review the history of early firearms and ammunition development up to the
advent of metallic cartridges, with particular emphasis on lock mechanisms,
early rifling techniques, percussion systems, priming methods and pre-metallic
cartridges. Prepare a chronological outline of this early development.

(Use Training Assignment #3 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _________
Examiner Date

2. Visit the firearm collection of a museum in your region and observe first-hand
those firearms that constitute examples of early firearms and ammunition
development. Meet the curator of the collection and obtain their views and
opinions on those firearms that are developmental benchmarks. Coordinate
this tour with your Technical Lead.

__________________ _________
Examiner Date

3. Tour each of the firearms reference collections, noting in particular the types
of firearms that are representative of commercial and military firearm
development since the advent of metallic cartridges.

__________________ _________
Examiner Date

4. Trace the evolution of the rimfire cartridge from the mid-nineteenth century to
the current generation of modern .22 caliber rimfire cartridges.

(Use Training Assignment #4 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _________
Examiner Date

5. Study the history of centerfire cartridge development starting with black

powder cartridges to the current generation of modern centerfire cartridges.
Make notes to show the chronological history of this development.

(Use Training Assignment #5 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _________
Examiner Date

6. Study the Firearm Section Standard Ammunition File (SAF) with the Firearms
examiner to whom it is assigned, noting in particular cartridges and shotshells
that are representative of commercial and military ammunition development
during the past three decades.

__________________ _________
Examiner Date
FATM Training Manual Page 22 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

7. Conduct an in depth study of exterior bullet coatings which have been

developed in the last three decades. Prepare a report concerning how this
technology impacts the firearm examiner.

(Use Training Assignment #5 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _________
Examiner Date

8. Obtain a copy of the (most recent) studies concerning cartridge effectiveness

conducted by the FBI. Prepare a report listing trends you see unfolding in
cartridge and bullet development and show any historical significance to these
findings.

__________________ _________
Examiner Date

9. Prepare an overview of the recent development in handguns and how this

information might be of significance to the firearm examiner.

__________________ _________
Examiner Date

REFERENCE MATERIALS

HISTORY OF BLACK POWDER AS A PROPELLANT

The following reference materials serve several purposes:

• to provide a wider range of resources should you have a particular interest in a given
topic.
• to provide reference materials for your future professional use.
• to allow you to gain additional depth in particular subject areas.

Should you encounter other references in this category, you are encouraged to make additional
notes about them at the end of this listing.

Books

Barnes, Cartridges of the World

Bussard, Ammo Encyclopedia

Davis, T.L., The Chemistry of Powder and Explosives, reprinted by Angriff Press, Las Vegas, NV
(Originally printed as two separate volumes in 1941 and 1943; also reprinted by John Wiley and
Sons, New York, 1950.) pp. 1-51.

Munhall and White, Cartridge Headstamp Guide

FATM Training Manual Page 23 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Periodicals

Brown, M., “America’s Gunpowder Maker,” American Rifleman, Aug. 1979, pp. 40-43, 81

Harrison, E.H., “Black Powder,” American Rifleman, Oct. 1975, p.73.

Lewis, R.B., “Bacon’s Thunderous Sound,” American Rifleman, May 1952, pp. 35-40.

Ley, W., “Friar Berthold...Man or Myth,” American Rifleman, Jul. 1959, pp. 31-34.

Nonte, G.C., “At Last a Black Powder Substitute” in Hogdon’s Data Manual No. 23, Hogdon
Powder Co., Shawnee Mission, KS, 1977.

“Pyrodex Replica Black Powder,” Rifle Magazine, No. 46, p. 18.

Roberts, D., “Dupont - Powder Supplier for a Nation,” Rifle Magazine, Jul./Aug. 1973, pp. 36-37,
54.

Silva, E., “The Black Powder Saga,” Guns Magazine, Aug./Sep. 1977

AFTE Journal

Dillon, J.H., “Black Powder Background,” 1991; 23(2):689-693.

Garland, P.V., “The Augusta Powder Works - A Historical Sketch,” 1974; 6(2):8-10.

Rosenberg, S.F., “Good News for the Charcoal Burners, New Source for Black Powder,
“ 1974; 6(2):13.

Styers, G.R., “History of Black Powder,” 1987; 19(4):443-446.

Videotapes

Kaboom! , NOVA/WGBH Boston, 1997. (first twenty minutes)

REFERENCE MATERIALS

EVOLUTION OF EARLY FIREARMS

Books

Association of Firearm and Tool Mark Examiners Standardization Committee, Glossary of the
Association of Firearm and Tool Mark Examiners, Firearm Ignition Systems , AFTE website

Carman, History of Firearms from Earliest Times to 1914

Chapel, C.E., Guns of the Old West, Coward-McCann, Inc., New York, 1961.
(Reprinted by Odysseus Editions, Inc., for the NRA Firearms Classics Library, 1995)

Edwards, Civil War Guns

Fuller, C.E. and Stewart, R.D., Firearms of the Confederacy, Standard Publications, Inc.,
Huntington, WV, 1944. (Reprinted by Odysseus Editions, Inc., for the NRA Firearms Classics
Library, 1996)

Gluckman, U.S. Martial Pistols and Revolvers

FATM Training Manual Page 24 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Greener, W.W., The Gun and Its Development, Cassel and Company, Ltd., New York, 1910.
(Reprinted by Bonanza Books, 1967, and by Odysseus Editions, Inc., for the NRA Firearms
Classics Library, 1995)

Held, R., The Age of Firearms - A Pictorial History, Harpers, 1957.

Hogg, I.V., The Story of the Gun from Matchlock to M16 , St. Martin’s Press, New York, 1996.

Lewis, Small Arms and Ammunition in the U.S. Service, 1776-1865

Logan, H.C., Hand Cannon to Automatic, Standard Publications, Inc., Huntington, WV, 1944.

NRA Staff, Firearms and Ammunition Fact Book

NRA, Handgun and Shoulder Arms Assembly

Peterson, H.L., Arms and Armour in Colonial America 1526-1783, The Stackpole Co.,
Harrisburg, PA, 1956.

Peterson, H.L., Encyclopedia of Firearms

Pope, Guns

Roberts, N.H., The Muzzle-loading Cap Lock Rifle, The Clarke Press, Manchester, NH, 1944.
(Reprinted by Odysseus Editions, Inc., for the NRA Firearms Classics Library, 1996)

Sharpe, P.B.., The Rifle in America, William Morrow and Co., New York, 1938. (Reprinted by
Odysseus Editions, Inc., for the NRA Firearms Classics Library, 1995)

Smith, W.H.B., The NRA Book of Small Arms: Volume II - Rifles, NRA/Military Service Publishing
Company, Harrisburg, PA, 1948. (Reprinted by Palladium Press for the NRA Firearms Classics
Library, 1997)

Smith, W.H.B., The NRA Book of Small Arms: Volume I - Pistols and Revolvers,
NRA/Military Service Publishing Company, Harrisburg, PA, 1946. (Reprinted by Palladium Press
for the NRA Firearms Classics Library)

U.S. Cartridge Company, Pictorial History of Firearms to 1905, Normount Technical Publications,
Forest Grove, OR, 1971.

Winant, L., Early Percussion Firearms, Morrow Publications,1959.

Periodicals

Peterson, H.L., “The Development of Firearms,” American Rifleman, Parts 1 and 2, Mar. and
Apr., 1960.

AFTE Journal

Cayton, J.C., “Blackpowder Firearms, Powder Residue & Ball Penetration,” 1984; 16(4):80.
Fadala, S., “Penetration of Round Ball,” 1988; 20(2):135-139.

George, W., “Black Powder Firearms: Safety Precautions,” 1988; 20(1):57-58.

Tschappat, M.G., “Early History of the Ordnance Department,” 1988; 20(2):174-184.

FATM Training Manual Page 25 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Vandiver, J.V., “Foxfire 5 Has Early Gunsmithing Data,” 1981; 13(2):15.

Videotapes

Gunsmith of Williamsburg, The Colonial Williamsburg Foundation, Williamsburg, VA, 1969.

Guns of the Civil War, Volumes I & II, Monterey Movie Co., 1993.

The History of Firearms - The Springfield Armory, United States Video Corp., Vienna, VA, 1994.

Muzzle-Loading Basics, Flintlock and Percussion Firearms, Lenny Magill Productions,

San Diego, CA.

The Story of the Gun, Volume I and first 38 minutes of Volume II, up to but not including the
development of rimfire ammunition, A&E Television Networks, New York,1996.

FATM Training Manual Page 26 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

D. MANUFACTURE OF MODERN FIREARMS

1. Numerous techniques are used in the manufacture of modern firearms.

Research in detail these processes and set these out in your notes. Include
but do not restrict your study to the following machining methods:

a. Shaping
b. Planing
c. Drilling
d. Reaming
e. Turning
f. Boring
g. Milling-include both face milling and peripheral (slab) milling
h. Broaching
i. Abrasive machining-include honing, lapping, grinding, sanding, and
ultrasonic methods
j. Sawing
k. Filing
l. Swaging
m. Electrochemical machining (ECM)
n. EDM
o. Investment casting
p. Stamping
q. MIM
(Use Training Assignment #6 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _________
Examiner Date

2. Demonstrate your knowledge of the basic nomenclature of handguns, rifles,

and shotguns.

Include but do not restrict your study, to the following: breechface,

breech bolt, bolt, bolt face, extractor, ejector, firing pin, rifling, barrel,
lands, grooves, ramp, magazine, clip, ejection port, chamber and
receiver.
Point out these parts in several handguns, rifles and shotguns as
applicable.
Discuss the manufacturing techniques that would have been used to
fabricate and finish each of the parts and note the machining marks on
each part.
Point out any "mark of abuse" which could contribute to the uniqueness
of each part.

FATM Training Manual Page 27 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Identify areas that machining marks might "carry over" to another firearm.

(Use Training Assignment #7 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _________
Examiner Date

3. Research in detail the following rifling techniques:

a. Broach
b. Button
c. Hammer Forging
d. Hook method
e. Scrape method
f. ECM
g. EDM
h. Flow forming
(Use Training Assignment #8 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _________
Examiner Date

4. Obtain broaches and buttons for study from the section training materials.
Determine the difference between barrels, which have been button rifled and
those, which have been broach rifled.

(Use Training Assignment #8 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _________
Examiner Date

5. Discuss and define the following terms as they relate to firearm manufacture
or firearms identification.

a. Chambering
b. Crowning
c. Ballizing
d. Bore slugging
e. Forcing cone
f. Bore
g. Choke
h. Choke tube
(Use Training Assignment #8 to complete this objective.)
__________________ _________
Examiner Date

FATM Training Manual Page 28 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

6. Research the history and current significance of proof marks as they relate to
the manufacture of firearms.

(Use Training Assignment #8 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _________
Examiner Date

7. Visit the manufacturing facilities of at least six firearms and/or barrel

manufacturers such as Wilson barrels, Ruger, Smith and Wesson, Mossberg,
Marlin and US Repeating Arms. Record notes in your notebook on each visit
and produce a written report of your visit for the Firearm Section files and an
oral report for Firearm Section members. Particular emphasis should be
placed on manufacturing and rifling techniques used by each manufacturer,
noting methods and procedures which leave unique manufacturing toolmarks
on firearm parts which, in turn, produce individual microscopic marks on
bullets, cartridge cases and shotshell casings. Coordinate these visits with
your Technical Lead.

_________________ _________
Examiner Date

REFERENCE MATERIALS

MODERN FIREARMS DEVELOPMENT AND OPERATING SYSTEMS

The following reference materials serve several purposes:

• to provide a wider range of additional resources should you have a particular interest
in a given topic.
• to provide reference materials for your future professional use.
• to allow you to gain additional depth in particular subject areas.

Should you encounter other references in this category, you are encouraged to make additional
notes about them at the end of this listing.

Books

Association of Firearm and Tool Mark Examiners Standardization Committee, Glossary of the
Association of Firearm and Tool Mark Examiners, Firearm Ignition Systems), AFTE website

Brownell, F.R., Encyclopedia of Modern Firearms, Brownell, 1959.

Chinn, G.M., The Machine Gun, Volumes I-IV, U.S. Government Printing Office, 1951-1955.

Ezzel, E.C., Handguns of the World, Barnes and Noble Books, New York, 1993.

---. Small Arms of the World, Barnes and Noble Books, New York, 1993.

Hatcher, J.S., Hatchers Notebook

Hobart, F.W., Pictorial History of the Submachine Gun, Scribners, 1975.

Hogg, I.V., Pistols of the World, Fortress Publications, 1978,

FATM Training Manual Page 29 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

---. Modern Small Arms, Book Sales Inc., Edison, N.J., 1994.

Jane’s Information Group, Jane’s Infantry Weapons, London, current edition.

Johnson, M.M., Automatic Arms: Their History, Development and Use, W. Morrow & Co., New
York, 1941.

Johnson, G.B., and Lockhoven, H.B., International Armament, Volumes I-II, International Small
Arms Publishers, Cologne, 1965.

Keith, E., Shotguns, Stackpole and Heck, 1950.

Mueller and Olson, Shooters Bible, Small Arms Lexicon and Concise Encyclopedia

Murtz, H.A., ed., The Gun Digest Book of Exploded Long Gun Drawings, DBI Books, Inc.,
Northbrook, IL, 1993.

---. The Gun Digest Book of Exploded Handgun Drawings, DBI Books, Inc., Northbrook, IL, 1992.

Nelson, T.B., and Lockhoven, H.B., The Worlds Submachine Guns, International Small Arms
Publishers, Cologne, 1963.

Nelson, T.B., and Musgrove, D., The Worlds Assault Rifles and Automatic Carbines, TBN
Enterprises, 1968.

NRA Fact Book, 3rd edition, National Rifle Association, Fairfax, VA, 1989.

Petzal, D.E., The Encyclopedia of Sporting Arms, Facts on File, Inc., New York, 1991.

Roberts, J.B., ed., Firearms Assembly, the NRA Guide to Pistols and Revolvers, NRA, Fairfax,
VA, 1993.

---. Firearms Assembly, the NRA Guide to Rifles and Shotguns, NRA, Fairfax, VA, 1993.

Smith, W.H.B., Small Arms of the World, Stackpole Books, Harrisburg, PA, 1973.

---. Book of Pistols and Revolvers, 7th edition, Stackpole Books, Harrisburg, PA, 1968.

Smith & Smith, The Book of Rifles

Wirnsberger, G., The Standard Directory of Proof Marks, Blacksmith Corporation, Chino Valley,
AZ.

Wood, J.B., Firearms Assembly/Disassembly - Part I: Automatic Pistols, DBI Books, Northbrook,
IL, 1990.

---. Firearms Assembly/Disassembly - Part II: Revolvers, DBI Books, Northbrook, IL, 1990.

---. Firearms Assembly/Disassembly - Part III: Rimfire Rifles, DBI Books, Northbrook, IL, 1994.

---. Firearms Assembly/Disassembly - Part IV: Centerfire Rifles, DBI Books, Northbrook, IL, 1991.
---. Firearms Assembly/Disassembly - Part V: Shotguns, DBI Books, Northbrook, IL, 1992.

---. Firearms Assembly/Disassembly - Part VI: Law Enforcement Weapons, DBI Books,
Northbrook, IL, 1981.

FATM Training Manual Page 30 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

AFTE Journal

Ball, P., “Iraqi Tariq Pistol (7.65mm),” 1993; 25(2): 128-129.

Bell, P.D., and Mikko, D.M., “Iraqi Model 74 Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1992; 24(1) 23-27.

Berg, S.O., “Firearms Safety Design Origins and the Firearms,” 1996; 28(4): 211-221.

---. “Gas Handling, Containment, Deflection and Venting for Bolt Action Rifles,” 1992; 24(4): 375-
380.

---. “History of Remington Slide Action Shotguns,” 1988; 20(3): 296-299.

---. “History of Remington Slide Action Shotguns,” 1989; 21(2) :453-457.

---. “History of Revolver Safeties,” 1982; 14(4): 29.

---. “History of Revolver Safeties,” 1989; 21(2): 309-313.

---. “History of the Derringer Pistol,” 1985; 17(3): 91.

---. “Lever Action Firearms Safeties,” 1988; 20(1): 64-71.

---. “Magazine Safeties: Important Safety Design,” 1993; 25(4): 301-307.

---. “Rohm RG Industries Firearms and Safeties,” 1986; 18(2):72.

---. “Safety Design: Remington Semiautomatic shotguns,” 1989; 21(3): 496-499.

Boss, G., “Number One: AK-47 the Most Popular Gun in the World,” 1995; 27(3): 220-221.

Chenow, R.W., “Bauer .25 Caliber Stainless Steel Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1976; 8(4): 20.

---. “Mendoza Model K 62 Single Shot Pistol,” 1980; 12(2): 28.

Dodson, R.V., and Stengel, R.F., “American Derringer,” 1992; 24(1): 63-64.

Dujanovich, M.B., “Heckler & Koch 9x19mm Firearms,” 1995; 27(4): 297-302.

---. “Navy Arms Model TU90 Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1994; 26(2): 121-126.

Fournier, R.J., and Lemmer, J.T., “Type Sugiura: Oriental 32 ACP Pistol,” 1985; 17(2): 38.

Freeman, R.A., “M11/Nine and KG 99 Closed Bolt Semiautomatic Pistols,” 1985; 7(2): 92.

Garland, P.V., “Glock 17 Pistol,” 1987; 19(2): 178-180.

---. “SATA Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1970; 2(7): 23.

---. “SWD, Inc. Model II Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1988; 20(4): 460-461.

---. “Taurus Model 58S Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1988; 20(4): 459.

Garland, P.V., and Lutz, M., “USAF Rifle/SMG, .221 Cal,” 1971; 3(1):24.

Gieszl, R., “Bersa 380 Semiautomatic Pistols,” 1991; 23(3): 862-866.

FATM Training Manual Page 31 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Gieszl, R., Wolslagel, P., and Nordhoff, T., “Stallard Arms Model JS 9mm Semiautomatic Pistol,”
1990; 22(3): 299-302.

Goodman, R., Santora, D., and Trochum, T., “Kahr K9,” 1996; 28(3): 166-167.

Hawkins, R.R., “Davis Industries Model D-25 Derringer,” 1985; 17(2): 77.

Heflin, T.F., “Marlin 30 Caliber Machine Gun,” 1988; 20(2): 204-205.

Hughes, D.R., “Book Review: The History and Development of the M16 Rifle and Its Cartridge,”
1991; 23(3): 798.

Johnson, T.D., and Matty, W., “Arcadia Machine and Tool: Notes on AMT Firearms,” 1986; 18(3):
69.

Kreiser, M.J., “45-70 Caliber Century Revolver,” 1983; 15(2): 19.

---. “AMT Back-Up Pistol Manufacturer Marking Information,” 1984; 16(3): 20.

---. “Information on Taurus History,” 1982; 14(3): 9.

Laskowski, G.E., “American Industries Calico M-100 & M-100P 22 Long Rifle Carbine and Pistol,”
1988; 20(2): 131-134.

Levine, R.T., “Davis Industries Derringers,” 1990; 22(3): 310-314.

Lutz, M.C., “Smoothbore 38 Special Derringer: Davis Industries Model D38,” 1996; 28(3): 174-
176.

---. “Central Kentucky Arms Semiautomatic Rifle,” 1983; 15(4): 40.

---. “Jennings Bryco 59 Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1995; 27(2): 130-132.

Maruoka, R.K., “Beretta Model 92 Compact L,” 1997; 29(1): 14-15.

---. “French Mas Rifle,” 1995; 27(1):17-19.

Matty, B., and Dougherty, P., “Sedco Industries Model SP-22 Pistol,” 1990; 22(2): 195-198.

Mauer, C.C., “Rohm Model 38T Double Action Revolver,” 1970; 2(3): 25.

McBrayer, W.S., “Smith & Wesson Model SW40F,” 1994; 26(4): 297-298.

Mikko, D., “Ceska Zbrojoka (CZ) Model 50 Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1993; 25(4): 264-265.

Moorehead, C.A., and Mauer, R., “AMT Back Up 9mm Kurz (380 ACP) Auto Loading Pistol,”
1985; 17(2): 97.

Nielson, F. I., “Heckler & Koch P7 (PSP),” 1981; 13(4): 37.

Nordhoff, T.J., “Lorcin 25 ACP Caliber Pistol,” 1989; 21(4): 399-400.

---. “Grendel Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1989; 21(4); 609.

---. “Wyoming Arms Parker 10mm S.S. Pistol,” 1990; 22(2): 191-193.

Stanton, R.B., “Bryco Arms Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1990; 22(2): 194.

FATM Training Manual Page 32 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Stauffer, J.C., “.38 S&W American Bulldog (Belgium),” 1973; 5(5): 8.

---. “Feather Model AT-9 Semiautomatic Carbine,” 1990; 22(3): 333.

---. “MKA 9mm Semiautomatic Carbine,” 1991; 23(2): 658.

Schubert, K.H., “Technical Note on the Grendel P-30 Pistol,” 1993, 25(2): 108-109.

Sojat, J.G. and Hart, R.P., “Heckler & Koch Model HK-4 Pistol,” 1973, 5(2): 19.

Stengel, R.F., and Dodson, R., “Rohm 41 Magnum Model 57 Revolver, 1990; 22(4): 444-445.

Stone, R.S., “Sites Spectre 9mm Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1991; 23(4): 1000-1002.

Templin, R.H., “Jennings, Model J-22 Semiautomatic Pistol Information,” 1987; 19(1) 18.

---. “H&R Military Training Rifle,” 1985; 17(2): 95.

Thorpe, J.C., “Information on the S.W.D., Inc. SMG Production,” 1984; 16(3): 17.

Trumble, C. “Ortgies Pocket Pistols,” 1997; 29(1): 87-92.

---. “Ruger’s Answer to the MP 5,” 1997; 29(1): 80-86.

Thompson,E., “Ares 9mm Folding Machine Gun (FMG),” 1988; 20(2):198.

---. “FMJ 45 Long Colt/.410-Gauge Shotshell Model D Derringer,” 1994; 26(2):144.

--- .”Haskell 45 ACP Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1992; 24(1): 75.

---. “Intratec Tec 22 Scorpion Pistol,” 1990; 22(1): 51-54.

---. “Parker 45 Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1991; 23(3): 859-861.

---. “380 Jennings Firearms Model 59,” 1994; 26(2): 132-133.

---. “9mm Lorcin Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1995; 27(1) 8-10.

Thompson, E., and Qanass, N., “9mm Danshway Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1992; 24(3): 311-313.

Vagnozzi, V., “Information on the M3 SMG Grease Gun,” 1989; 21(1): 74.

Vaughan, R.T., and Gilman, P.L., “Information of the Rogak LES P18 Pistol,” 1985; 17(2):72.

Whitemarsh, J.W., “Jennings Firearms Model J22 Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1985; 17(2): 120.

---. “Jennings Firearms Model J22 Semiautomatic Pistol Information,” 1987; 19(1): 18.

Videotapes

American Gunsmithing Institute (AGI) Armorer’s Course videotape series, including the following
titles:

Colt 1911 .45 Auto Pistol (111 min.) Browning Hi-Power Pistol (97 min.)

Remington 1100 Shotguns (120 min.)

Remington 870 Shotguns (95 min.)

FATM Training Manual Page 33 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

S&W, 1st, 2nd, 3rd, Generation Pistols (105

AR-15 Rifles (120 min.) min.)

Winchester 94 Rifles (120 min.) S&W Revolvers (120 min.)

SKS Rifles (120 min.) M1 Garand/M1A Rifles (90 min.)

Ruger Standard Auto MKI/MKII (90 min) Ruger 10/22 Rifles (60 min.)

AKS/MAK 90 Type Rifles (91 min.) Mossberg 500 Shotgun (90 min.)

Ruger Mini-14 Rifles (90 min.) Beretta 92/Taurus P-92 Pistols (90 min.)

Glock 17,19,21,23 Pistols (60 min.) M1/M2 .30 Carbine (90 min.)

Makarov Pistols (60 min.) FN FAL Rifles (128 min.)

H&K Models 91,93,94 Rifles (60 min.) Hi-Standard Auto Pistols (111 min.)

Lenny Magill Productions “Bill Wilson Presents” videotapes series including the following titles:

CZ-75 (72 min.)

Sig Sauer P226 (74 min.)

Lenny Magill productions videotapes under the following titles:

Mastering the AR-15 (120 min.) Rock‘n Roll # 2 (50 minutes)

Center X M1A/M14 (120 min.) Complete Sigma (45 min.)

Mastering Revolvers (70 min.) U.S. Marines Firepower (75 min.)

Rock’n Roll #1(45 min.) Complete Ruger .22 Pistol (67 min.)

Complete Ruger P-Series (45 min.) Mastering the Mini-Glock (110 min)

U.S. Government training films converted to videotape and marketed by GunVideo, 4585 Murphy
Canyon Road, San Diego, CA:

Thompson Sub-Machine Gun (97 min) Fundamentals of Small Arms (30 min.)

Infantry Weapons and Their Effects (30 min.) B.A.R.-Browning Automatic Rifle (20 min.)

Weapons of the Infantry (41 min.)

Videotapes from other sources marketed by Lenny Magill Productions under the following titles:

• Firestorm (60 min.)

• Shooting the Uzi the Israeli Way (70 min.)
FATM Training Manual Page 34 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

• Knob Creek Machine Gun Shoot (60 min.)

• The Colt M-16 Rifle (20 min.)
Anite Productions, P.O. Box 375, Pinole, CA, videotapes under the following titles:

• Deadly Force (100 min.)

• Deadly Weapons (106 min.)
• Deadly Effects (60 min.)
Dillon Productions, 8009 East Dillon’s Way, Scottsdale, AZ. videotape:

• Firestorm in the Desert - Machine Gun Magic (117 min.)

A & E Television Networks, 126 Fifth Avenue, New York, NY, videotape series:

• The Story of the Gun, Vol. I-IV (50 min. each volume)

Magnum Research, Inc., 7110 University Avenue, N.E., Minneapolis, MN, videotape:

• Desert Eagle Pistol and Friends (20 min.)

REFERENCE MATERIALS

MANUFACTURE OF MODERN FIREARMS

Books

Hatcher, J.S., Jury, F.J., and Weller, J., Firearms Investigation, Identification and Evidence, 2nd
edition, Stackpole Books, Harrisburg, PA, 1957, Chapters 3-6.

Herb, C.O., Machine Tools at Work, The Industrial Press, New York, 1942.

“Machinery Handbook, 25th Edition”

Mathews, J.H., Firearms Identification, Volume I, Charles C. Thomas, Springfield, IL, 1962, pp. 1-
9.

Moltrecht, K.H., Machine Shop Practice Vol 1 & 2

Oberg, Jones & Horton, Machinist's Handbook Revised 21st Edition

“Ruger Investment Casting (Company Brochure)”

Steindler, Firearms Dictionary

Periodicals

Bird, J., “How Handguns Are Made,” Handguns, Feb. 1996, pp. 70-73.
FATM Training Manual Page 35 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

“Choke Tube Roundup!” Guns & Ammo, July 1994.

Peterson, H.L., “The Development of Firearms,” American Rifleman, Parts 3 and 4, May and Jun.,
1960.

Ruger Staff, “Ruger’s Gun Talk - Rifled Barrels,” Guns and Ammo, Mar. 1997.

Sitton, G., “Blackstar Barrel Accurizing,” Guns and Ammo, Aug. 1994.

S & W Staff Report, “How S & W Builds Great Guns,” Smith & Wesson Handguns - 96, PJS
Publications, Peoria, IL. 1996.

Weller, J., “The Quiet Revolution in U.S. Firearms Manufacture, Part 1,” American Rifleman, Jan.
1971.

---. “The Quiet Revolution in U.S. Firearms Manufacture, Part 2 - Sporting Rifles,” American
Rifleman, Feb. 1971.

---. “The Quiet Revolution in U.S. Firearms Manufacture, Part 3 - Shotguns,” American Rifleman,
Mar. 1971.

---. “The Silent Revolution at Savage and Ithaca Gun Co.,” American Rifleman, Nov. 1972.

AFTE Journal

Ball,P., and Mikko,D., “Proofmarks,” 1992; 24(1): 14-15.

Biasotti, A. A., “Rifling Methods: Individual Characteristics Produced,” 1981; 13(3):34.

Chenow, R.W., and Lemmer, J.T., “Use of Investment Castings in the Manufacture of Firearm
Components,” 1994; 26(1):64-76.

Goddard, C.H., “Proof Tests and Proof Marks,” 1983; 15(2): 116-142.

Haag, L.C., “Heckler & Koch Polygonal Rifling,” 1977; 9(2):45-47.

Harden, L.R., “Rohm Manufacturing Plant,” 1978; 10(1):15.

Lansing, J.F., “Electrochemical Machining: A New Barrel Making Process, Part 2, Testing the
Coonan Arms Model B Pistol and the Reproducibility of Rifling Stria,” 1988; 20(4): 396-403.

Papke, R.E., “Electrochemical Machining: A New Barrel Making Process,” 1988; 20(1): 48-52.

Sugarman, L.A., “Eddy Manufacturing Co., Caliber .45 Auto Pistol,” 1982; 14(1): 43.

Swearengen, T.F., “Polygonal Rifling,” 1973; 5(2): 32.

Templin, R.H., “Manufacture of a M10 SMG Receiver,” 1985; 17(2): 110.

FATM Training Manual Page 36 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Videotapes

Shotguns in Valtrompia, How a Gun is Made (Com Nasce Un’Arma), Consorzio Armaioli
Bresciani, Gardone Valtrompia, Italy, 1995 (English version).

FATM Training Manual Page 37 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

E. MANUFACTURE OF MODERN AMMUNITION

1. Define in your notebook and know the meaning of the following terms as they
relate to modern ammunition and its manufacture:

Cartridge Copper-coated lead bullet

Jacketed bullet Headstamp
Cartridge case Nylon-coated lead bullet
Bullet sizing Proof cartridge
Primer "Silvertip" bullet
Wadcutter bullet Tapered cartridge
Shotshell Antimony
Semi-wadcutter bullet Extractor groove
Shotshell casing Arsenic
Soft point bullet Gauge
Bottleneck cartridge Chilled shot
Spitzer bullet Battery cup
Rebated-rim cartridge High brass, low brass
Swaging Brass
Rimless cartridge Lubaloy
Cast lead bullet "Rule of 17"
Rimmed cartridge Dram equivalent
Mold marks Wadding
Semi-rimmed cartridge Single base, double base
Truncated-nosed bullet Shot collar
Shoulder Boattail bullet
Cannelure Crimp
Neck Casting seam
Ogive Bunter
Mouth Sprue
Brass-coated lead bullet Bullet
Head Round-nosed bullet

FATM Training Manual Page 38 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

(Use Training Assignment #9 and Practical Exercise #1 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _________
Examiner Date

2. Sketch the cross-section of Berdan and Boxer primers, showing their relationship to
the head of the cartridge.

(Use Training Assignment #10 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _________
Examiner Date

3. Discuss the purpose and essential ingredients of priming mixture used in modern
cartridges including lead-free primers.

(Use Training Assignment #10 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

4. Know and discuss the difference between caliber and caliber type. Illustrate this
difference by relating these terms to a discussion of the .22 caliber, .30 caliber and .38
caliber families of cartridges.

(Use Training Assignment #10 and Practical Exercise #2 to complete this objective.)

________________ ________
Examiner Date

5. Visit at least one ammunition-manufacturing facility such as Remington, Federal or

Winchester to observe the manufacture of rimfire and centerfire cartridges and
shotshells. Make detailed notes of the manufacturing processes and generate a
written report for section files. Also, prepare an oral presentation for section members
upon your return. Particular emphasis should be placed on pellet and bullet
manufacture, shotshell casing and cartridge case manufacture and the steps involved
in the loading of cartridges and shotshells. Coordinate this visit with your Technical
Lead.

________________ ________
Examiner Date

REFERENCE MATERIALS

MODERN AMMUNITION EVOLUTION AND MANUFACTURE

The following reference materials serve several purposes:

FATM Training Manual Page 39 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

• to provide a wider range of resources should you have a particular interest in a given topic.
• to provide reference materials for your future professional use.
• to allow you to gain additional depth in particular subject areas.
Should you encounter other references in this category, you are encouraged to make additional notes
about them at the end of this listing.

Books

ANSI/SAAMI Centerfire Pistol & Revolver Voluntary Performance Standards, Sporting Arms and
Ammunition Manufacturers’ Institute, Wilton, CT, current edition.

ANSI/SAAMI Centerfire Rifle Voluntary Performance Standards, Sporting Arms and Ammunition
Manufacturers’ Institute, Wilton, CT, current edition.

ANSI/SAAMI Rimfire Voluntary Performance Standards, Sporting Arms and Ammunition Manufacturers’
Institute, Wilton, CT, current edition.

ANSI/SAAMI Shotshell Voluntary Performance Standards, Sporting Arms and Ammunition Manufacturers’
Institute, Wilton, CT, current edition.

Association of Firearm and Tool Mark Examiners Standardization Committee, Glossary of the Association
of Firearm and Tool Mark Examiners (Appendix F, Firearm Ignition Systems), AFTE website

Barnes, F.C., Cartridges of the World, DBI Books, Inc., Northbrook, IL, current edition.

Bussard, Ammo Encyclopedia

Davis, T.L., The Chemistry of Powder and Explosives, reprinted by Angriff Press, Las Vegas, NV
(Originally printed in two separate volumes in 1941 and 1943; also reprinted by John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1950.) pp. 244-330, pp. 400-458.

Frost, G.E., Ammunition Making, An Insider’s Story, National Rifle Association, Fairfax, VA, 1990.

“The Ever-changing Shotshell Story,” Gun Digest, 1973 edition, DBI Books, Northbrook, IL.

Hackley, F.W., Woodin, W.H., and Scranton, E.L., History of Modern U.S. Military Small Arms
Ammunition, MacMillan Co, 1967.

Halsey, A., ed., The NRA Handloader’s Guide, National Rifle Association, Washington, DC, 1968.

Handloaders’ Bullet Making Annual, Wolf Publishing Co., Prescott, AZ, current edition.

Hatcher, J.S., Hatcher’s Notebook, Military Service Publishing Co., Harrisburg, PA, 1947, pp. 300-333.

Hatcher, J.S., Jury, F.J., and Weller, J., Firearms Investigation, Identification and Evidence, 2nd edition,
Stackpole Books, Harrisburg, PA, 1957, Chapters 3-6.

Hayes, T.J., Elements of Ordnance, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, 1938.

FATM Training Manual Page 40 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Hoyen, G.A., The History and Development of Small Arms Ammunition, Volumes I-II, Armory
Publications, Tacoma, 1981.

The Illustrated Reference of Cartridge Dimensions, Wolfe Publishing Company, Prescott, AZ, 1993.

Labbett, P., Military Small Arms Ammunition of the World 1945-1980

Logan, H.C., Cartridges, A Pictorial Digest of Small Arms Ammunition, Standard Publications, 1948.

“Lyman Reloading Manual”

Mann, F.W., The Bullet’s Flight from Powder to Target, Standard Printing and Publishing Co., Huntington,
WV. (Reprinted by Palladium Press for the NRA Firearms Classics Library, 1997).

Ohart, T.C., Elements of Ammunition, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, 1946.

SAAMI Publication #200, Smokeless Powder, Sporting Arms and Ammunition Manufacturers’ Institute,
Wilton, CT.

SAAMI Publication #201, Primers, Sporting Arms and Ammunition Manufacturers’ Institute, Wilton, CT.

SAAMI Publication #202, Sporting Ammunition, Sporting Arms and Ammunition Manufacturers’ Institute,
Wilton, CT.

SAAMI Publication #204, Facts About Sporting Ammunition, Sporting Arms and Ammunition
Manufacturers’ Institute, Wilton, CT.

SAAMI Publication #226, Ammunition Types and Characteristics - Handguns, Sporting Arms and
Ammunition Manufacturers’ Institute, Wilton, CT.

Sharp, P.B., Complete Guide to Handloading, Funk and Wagnells, New York, 1937.

---. The Rifle in America, William Morrow & Co., New York, 1938, pp. 28-43.

Simmons, R.F., Wildcat Cartridges, William Morrow & Co., 1947.

“Speer Reloading Manual”

Steindler, Firearms Dictionary

Periodicals
“Fundamentals -- Internal Ballistics,” American Rifleman, Feb. 1963, pp. 32-35.

“Gunpowder Development,” American Rifleman, Oct. 1959, pp. 38-40.

Hatcher, J.S., “This Stuff Gunpowder,” American Rifleman, Aug. 1949, pp. 32-34 and Sep. 1949, pp. 35-
36.

“Modern Gunpowders”, American Rifleman, Oct. 1949, pp.26-30.

Weller, J., “Quality in U.S. Ammunition“, American Rifleman, Oct. 1975, pp.48-51.
FATM Training Manual Page 41 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

AFTE Journal

Bydal, B.A., “Percussion Primer Mixes,” 1990; 22(1): 1-26.

Dillon, J.H., “The Manufacture of Conventional Smokeless Powder,” 1991; 23(2): 682-688.

Johnson, T.D., and Matty, W., “Eclipse All Plastic Shotshells,” 1983; 15(4):60.

Matty, W.P., “Primer Composition and Gunshot Residue,” 1987; 19(1): 8-13.

Videotapes

Every Single Round, Federal Cartridge Company, Anoka, MN, 1993.

Metallic Cartridge Reloading, Lenny Magill Productions, San Diego, CA.

FATM Training Manual Page 42 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

F. INSTRUMENTATION
1. Differentiate between the following:

compound microscope
stereo microscope
comparison microscope
(Use Training Assignment #30 and Practical Exercise #7 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

2. Study the instruction manual for the various brands of stereo microscopes.

(Use Training Assignment #30 and Practical Exercise #7 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _______
Examiner Date

3. Familiarize yourself with the instruction manuals and the mechanical and optical
aspects of the various brands of comparison microscopes in the Firearm Section as
well as other commercially available brands. Note the differences and similarities in
each, both mechanically and optically.

(Use Training Assignment #30 and Practical Exercise #7 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _______
Examiner Date

4. Familiarize yourself with the following types of light sources, which are in use in the
Firearm Section on the comparison microscopes.

Fluorescent
Fiber optics (with and without filters)
LED

(Use Training Assignment #30 and Practical Exercise #7 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _______
Examiner Date

5. Using each type of light source in the field of view on a comparison microscope, note
the differences in the quality of each using the following different surfaces: lead
bullets, jacketed bullets, various types of cartridge cases, and various types of
surfaces containing impressed and striated toolmarks. Manipulate the above light
sources with respect to angle and vary the intensity of the light source, if possible.

FATM Training Manual Page 43 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Gain an appreciation for the effects of varying the angle and intensity for each light
source on each type of surface. Discuss this with your Training Officer.

(Use Training Assignments #30 and #31 and Practical Exercises #7 and #8 to complete this
objective.)

__________________ _______
Examiner Date

6. Set up a comparison microscope for your vision requirements and focus the "hairline.”
Prepare the microscope for your personal use, and familiarize yourself with each set
of objective lenses on your comparison microscope. Become familiar different
photographic systems used in the Firearm Section with the comparison microscopes.
Using all of the objective lenses, make exposures of the same objects while varying
the exposure, intensity and angle of the light sources. Calculate the magnification for
each set of objective lenses on your comparison microscope.

(Use Training Assignment #30 and Practical Exercise #7 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

7. Become familiar with and demonstrate the use of the following equipment:

a. micrometer
b. inertia bullet puller
c. steel rule (NIST traceable measuring devices)
d. reticle in ocular lens of binocular microscope
e. balances and scales located in the Firearm Section
f. Stage micrometer
g. Digital (electronic) micrometer
(Use Training Assignment #31 and Practical Exercise #7 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _______
Examiner Date

REFERENCE MATERIALS

MICROSCOPY AND INSTRUMENTATION

The following reference materials serve several purposes:

• to provide a wider range of additional resources should you have a particular interest in a
given topic.
• to provide reference materials for your future professional use.
• to allow you to gain additional depth in particular subject areas.
FATM Training Manual Page 44 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Should you encounter other references in this category, you are encouraged to make additional notes
about them at the end of this listing.

AFTE Journal

Biasotti, A.A., “Photomicrography and Illumination: Some Critical Factors,” 1979; 11(4):60.

Chamberlain, D., “Microscope Comparison Bridge,” 1972; 4(1):9.

Cook, C.W., “Basic Optics,” 1985; 17(4):14.

Haemmerle, C., “Easily Made Diffusers for Fiber Optic Illuminators,” 1990; 22(4): 446-447.

Hueske, E.E., “Application of Fiber Optic Videomicroscopy to Firearm and Toolmark Examination: A
Further Look,” 1993; 25(2):132-139.

---. “Preliminary Report on the Application of Fiber Optic Videomicroscopy to Firearm and Toolmark
Examination,” 1990; 22(3):280-287.

Lansing, J.F., “Customized Comparison Microscope,” 1973; 5(5):25.

Lutz, M.C., “Evaluation of New Fiber Optics System,” 1986; 18(1):12.

Moran, B., “Building an Inexpensive High Intensity Fluorescent Lighting System for the Comparison
Microscope,” 1997; 29(1):49-54.

Ziegler, P.A., “Examination Techniques: The Beam Splitter and Reverse Lighting,” 1983; 15(2):37.

Periodicals

Schlueter and Gumperty, “The Stereomicroscope - Instrumentation and Techniques,” American

Laboratory, Apr. 1975.

Manuals

Leica Microsystems, Inc., “Operating Instructions for the K2700 Universal Forensic Microscope (UFM IV).”

---. “The Leica Universal Forensic Microscope”

---. “Reference Manual, Photostar Automatic Camera System”

---. “The Leica DMC Comparison Microscope”

FATM Training Manual Page 45 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Basic References

American Optical, "Procedure for Bullet Comparison"

Bartels, P., "Microscope Optics”

Needham, G.H., "The Microscope A Practical Guide”

FATM Training Manual Page 46 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

G. EXAMINATION OF FIREARMS
1. Define each of the following types of firearms and explain in detail the operation of
each type to include the loading of cartridges and the subsequent movement of the
cartridge case and/or bullet after firing.

a. revolver, single and double action

b. autoloading pistol, single and double action
c. derringer and single shot pistols
d. bolt-action rifle
e. autoloading rifle
f. pump-action rifle
g. various single shot rifles
h. various submachine gun
i. assault rifle
j. muzzle loading firearm
k. percussion revolvers
(Use Training Assignment #11 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

2. Explain and illustrate the differences between a gas-operated and a recoil-operated

autoloading shotgun.

(Use Training Assignment #12 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

3. Explain and illustrate the differences between the following types of autoloading
pistols:

blowback action
delayed blowback action
gas-delayed blowback action
short recoil action

(Use Training Assignment #12 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _______
FATM Training Manual Page 47 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Examiner Date
4. Partially disassemble and reassemble the following (or similar) revolvers. Photograph
and note the differences in their mechanisms. Identify each part by name.

Smith & Wesson double-action revolver

Colt double-action revolver
Ruger double-action revolver
"Old style" Ruger single-action revolver
"New style" Ruger single-action revolver

(Use Training Assignment #15 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _______
Training Officer Date

5. Field strip and reassemble the following (or similar) pistols. Note and photograph
differences in their mechanisms. Identify each part by name.

a. 9mm Luger Browning, Hi-power, pistol

b. 45 Auto caliber U.S. Pistol, Model 1911A1, pistol
c. 9mm Luger Steyr, GB, pistol
d. 9mm Luger Glock, Model 17, pistol
e. 9mm Luger Beretta, Model 92F, pistol
f. 9mm Luger SIG-Sauer, Model 226, pistol
g. 9mm Luger Smith & Wesson, Model 669, pistol
h. 9mm Luger H&K, P7, pistol
i. 357 Magnum Desert Eagle pistol
j. 9mm Luger Walther P38 pistol
k. 380 Automatic Walther PPK pistol
l. 8mm Arisaka Type 14 pistol
m. 9mm Luger P08 pistol

(Use Training Assignments #16, #17, and #18 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _______
Examiner Date

6. Field strip and reassemble the following (or similar) submachine guns. Note
differences in the mechanism and operation of each. Make appropriate photographs
for your notes and identify the major parts by name.

FATM Training Manual Page 48 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

a. .45 Auto caliber RPB Industries, M10, submachine gun (open bolt and closed
bolt)
b. 9mm Luger SWD Inc., M11/Nine, submachine gun
c. 9mm Uzi submachine gun
d. 9mm H&K, MP5, submachine gun
e. .45 Auto caliber US M3 submachine gun
f. 9mm Intratec, TEC 9, submachine gun
g. .45 Auto caliber Thompson submachine gun

(Use Training Assignment #19 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _______
Examiner Date

7. Familiarize yourself with the operation of each of the following (or similar) firearms.
Identify the major parts by name and make appropriate notes.

a. 308 Winchester caliber U.S. Rifle, Model 70 rifle

b. 223 Remington caliber Colt Rifle, Model AR-15
c. 25-06 caliber Ruger model M77 rifle
d. 7.62 x 39mm caliber SKS rifle
e. 7.62 x 39mm caliber AK47 rifle
f. 30-30 Win. Caliber Winchester 94 rifle
g. 303 British caliber Lee Enfield rifle
h. 30-06 Springfield caliber Browning BAR rifle
i. 30-06 Springfield caliber Remington, Model 03-A3

(Use Training Assignments #21 and #22 to complete this objective.)

__________________ _______
Examiner Date

8. Familiarize yourself with the operation of each of the following (or similar) shotguns.
Identify the major parts by name and make appropriate notes.

a. Remington, Model 870, shotgun

b. Winchester, Model 12, shotgun
c. Mossberg, Model 500, shotgun
d. Browning, Model A5, shotgun
e. Remington, Model 1100, shotgun

FATM Training Manual Page 49 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

f. NEF, model Pardner, shotgun

g. Stevens/J.C. Higgins, Model 311, side-by-side, double-barrel, shotgun
h. Beretta, over-under, double-barrel, shotgun
i. A long recoil action shotgun, such as the Browning A5.

(Use Training Assignment #23 and #24 to complete this objective.)

_________________ _________
Examiner Date

9. Familiarize yourself with the operation of each of the following (or similar) firearms.
Identify the major parts by name and make appropriate notes.

a. .22 caliber Marlin, Model 60 rifle

b. .22 caliber Winchester, Model 62, rifle
c. .22 caliber Ruger, Model 10/22, rifle
d. .22 caliber Ruger, MKII, pistol
e. .22 caliber Browning, Challenger III, pistol
f. .22 caliber High Standard, Dura-Matic, pistol
(Use Training Assignment #25 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

10. Familiarize yourself with the operation of each of the following (or similar) firearms.
Identify the major parts by name and make appropriate notes.

a. .25 Auto caliber Raven Arms pistol

b. .25 Auto caliber Colt Jr. pistol
c. .25 Auto caliber Beretta pistol
d. .25 Auto caliber Lorcin pistol
e. .25 Auto caliber Bauer pistol
f. .25 Auto caliber Titan pistol
g. .25 Auto caliber Browning pistol
(Use Training Assignment #20 to complete this objective.)

__________________ __________
Examiner Date

11. Familiarize yourself with the Firearm Section Range Rules and Safety Rules regarding
firearms. Demonstrate, using firearms from No. 4 through No. 9 above and others,
how to place firearms in a safe condition, how to load and unload each, how to handle

FATM Training Manual Page 50 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

and carry these firearms in the Laboratory, and how to safely test fire each of these
different types of firearms.

(Use Training Assignments #15 through #25 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

12. Using the firearms in No. 4 through No. 9 above, study the various safety mechanisms
employed in each design. Include thumb safety, grip safety, magazine safety, firing
pin block, transfer bar, and any other mechanical safety. Illustrate how the firing
mechanisms are blocked, interrupted, or otherwise stopped from operating.

(Use Training Assignments #15 through #29 and Practical Exercises #3 through #6 to complete
this objective.)

__________________ ________
Examiner Date

13. Familiarize yourself with the Firearm Section equipment used for measurement of
trigger pull. Determine the trigger pull on at least one firearm from each of the
firearms listed in the No. 4 through No. 9 groups, using various methods and compare
the results.

(Use Training Assignments #15 through #29 and Practical Exercises #3 through #6 to complete
this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

14. Discuss with your Training Officer the protocol to be used in determining whether a
firearm "can be made to fire without pulling the trigger.” Demonstrate, using one
firearm from each of the No. 4 through No. 9 groups of firearms above, how to conduct
this type of examination.

(Use Training Assignments #15 through #29 and Practical Exercises #3 through #6 to complete
this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

15. Research, define, and/or determine the implications of the following terms as they
relate to safety in the operation of a firearm.

a. excessive headspace
b. bore obstruction
c. barrel bulge
d. broken extractor

FATM Training Manual Page 51 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

e. push off
f. trigger shoe
g. false half-cock
h. slam-fire
i. inadequate/improper sear engagement
j. defective safety
k. high primer
l. rail splitting
m. hairline cracks
n. improper timing
o. excessive pressure
p. dented barrel
q. jar-off
(Use Training Assignment #28 and Practical Exercise #5 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

16. Become familiar with the Section firearm range including its physical dimensions,
construction of walls and backstop, and bullet velocity limitations. Know how to test
fire firearms thought to be possibly unsafe. Become familiar with the use of all the
equipment on the range. Know the range rules and emergency medical treatment
procedures.

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

17. Attend armorer training offered by various manufacturers of firearms, at their

manufacturing facilities, if possible. Coordinate these with your Technical Lead.

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

18. Explore the capabilities in restoring an inoperable evidence firearm to operating

condition and also know the limitations and reservations, which must be considered.
Discuss these with your Technical Lead/experienced examiner.

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

19. Review and record the references in the Firearm Section library, which can be used to
identify the manufacturer and/or source of a firearm using the following criteria:

a. proof marks
FATM Training Manual Page 52 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

b. inspector marks
c. factory numbers and markings
d. serial number
e. part numbers
f. company logos
(Use Training Assignment #29 and to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

20. Discuss the following topics with your Technical Lead/experienced examiner and
become familiar with the capabilities and limitations of the section in regard to these
areas:

a. Marking evidence firearms, recognition, documentation, recovery, and retention

of trace evidence from the bore of a firearm prior to test firing.
b. Determining whether an evidence firearm has been "recently" fired
c. Determining the manufacturer of a firearm from an examination of a part from a
firearm.
d. Determining the manufacturer of a firearm from a photograph and comparing an
evidence firearm to a photograph
(Use Training Assignment #29 and Practical Exercise #6 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

21. Become knowledgeable about how to submit evidence firearms to the Laboratory
when they have been recovered from water or when they are in a rusted condition.
Also, become familiar with the capabilities, limitations, and reservations, which must
be considered when restoring such firearms to operating condition to obtain test
specimens from them.

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

22. Discuss with your Training Officer how to conduct an examination to determine if a
firearm has been altered to fire full automatic. Using a firearm, which has been altered
to fire full automatic, conduct this type of examination and verbally report your
findings.

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

FATM Training Manual Page 53 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

REFERENCE MATERIALS

GENERAL PRELIMINARY EXAMINATIONS OF FIREARMS

The following reference materials serve several purposes:

• to provide a wider range of additional resources should you have a particular interest in a
given topic.
• to provide reference materials for your future professional use.
• to allow you to gain additional depth in particular subject areas.
Should you encounter other references in this category, you are encouraged to make additional notes
about them at the end of this listing.

General
st
Burrard, G., Identification of Firearms and Forensic Ballistics, 1 edition, Charles Scribner Sons, NY,
1934, revised edition, A.S. Barnes & Co., NY, 1964.

Davis, J.E., An Introduction to Tool Marks, Firearms and the Striagraph, Charles C. Thomas, Springfield,
IL, 1958.

Gunther, J.D., and Gunther, C.O., The Identification of Firearms, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York,
1935.

Hatcher, J.S., Hatcher’s Notebook, Military Service Publishing Company, Harrisburg, PA, 1947.
nd
Hatcher, J.S., Jury, F.J. and Weller, J., Firearms Investigation, Identification and Evidence, 2 edition,
Stackpole Books, Harrisburg, PA, 1957.

Heard, B.E., Handbook of Firearms and Ballistics: Examining and Interpreting Forensic Evidence, John
Wiley & Sons, New York, 1997.

Mathews, J.H., Firearms Identification, Volumes I - III, Charles C. Thomas, Springfield, IL, 1962.
rd
NRA Firearms Fact Book, 3 edition, National Rifle Association, Fairfax, VA, 1989.

AFTE Journal

Case Notes

“California Department of Justice Firearms Toolmark Identification

Training Syllabus: Professionalism,” 1991; 23(1):559-578.

Examination Protocols and Procedure

“California Department of Justice Firearms Toolmark Identification Training Syllabus: Professionalism,”

1991; 23(2):703-715.

FATM Training Manual Page 54 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Worksheets
“California Department of Justice Firearms Toolmark Identification Training Syllabus: Professionalism,”
1991; 23(2):712.

Cooper, R.E., “Firearm Safety and Trigger Pull Worksheet,” 1995; 27(3):vii.

Hildebrandt, C., “Problems with Preservation of Evidence for Secondary Gun Examination,” 1991;
23(4):982-985.

Howe, W.J., “Laboratory Work Sheets,” Newsletter #2, Aug. 1969, pp. 13-14.

Jordan, T.D., “Oklahoma State Bureau of Investigation Firearms Laboratory: A Pictorial Display,” 1979;
11(4):46.

Thompson, R.C., “Firearms Malfunction Worksheets,” 1983; 15(1):100.

Untitled insert, Newsletter #3, Oct. 1969, pp. 17, 18, 21.

Untitled insert, Newsletter #4, Dec. 1969, pp. 25, 27.

Reporting of Conclusions

“California Department of Justice Firearms Toolmark Identification Training Syllabus: Professionalism,”

1991; 23(2):719-726.

Accidental Discharge Potential

Berg, S.O., “Air Gun Safety Designs,” 1992; 24(2):165-171.

---. “Author’s Response,” 1991; 23(3):781-783.

---. “False Safety Notch: Firearms Design Problem,” 1989; 21(4):580-582.

---. “Firearms Safety Design Origins and the Firearms,” 1996; 28(4):211-221.

---. “Gas Handling, Containment, Deflection and Venting for Bolt Action Rifles,” 1992; 24(4):375-380.

---. “History of Revolver Safeties,” 1982; 14(4):29.

---. “History of Revolver Safeties,” 1989; 21(2):309-313.

---. “History of the Derringer Pistol,” 1985; 17(3):91.

---. “Jar Off: A Critical Firearms Design Factor,” 1990; 22(4):390-394.

---. “Lever Action Firearms Safeties,” 1988; 20(1):64-71.

---. “Magazine Safeties: Important Safety Design,” 1993; 25(4):301-307.

FATM Training Manual Page 55 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

---. “Rohm RG Industries Firearms and Safeties,” 1986; 18(2):72.

---. “Safety Design: Remington Semiautomatic Shotguns,” 1989; 21(3):496-499.

---. “Safety Loading/Unloading Designs of Revolvers,” 1991; 23(4):931-939.

---. “Safety Notch: Design Dangers Through the Ages,” 1994; 26(1):4-10.

Binsbacher, H., “Caution: When Examining Remington Arms Co. Model of 1911,” 1973; 5(3):21.

Brundage, D.J., “Bauer Accidental Discharge,” 1982; 14(1):62.

Buckleton, J.S., and Walsh, K.A.J., “Perplexing Accidental Discharge of Ammunition,” 1992; 24(1):46-54.

Chenow, R.W., “False Half Cock Position in Semiautomatic Handguns,” 1977; 9(2):179.

Conrad, W.E., “Browning Hi Power Without Magazine Safety,” 1978; 10(2):87.

Denio, D.J., “Uzi Semiautomatic Carbine: A Potential Hazard,” 1984; 16(3):19.

Doyle, J.S., “Possible Malfunction of a Savage 30-30 Rifle,” 1983; 15(4):5.

Dujanovich, M.B., “Accidental Firearms Discharge,” 1985; 17(2):56.

Fineman, L.T., “Taurus Recall,” 1978; 10(2):33.

Fournier, R.J., “COP Pistol: Additional Information,” 1983; 15(4):18.

---. “Dangerous Doubling,” 1982; 14(1):44.

Gamboe, T.E., “Arminius HW3 Hammerblock Failure,” 1993; 25(4):286-291.

Garrison, T., “Altered Firing Pin Contributes to Accidental Discharge,” 1991; 23(4):908-909.

Gieszl, R., and Wolslagel, P.F., “Accidental Death by a Pen Gun,” 1990; 22(4):448-450.

Hildebrandt, C., “Editorial,” 1991; 23(3):780-781.

Komar, S.M., “Accidental Firing of an RG Pistol,” 1973; 5(1):25.

Kreiser, M.J., “Thompson Center Lock Mechanisms,” 1983; 15(2):15.

Krivosta, G.G., “One in a Million Firearms Accident,” 1993; 25(3):206-208.

Lipscomb, J.W., and Harden, L.R., “Evaluating Trigger Mechanisms for Sensitivity to Shock,” 1985;
17(4):4.

Maruoka, R.K., “Unsafe Condition,” 1995; 27(3):233-236.

Masur, H.Q., “$2,000,000 Defense,” 1983; 15(1):69.

Molnar, S., “Use of Scale Drawings to Establish Facts in Shooting Cases,” 1970; 2(2):2-14.
FATM Training Manual Page 56 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Pex, J.O., “Accidental Discharge of a Smith and Wesson Model 659,” 1994; 26(1):18-20.

Phillips, G.R., “Ruger Security-Six Revolver for Accidental Discharge,” 1983; 15(4):56.

“Product Recalls Warnings,” 1992; 24(1):80.

Reitz, J.A., “Trigger Shoes Causing Accidental Shootings,” 1976; 8(4):64.

Robinson, E.L., “Accidental Discharge of a Cobray Selective Fire Pistol,” 1990; 22(1):43-46.

“Remington Arms Recall,” 1979; 11(1):19.

“Safety Notice: Galil Rifle System,” 1985; 17(4):3.

“Safety Notice: Galil Rifles,” 1985; 17(3):62.

Silverwater, H., Shoshani, E., Argaman, U., Hocherman, G., and Schecter, B., “Accidental Discharge of a
FN Browning Hi-Power Pistol,” 1996; 28(4):233-240.

Swearengen, T.F., “Firearms Accident Investigation Involving Ithaca Model 37 Police Shotgun,” 1975;
7(1):37.

Thompson, E., “Nick in Time,” 1996; 28(1):45-47.

Thompson, R.W., and Amble, A.M., “Ruger Mark 1 Pistol Accidental Discharges,” 1980; 12(2):16.

Vaughan, R.T., “Accidental Eruption of a Cartridge,” 1980: 12(3):48.

Vaughan, R.T., and Kreiser, M.J., “Potential Accidental Discharge in a Semiautomatic Firearm,” 1990;
22(1):47-48.

Vitale, V., “Potential Safety Hazard Interdynamic KG 99,” 1984; 16(3):24.

---. “Potential Safety Hazard Interdynamic KG 99,” 1985; 17(2):88.

Warren, G., “Temperature Initiated Discharge,” 1991; 23(3):849.

Alterations and Modifications

Barabash, T., “Unique Springfield Rifle,” 1976; 8(4):41.

Biasotti, A.A., “Semiautomatic Rifle That is a Full Automatic,” 1971; 3(6):22.

Branch, D.M., “Modification of 16 Gauge Shotgun To Fire 12 Gauge Shotshells,” 1983; 15(3):14.

Brundage, D.J., “Homemade Automatic,” 1978; 10(2):52.

Chenow, R.W., “Conversion of the Intratec Tec 9 to Full Auto,” 1987; 19(2):169-171.

Cunningham, J., “Hit Gun,” 1975; 7(1):40.

FATM Training Manual Page 57 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

---. “Full Auto Conversion of the Intratec Tec 9: An Update,” 1988; 20(2):165-166.

---. “Illinois State Police Model 39 Barrel Ramp Modifications,” 1983; 15(4):6.

---. “Mauser Rifle To Shotgun Conversion,” 1986; 18(1):16.

Chenow, R.W., and Lemmer, J.T., “Correction: PPS/50 Full Auto Modification Attempt Resulting in a
Dangerous Firearm,” 1990; 22(3):345.

---. “PPS/50 Full Auto Modification Attempt Resulting in a Dangerous Firearm,” 1990; 22(2):174-185.

Finor, J.M., “Uncontrollable Full Automatic Fire Occurring in a Walther Pistol, Model PP,” 1996; 28(1):48-
54.

Freeman, R.A., “M11/Nine and KG 99 Closed Bolt Semiautomatic Pistols,” 1985; 17(2):92.

Galan, J.I., “Conversion of the KG-9 Pistol,” 1983; 15(1):60.

Garland, P.V., “Another Modification of the RPB,” 1985; 17(2):71.

Grey, D.T., “Alteration of an RPB Industries Model 10 Pistol,” 1983; 15(4):26.

Hofmeister, A.G., “Conversion of .36 Navy To Fire .38 Smith & Wesson,” 1978; 10(2):65.

---. “Conversion of an Obsolete Revolver,” 1983; 15(2):14.

Johnson, T.D., “Machine Gun Auto Sear,” 1988; 20(3):322-324.

Kennington, R.H., “Ruger Blackhawk Automatic Revolver Conversion,” 1978; 10(1):34.

Laskowski, G.E., “Full Auto Conversion of an UZI 9mm Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1995; 27(4):287-292.

Love, E.W., “Full Automatic AR-15 Rifle,” 1978; 10(2):46.

Lutz, M.C., “Atchisson Device for Conversion Unit for AR-15 & M-16 Rifles,” 1973; 5(5):18.

Matthews, J.W., “Improvised Shotshell Firearm,” 1981; 13(1):13.

Mogish, N.M., “Full Auto Uzi Conversion,” 1990; 22(2):186-187.

Molnar, S., and Nicholson, T., “Homemade Machine Gun,” 1970; 2(4):28.

Rathman, G.A., “Two or More Alterations of the RPB Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1984; 16(3):13.

Rathman, G.A., and Rudolph, N.J., “Full Auto Conversion of an AK-47 and HK94,” 1990; 22(3):302-306.

Schubert, K.H., “Full Auto Conversion Of An RPB Industries M10,” 1989; 21(3):511-512.

Stengel, R.F., “Illegitimate Smith & Wesson Model 59 Autos?,” 1977; 9(2):167.

Templin, R.H., “Full Auto Conversion of F.N. Belgium, FNC,” 1989; 21(3):509-510.

FATM Training Manual Page 58 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Thompson, E., “Conversion of a 45 Caliber Semiautomatic Pistol to 9mm Parabellum,” 1989; 21(4):650.

---. “Converted Colt Semiautomatic Pistol Revisited,” 1990; 22(3):337-338.

---. “Modified Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1988; 20(2):195.

---. “Two Shot Double Barrel Shotgun Suicide,” 1991; 23(4):973-976.

Thornton, J.I., and Rios, F.G., “Full Automatic Fire Conversions of the Colt AR 15 and Variants,” 1983;
15(1):114.

Trahin, J.L., “Disguised Conversion of the RPB (MAC 10) Pistol,” 1988; 20(4):452-453.
Yales, L., “Modified Rohm Revolver,” 1980; 12(1):41.

Zahn, M.S., “Browning Hi Power Automatic Pistol: Another Type of Full Automatic Modification,” 1981;
13(2):24.

---. “Browning Hi Power Automatic Pistols Full Automatic Modification,” 1978; 10(1):13.

---. “RPB Industries M10 Autoloading Pistol Full Automatic Modification,” 1980; 12(3):29.

---. “RPB Industries M10 Autoloading Pistol: New Rifling Observed,” 1981; 13(2):32.

Ward, J.G., “Information,” 1971; 3(2):26.

Barrel Obstructions

Berg, S.O., “Rifle Barrel Obstruction Tests and Experiments,” 1991; 23(4):951-957.

Barrel Ruptures

“Smith & Wesson Information“, 1979; 11(1):22.

Edwards, R.L., “Circumferential Fractures,” 1991; 23(3):806-807.

Voorhees, R.S., “Very Lucky Man,” 1976; 8(4):68.

Cartridge Case Ruptures

Andrews, D., “Warning Do Not Use Blazer 357 Magnum Ammunition in Rifles,” 1983; 15(3):12.

Dujanovich, M.B., “Accidental Firearms Discharge,” 1985; 17(2):56.

Edwards, R.L., “Circumferential Fractures,” 1991; 23(3):806-807.

Garland, P.V., “SATA Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1970; 2(7):23.

Haag, L.C., “Novel Means of Propellant Identification in Shooting Mishap,” 1983; 15(4):42.

McBeth, R.G., “Another Potentially Dangerous Weapon from a Starters Gun,” 1975; 7(1):72.

McBrayer, W.S., “Unrifled Adapter: The PC-410 Shot Shell Adapter,” 1985; 17(2):69.
FATM Training Manual Page 59 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Robinson, M.K., “Raven Pistol Firing Out of Battery,” 1988; 20(2):207-208.

Vaughan, R.T., “Accidental Eruption of a Cartridge,” 1980; 12(3):48.

Vitale, V., “Potential Safety Hazard Interdynamic KG 99,” 1984; 16(3):24.

Drop Testing

Gunnell, D.L., “Mechanical Malfunction of Safety Device,” 1978; 10(2):30.

Lipscomb, J.W., and Harden, L.R., “Evaluating Trigger Mechanisms for Sensitivity to Shock,” 1989;
21(2):382-384.

Noedel, M., Franklin, T., Krylo, J., and Kusumi, R., “Drop Testing a .45 Auto Colt 1911,” 1997; 29(2):183-
185.

Firearm Markings

Ball, P., and Mikko, D., “Proof Marks,” 1992; 24(1):14-15.

Bates, J.S., “Ithaca Serial Numbers,” 1970; 2(1):16.

Dragan, P., “Notes on Serial Numbers on the AK-47 Type, Assault Rifle,” 1996; 28(1):22-24.

Fraser, D.A., “Firearms Grip Logos & Trademarks,” 1986; 18(1):52.

Goddard, C.H., “Proof Tests and Proof Marks,” 1983; 15(2):116.

Gun Week, “Marlin Computerizes System for Recording Serial Numbers,” 1972; 4(4):20.

Guns & Ammo,” United States Military Serial Numbers for 1911, 1911A1 .45 Automatics,” 1971; 3(3):7.

Hawkins, R.R., “Colt Revolvers with Identical Serial Numbers,” 1988; 20(2):190-191.

Howe, W.J., “Location of Serial Numbers on Ruger Weapons,” 1972; 4(3):28.

Keisler, M.A., “Smith and Wesson Model SW9F and the Hidden Serial Number,” 1997; 29(2):186-187.

Kreiser, M.J., “Information on Browning Serial Numbers,” 1985; 17(2):22.

Nielson, B.C., “Location of Serial Numbers on Colt Weapons,” 1972; 4(2):40.

Improvised/Homemade Firearms

Butler, D.J., “5/8" x 4" Stove Bolt Zip,” 1974; 6(2):5.

Cooper, R.E., “Disguised 22 Caliber Weapon,” 1988; 20(2):192.

Fournier, R.J., “Rocket Gun: Homemade,” 1982; 14(1):26.

FATM Training Manual Page 60 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Garland, P.V., “Improvised Firearm: Tire Pressure Gauge,” 1989; 21(1):79.

---. “Mondial Model 999 Blank/Starter Revolver,” 1985; 17(2):52.

FBI, “Cigarette Lighter Pistol,” 1979; 11(4):57.

---. “Deadly Contraption,” 1981; 13(4):53.

---. “Double Barreled Threat,” 1981; 13(4):117.

---. “Homemade BB Gun,” 1972; 4(4):34.

---. “Homemade Pipe Shotgun,” 1981; 13(3):16.

---. “Pipe Pistol,” 1980; 12(3):75.

George, W., “Disguised 12 Gauge Shotgun,” 1988; 20(2):193.

Hamby, J.E., “Shotgun Boobytrap,” 1980; 12(1):35.

Harden, L.R., “Factual or Fake,” 1976; 8(1):59.

---. “Zip Gun,” 1975; 7(2):107.

Harriman, J.J., and Wilder, R., “Tear Gas Pen Guns: Who Will the Victim Be?” 1974; 6(4):4.

Heffernan, T.F., “What Next,” 1977; 9(2):203.

Heflin, T.F., “Two Homemade Weapons,” 1988; 20(2):204.

Hensley, O.L., “Homemade Weapons from Thailand,” 1972; 4(4):35.

Higgs, T., “Staplegun Firearm Case,” 1994; 26(1):34-36.

Lattyak, E.K., “Crude Pen Gun,” 1987; 19(3):322-323.

Lee, F.R., “Unusual Homemade Firearm,” 1979; 11(3):64.

Lewis, D.C., “Where There’s a Will There’s a Way,” 1981; 13(4):29.

Lutz, M.C., “Homemade Shotgun Used in Suicide,” 1994; 26(2):161-165.

Mason, J.J., “Conversion of Butler Associates Replica Derringer to Firing Condition,” 1989; 21(1):37.

McBeth, R.G., “Another Potentially Dangerous Weapon from a Starters Gun,” 1975; 7(1):72.

Molnar, S., “Booby Trap: Cover Story,” 1971; 3(4):6.

---. “Trap Gun: An Interesting Illegal Hunting Device,” 1980; 12(2):19.

Monument, R., “Altered Blank Revolver Identification,” 1972; 4(2):22.

Perkins, W.E., “Hazards of Firing Homemade Weapons,” 1976; 8(1):55.

FATM Training Manual Page 61 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Rodney, J.C., “Forged Firearms of the Pathan,” 1988; 20(1):85-94.

Simpson, R.L., “Modified Starter Revolver,” 1987; 19(3):303.

Smith, L.L., “Zip Guns,” 1970; 2(5):29.

Smith, R.M., “Potentially Dangerous Weapons from a Starters Gun,” 1973; 5(5):34.

Templin, R.H., “Manufacture of a M10 SMG Receiver,” 1985; 17(2):110.

Uchiyama, T., and Ishihara, M., “Forged 45 Colt Semiautomatic Pistols,” 1988; 20(1):81-84.

Woodward, R.J., “Look for the Conventional and the Bizarre,” 1978; 10(2):43.

Vagnozzi, V., “Modified Bruny Alarm Pistol,” 1989; 21(1):89.

---. “Modified S M 12 Gas Pistol,” 1989; 21(1):84.

Photography

Burton, W.E., “Actually, Axial Lighting Works,” 1991; 23(4):963-965.

Cassidy, F.H., “Method to Deal With Polaroid Film Back Problems,” 1983; 15(4):26.

Haag, L.C., “Information on Construction of High Speed Photography Unit,” 1985; 17(2):74.

Haag, L.C., and Kokanovich, J., “Shot in the Dark: A Procedure for the Photographic Documentation of
Firearm’s Muzzle Flash,” 1991; 23(4):910-918.

Lutz, M.C., and Buck, J.C., “High Speed Photography Applied to Firearms Identification,” 1984; 16(4):75.

Parian, R.W., “Sound Trigger for Stop Action Photography,” 1975; 7(2):92.

Wilhelm, R.M., “Use of High Speed Photography in Firearms Cases,” 1972; 4(2):4.

Trace Evidence Concerns

Dixon, T.R., “Trace Evidence in a Toolmarks Case,” 1975; 7(1):70-71.

Murdock, J.E., “Associative Evidence,” 1984; 16(2):5.

Versailles, J., “Metal Residue Build-Up on Tool Blades,” 1974; 6(4):7.

Trigger Pull Analyses

Cooper, R.E., “Firearm Safety and Trigger Pull Worksheet,” 1995; 27(3): vii.

Dillon, J.H., “The Trigger Scan System - Microprocessor Technology Applied to Precision Trigger Pull
Analyses,” 1999; 31(2):123-130.

FATM Training Manual Page 62 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Gamboe, T.E., “MAFS Firearms Workshop: Trigger Pull Methods,” 1986; 18(3):77.

Hamby, J.E., “Trigger Pull Data for Selected Military Weapons,” 1972; 4(1):23.

Krylo, J., and Slonina, S., “Trigger Pull Statistics,” 1985; 17(1):79.

Lomoro, V.J., “Statistical Analysis of Trigger Pulls,” 1986; 18(1):35.

Quirk, T.W., “Handgun Trigger Pull Scale/Dry Fire Safety Station,” 1994; 26(2):119-120.

Rios, F.G., and Thornton, J., “Static vs Dynamic Determination of Trigger Pull,” 1984; 16(3):84.

Rosenberg, S.F., “Some Colt Firearm Trigger Pulls from the Factory,” 1973; 5(5):5.

Templin, R.H., and Nielson, J.P., “Evaluation of the Effects of Cyanoacrylate Processing on Pistol and
Revolver Trigger Pull,” 1988; 20(4):443-445.

Thompson, E., “Preloaded vs Normal Trigger Pull Weights,” 1995; 27(1):62-64.

REFERENCE MATERIALS

TEST FIRING FOR KNOWN SPECIMENS AND OPERABILITY

General
st
Burrard, G., Identification of Firearms and Forensic Ballistics, 1 edition, Charles Scribner Sons, NY,
1934, revised edition, A.S. Barnes & Co., NY, 1964.

Davis, J.E., An Introduction to Tool Marks, Firearms and the Striagraph, Charles C. Thomas, Springfield,
IL, 1958.

Gunther, J.D., and Gunther, C.O., The Identification of Firearms, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York,
1935.

Hatcher, J.S., Hatcher’s Notebook, Military Service Publishing Company, Harrisburg, PA, 1947.
nd
Hatcher, J.S., Jury, F.J. and Weller, J., Firearms Investigation, Identification and Evidence, 2 edition,
Stackpole Books, Harrisburg, PA, 1957.

Heard, B.E., Handbook of Firearms and Ballistics: Examining and Interpreting Forensic Evidence, John
Wiley & Sons, New York, 1997.

Mathews, J.H., Firearms Identification, Volumes I-III, Charles C. Thomas, Springfield, IL, 1962.
rd
NRA Firearms Fact Book, 3 edition, National Rifle Association, Fairfax, VA, 1989.

FATM Training Manual Page 63 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

AFTE Journal

Case Notes

“California Department of Justice Firearms Toolmark Identification Training Syllabus: Professionalism,”

1991; 23(1):559-578.

Examination Protocols and Procedures

“California Department of Justice Firearms Toolmark Identification Training Syllabus: Professionalism,”

1991; 23(2):703-715.

Worksheets

“California Department of Justice Firearms Toolmark Identification Training Syllabus: Professionalism,”

1991; 23(2):712.

Cooper, R.E., “Firearm Safety and Trigger Pull Worksheet,” 1995; 27(3): vii.

Hildebrandt, C., “Problems with Preservation of Evidence for Secondary Gun Examination,” 1991;
23(4):982-985.

Howe, W.J., “Laboratory Work Sheets,” Newsletter #2, Aug. 1969, pp. 13-14.

Jordan, T.D., “Oklahoma State Bureau of Investigation Firearms Laboratory: A Pictorial Display,” 1979;
11(4):46.

Thompson, R.C., “Firearms Malfunction Worksheets,” 1983; 15(1):100.

Untitled insert, Newsletter #3, Oct. 1969, pp. 17, 18, 21.

Untitled insert, Newsletter #4, Dec. 1969, pp. 25, 27.

Reporting of Conclusions

“California Department of Justice Firearms Toolmark Identification Training Syllabus: Professionalism,”

1991; 23(2):719-726.

Bullet Recovery Systems

Arnold, R.R., and Gallant, R., “Bullet Recovery Tank for Under $1,500.00,” 1988; 20(2):168.

Ball, P., and Mikko, D., “Snail Passive Bullet Trap,” 1992; 24(1):82-83.

Cayton, J.C., “Firing Chamber & Safety Measures Taken in Firearm & Toolmark Work Environment,”
1985; 17(3):95.

---. “Horizontal Water Recovery Tank,” 1974; 6(1):23.

Dragan, P., and Miller, J., “Atlanta Forensic Science Laboratory Bullet Recovery Tank,” 1996; 28(1):1-2.

FATM Training Manual Page 64 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Dutton, G., “Firearms Safety in the Laboratory,” 1997; 29(1):37-41.

Eaton, T.R., “Simple Bullet Recovery Tool,” 1996; 28(3):191.

Freeman, R.A., “European Crime Laboratories,” 1977; 9(2):207.

Haag, L.C., “Inexpensive, Portable Bullet Recovery Device,” 1991; 23(1):522-523.

Heard, B.J., “Portable Water Recovery Tank,” 1980; 12(1):42.

Hueske, E.E., “Anti-Splash Back Lid for Water Traps,” 1988; 20(1):72-74.

Lansing, J.F., and Seestrom, J.L., “Cheap Water Recovery Tank,” 1975; 7(1):54.

Lansing, J.L., “Bullet Recovery in a Six Foot Cotton Box,” 1994; 26(4):286.

Lattig, K.N., and Kreiser, M.J., “Water Recovery Tank Safety,” 1982; 14(4):12.

Lee, F.R., “Horizontal Recovery Tank,” 1979; 11(2):48.

Lutz, M.C., “Source for Cotton Waste Recovery Materials,” 1985; 17(2):59.

McBrayer, W.S., “What? Another Water Tank and Bullet Stop,” 1978; 10(2):90.

Miller, K.E., “Description of Water Tank Bullet Recovery Units at Missouri State Highway Patrol,” 1971;
3(2):18.

Molnar, S., “Identification of 50 Caliber Machine Gun Bullets,” 1970; 2(1):22.

---. “Novel Bullet Recovery Method,” 1971; 3(5):17.

Moyer, F.A., “Chamber, Bullet Recovery, Water, Horizontal, MK1,” 1977; 9(1):32.

“New Ballistics Tank from Detroit Armor Corp,” 1984; 16(3):106.

Newquist, A.M., “Test Bullet Recovery System,” 1973; 5(1):9.

Reich, J.E., “New Method of Bullet Recovery,” 1978; 10(2):26.

Reitz, J.A., “Vertical Water Tank System Employing a Unique Method of Bullet Retrieval,” 1973; 5(6):12.

Skolrood, R.W., “Use of Dip-Pak as a Means of Bullet Recovery,” 1971; 3(6):17.

Wilhelm, R.M., “Ice Retrieval Method,” 1976; 8(2):82.

Ziegler, P.A., “Bullet Recovery Using Non Newtonian Fluids,” 1982: 14(3):43.

Cartridge Interchangeability

Barber, D., and Cassidy, F., “When is a Caliber 380 Auto Not a 380 Auto?,” 1993; 25(3):168-171.

Conrad, W.E., “Firing Pistol Ammunition in a Revolver,” 1980; 12(1):33.

FATM Training Manual Page 65 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Ernest, R.N., “Obsolete 256 Winchester Magnum Cartridge Causes Interesting Problems,” 1990;
22(2):200-201.

Green, K., “Cartridge Interchangeability,” 1983; 15(3):12.

Kopera, J., “Identification of a .32 Fired in a .380,” 1989; 21(3):513-515.

Marouka, R.K., “Firing a 9mm Cartridge in a 40 S&W,” 1992; 24(2):172-176.

---. “.223 Remington Versus 5.56 X 45mm: What’s the Difference?,” 1994; 26(1):50-63.

Nielsen, F.I., “Cartridge Interchangeability?,” 1983; 15(2):12.

Stengel, R.F., and Mills, D., “Revolver Cartridges in Automatics,” 1980; 12(3):68.

Thompson, E., “38 Super Fired in a Revolver,” 1991; 23(3):868.

Downloading Ammunition

Molnar, S., “Comment on Random Notes on Test Firing,” 1969; 1(3):14.

Smith, L.L., “Random Notes on Test Firing and Lab Techniques,” 1969; 1(2):19.

Remote Discharge of Firearms

Bates, J.S., “Firearms Test Stand,” 1973; 5(6):32.

Biasotti, A.A., “Vise/Rest for Remote Firing,” 1979; 11(4):16.

Lindman, D.A., and Moline, K.W., “Test Firing a Severely Damaged/

Dangerous Firearm,” 1994; 26(2):142-143.

Lutz, M.C., “Evaluating Zero-One New Testing Device for Firearms Examiners,” 1983; 15(4):28.

Uri, B., “Remote Controlled Device for Safe Discharge of Dangerous Firearms,” 1993; 25(2):116-124.

Voth, A.J., “Test Firing a Ruptured Shotgun Barrel,” 1997; 29(2):188-189.

Restoring Firearms to Operability

Denio, D.J., “Making a Rusted Gun Functional,” 1981; 13(3):29.

Garland, P.V., “Two Cases of Death Caused by Inoperable Firearms,” 1989; 21(1):85.

Basic References

Arnold, Automatic and Repeating Shotguns

Beeman, Air Gun Digest

Brownell, Encyclopedia of Modern Firearms, Parts and Assembly, Vol. I

FATM Training Manual Page 66 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Burrard, The Modern Shotgun

Chinn, The Machine Gun, Vols. I - IV

Department of the Army, U.S. Rifle, 7.62 mm, M14

Hicks, J.E., US Military Firearms

Hogg and Weeks, Military Small Arms of the Twentieth Century

Jane’s Annuals, Jane's Weapons Systems

Keith, Shotguns

MacFarland, Gunsmithing Simplified

McLean, Firearms Silencers

Mossberg & Sons, Mossberg Component Parts Catalog

Muntz, Gun Digest Book of Exploded Firearms Drawings

Musgrave and Nelson, The World's Assault Rifles

Nelson, The World's Submachine Guns

Nonte, George, Pistolsmithing

NRA Staff, The NRA Guidebook to Handguns

NRA Staff, NRA Guidebook to Shoulder Arms

NRA Staff, NRA Firearms Handling Handbook

NRA Staff, NRA Illustrated Shotgun Handbook

Remington Arms, Remington Component Parts Catalog

Savage Arms, Component Parts Catalog, Savage, Stevens, Fox, Springfield Sporting Arms

Smith & Smith, The Book of Rifles

Smith & Wesson, Smith & Wesson Component Parts Catalog

Smith, W.H.B., The Book of Pistols and Revolvers

Smith, W.H.B., Small Arms of the World

Stiendler, The Firearms Dictionary

Stoeger Arms, Stoeger Gun Parts Catalog

FATM Training Manual Page 67 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Stoeger Arms, Shooter's Bible

Swearengen, The World's Fighting Shotguns

Wesley, Air Guns and Air Pistols

Wirnsberger, The Standard Directory of Proof Marks

FATM Training Manual Page 68 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

H. BULLET EXAMINATIONS AND COMPARISONS

1. Define what is meant by or determine the significance of the following terms or
phrases as they relate to the examination and comparison of fired bullets. Discuss
these with your training officer:

a. slippage
b. shaving
c. obturation
d. leading edge and trailing edge
e. melting
f. blow-by
g. striation
h. individual microscopic marks
i. ogive
j. bearing surface
k. class characteristics
l. general rifling "insufficient individual microscopic marks"
m. corrosion
n. leading
o. "limited individual microscopic marks"
p. "single-action" firing
q. "double-action" firing
r. knurled & grooved cannelure
s. stab crimp
t. Boattail
u. open base
v. closed base
w. recessed base
x. skived tip/hollow point
y. trace evidence aspects (lacquers, sealants, painted tips, tip inserts)

(Use Training Assignment #32 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

FATM Training Manual Page 69 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

2. As they relate to the examination and comparison of fired bullets or bullet fragments,
know the importance of, and limitations of, determining the following:

a. weight
b. caliber
c. caliber type
d. manufacturer
e. general rifling characteristics
f. pitch of rifling
g. depth of rifling
h. jacket construction/composition
Discuss this with your Technical Lead/experienced examiner.

(Use Training Assignment #33 and Practical Exercise #9 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

3. Familiarize yourself with the Standard Ammunition File (SAF). Know how to search
this file manually and by use of the computer in order to determine the manufacturer of
fired bullets. Demonstrate your proficiency in using this file to your Technical
Lead/experienced examiner.

(Use Training Assignment #33 and Practical Exercise #9 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

4. Become familiar with the IBIS/NIBIN system. Observe the IBIS technician enter fired
cartridge cases and/or shotshells into the system and conduct correlations using
MatchPoint.

(Use Training Assignment #33 and Practical Exercise #9 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

5. Familiarize yourself with the General Rifling Characteristics (GRC) database. Know
how to use this file to compile a list of firearms in a "no-gun case.” Demonstrate your
proficiency in using the GRC file to your Technical Lead/experienced examiner.

(Use Training Assignment #33 and Practical Exercise #9 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

FATM Training Manual Page 70 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

6. Using test bullets and other fired bullets and bullet fragments provided to you,
demonstrate your proficiency in accurately determining caliber, caliber type,
manufacturer, and rifling characteristics of these fired bullets. Also, prepare a list of
firearms that could have been used to fire these bullets provided to you. As
necessary, use the test fire, SAF, and GRC files in conducting these examinations.

(Use Training Assignments #34, and #35 and Practical Exercises #8a, #9 and #10 to complete this
objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

7. Determine the methods and techniques used to differentiate between lead bullets and
bullet cores.

(Use Training Assignment #43 to complete this objective.)

_________________ _________
Examiner Date

8. Using test bullets fired from polygonal rifled barrels, demonstrate your proficiency in
accurately determining the rifling characteristics of these fired bullets. Compile a list of
firearms that could have been used to fire these bullets using the GRC file.

(Use Training Assignment #38 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

9. Become knowledgeable about the facilities in the section for the recovery of fired test
bullets. Know when and how to use the horizontal recovery tank and cotton boxes
and their limitations. Observe and assist an experienced examiner in the recovery of
fired bullets using each of these methods. Know and observe all safety rules.

(Use Training Assignment #39 and Practical Exercise #14 to complete this objective.)

__________________ ________
Examiner Date

10. Familiarize yourself with the ammunition storage areas in the section. Know how to
locate test ammunition after correctly selecting test ammunition using the SAF.
Discuss with an experienced examiner the reasons for using substitute ammunition or
downloading ammunition for test firing. Know the proper procedure for downloading
ammunition for test firing. Under supervision of an experienced examiner, prepare and
fire downloaded test ammunition.

(Use Training Assignment #39 and Practical Exercise #14 to complete this objective.)

__________________ ________
FATM Training Manual Page 71 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Examiner Date

11. Test fire "consecutively-made" barrels and/or microscopically compare test bullets
from "consecutively-made" barrels. Observe the differences and similarities in the
striations and discuss this with your Technical Lead/experienced examiner.

(Use Training Assignment #41 to complete this objective.)

____________ ________
Examiner Date

12. Using the same .22 caliber firearm, test fire two each of the following cartridges and
attempt to identify the test bullets with each other. Take appropriate photographs and
notes.

a. .22 Long Rifle caliber Remington with lead bullets

b. .22 Long Rifle caliber Winchester with lead bullets
c. .22 Long Rifle caliber Remington with brass-coated lead bullets
d. .22 Long Rifle caliber Winchester with copper-coated lead bullets
e. .22 Long caliber Remington with lead bullets

(Use Training Assignment #40 and Practical Exercise #15 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

13. Using the same .357 Magnum caliber revolver, test fire two each of the following
cartridges and attempt to identify the test bullets with each other. Take appropriate
photographs and notes.

a. .38 Special caliber Remington lead round-nosed bullet

b. .38 Special caliber Remington jacketed bullet
c. .357 Magnum caliber Remington jacketed bullet
d. .357 Magnum caliber Winchester Silvertip bullet
e. .357 Magnum caliber Federal Nyclad bullet
(Use Training Assignment #37 and Practical Exercise #12 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

14. Using the same 9mm Luger pistol, test fire two each of the following cartridges and
attempt to identify the test bullets with each other. Take appropriate photographs and
notes.

a. 9mm Luger Federal Hydra-shok

FATM Training Manual Page 72 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

b. 9mm Luger PMC Starfire

c. 9mm Luger Remington full metal jacket
d. 9mm Luger Winchester Silvertip
e. 9mm Luger CCI total metal jacket
f. 9mm Luger Black Talon/Ranger SXT
g. 9mm Luger Federal Nyclad
(Use Training Assignment #36 and Practical Exercise #11 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

15. Using a .22 caliber rifle, test fire and recover two test bullets and identify these bullets
with each other. Cut off approximately three inches of the muzzle of the barrel and
crown the muzzle end of the barrel. Test fire and recover two test bullets using the
same ammunition as above. Microscopically compare these bullets with each other
and with the previously fired test bullets.

(Use Training Assignment #14 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

16. Using a 30 caliber rifle, test fire two each of the following cartridges and compare the
tests with each other. Conduct this test with an experienced examiner.

30 caliber Remington jacketed soft-point bullet

30 caliber Remington Accelerator cartridges
Test fire and inter-compare steel jacket bullets vs. Copper jacket bullets from the
same barrel
(Use Training Assignment #42 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

17. Using a .32 S & W caliber Harrington & Richardson revolver, test fire two each of the
following cartridges and compare the test bullets with each other. Conduct this test
with an experienced examiner.

.32 S & W caliber Remington with lead bullet

.32 Auto caliber Remington with full metal case jacketed bullet
_________________ ________
Examiner Date

FATM Training Manual Page 73 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

18. Test fire each of the following pistols. Using two test bullets from each pistol or a
similar type, make microscopic comparisons of the test bullets. Conduct this test with
an experienced examiner.

9mm Glock pistol

9mm H&K, Model P7, pistol
9mm Steyr, Model GB, pistol

________________ ________
Examiner Date

19. Compile a list of reasons as to why bullet identifications cannot be made in some
cases, and why some barrels and bullets can preclude or tend to preclude
identifications. This list should include, but not be limited to, the results of the above
testing.

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

20. Discuss the significance of identifying manufacturing toolmarks on a fired bullet from a
victim with those on unfired bullets loaded into cartridges from the suspect. Read the
article in the April 1985 issue of the Crime Laboratory Digest concerning
"Manufacturing Toolmark Identification on the Base of Jacketed Bullets.”

(Use Training Assignment #44 to complete this objective.)

________________ ________
Examiner Date

21. Discuss the feasibility of determining caliber and/or the rifling characteristics of a fired
bullet from an examination of a bullet hole in metal.

(Use Training Assignment #44 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

22. Test fire a .22 caliber firearm. Compare and identify test bullets with each other.
Using this same firearm, "slug" the barrel and compare the previously fired test bullets
with the bullets used to "slug" the barrel. Cut off approximately 25 percent of the
barrel at the muzzle and "slug" this portion of the barrel and compare these tests with
the previous test bullets. Conduct this exam with an experience examiner.

(Use Training Assignment #14 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

FATM Training Manual Page 74 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

23. Obtain a copy of and familiarize yourself with the Firearm and Toolmark technical
manual for the examination of fired bullets.

(Use Training Assignment #44 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

REFERENCE MATERIALS

BULLET EXAMINATIONS AND COMPARISONS; SHOTSHELL PROJECTILES

The following reference materials serve several purposes:

• to provide a wider range of additional resources should you have a particular interest in a
given topic.
• to provide reference materials for your future professional use.
• to allow you to gain additional depth in particular subject areas.
Should you encounter other references in this category, you are encouraged to make additional notes
about them at the end of this listing.

General

Burrard, G., The Identification of Firearms and Forensic Ballistics, 1st edition, Charles Scribner Sons, NY,
1934, revised edition, A.S. Barnes & Co., NY, 1964.

Davis, J.E., An Introduction to Tool Marks, Firearms and the Striagraph, Charles C. Thomas, Springfield,
IL, 1958.

FBI Laboratory, General Rifling Characteristics File, current edition.

Gunther, J.D., and Gunther, C.O., The Identification of Firearms, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York,
1935.

Hatcher, J.S., Hatcher’s Notebook, Military Service Publishing Company, Harrisburg, PA, 1947.

Hatcher, J.S., Jury, F.J., and Weller, J., Firearms Investigation, Identification and Evidence, 2nd edition,
Stackpole Books, Harrisburg, PA, 1957.

Heard, B.E., Handbook of Firearms and Ballistics: Examining and Interpreting Forensic Evidence, John
Wiley & Sons, New York, 1997.

Mathews, J.H., Firearms Identification, Volumes I-III, Charles C. Thomas, Springfield, IL, 1962.

NRA Firearms Fact Book, 3rd edition, National Rifle Association,

Fairfax, VA, 1989.

FATM Training Manual Page 75 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

AFTE Journal

Case Notes

“California Department of Justice Firearms Toolmark Identification Training Syllabus: Professionalism,”

1991; 23(1):559-578.

Examination Protocols and Procedures

“California Department of Justice Firearms Toolmark Identification Training Syllabus: Professionalism,”

1991; 23(2):703-715.

Worksheets

“California Department of Justice Firearms Toolmark Identification Training Syllabus: Professionalism,”

1991; 23(2):713.

Howe, W.J., “Laboratory Work Sheets,” Newsletter #2, Aug. 1969, p. 15.

Jordan, T.D., “Oklahoma State Bureau of Investigation Firearms Laboratory: A Pictorial Display,” 1979;
11(4):46.

Untitled insert, Newsletter #3, Oct. 1969, pp. 19, 21.

Untitled insert, Newsletter #4, Dec. 1969, p. 25.

Reporting of Conclusions

“California Department of Justice Firearms Toolmark Identification Training Syllabus: Professionalism,”

1991; 23(2):719-726.

General Rifling Characteristics

Anderson, C.E., “General Rifling Characteristics Using the Personal Computer,” 1990; 22(4):431-433.

Anderson, C.E., Martinson, D., and Burnham, R., “Update of Houston’s General Rifling Characteristics
Computer System,” 1991; 23(4):1005.

Baney, R.E., “Smith & Wesson Model’s 39 and 59 Rifled 5 Right,” 1978; 10(2):18.

---. “Smooth Bore Tanfoglio Pistol,” 1992; 24(2):177-178.

Bell, P.D., and Mikko, D.M., “Iraqi Model 74 Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1992; 24(1):23-27.

Berry, L., “Additional Information Concerning Sterling Arms Company,” 1981; 13(2):16.

Biasotti, A.A., “Bullet Bearing Surface Composition: Variables: Fired Bullets,” 1981; 13(2):94.

Bullock, J.J., “Interesting Rifling,” 1982; 14(1):63.

Butler, D.J., “7mm Nambu,” 1972; 4(4):30.

FATM Training Manual Page 76 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Butler, D.J., and Sachs, S., “Type 54 Tokarev Pistol,” 1990; 22(2):160-162.

Carr, J.C., “Lorcin L25 A Barrel With Class,” 1992; 24(1):17-21.

Carr, J., and Fadul, T., “Miami Barrel,” 1997; 29(2):232-234.

Cashman, P.J., and Thornton, J.I., “Rapid Method for Determining Rifling Pitch,” 1975; 7(3):21.

Cassidy, F.H., “Nomograph for Calculation of the Number of Lands and Grooves,” 1981; 13(4):67.

---. Reflections on Measurements of Land and Groove Dimensions,” 1983; 15(1):81.

Cayton, J.C., “Bullet Recovered from Jesse James Grave,” 1979; 11(3):57.

Chenow, R.W., “Mendoza Model K 62 Single Shot Pistol,” 1980; 12(2):28.

---. “Revolver/Pistol Rifling Class Characteristics,” 1979; 11(2):89.

---. “Rifling Change for Llama 22 Caliber Pistols,” 1983; 15(2):12.

Christansen, R.P., “Raven Arms,” 1977; 9(2):59.

Churchman, J.A., “Reproduction of Characteristics of Cooey Rifles,” 1981; 13(1):46.

“Criminalistics Laboratory Information System,” 1980; 12(3):72.

“Criminalistics Laboratory Information System,” 1980; 12(4):75.

Davis, J.E., “Land Impression Widths: A Simplified Measuring Set Up,” 1976; 8(4):14.

Denio, D.J., “Inverted Bullet Jacket,” 1982; 14(1):65.

Deobald, G.W., “Winchester Model 94: 6R vs. 4R,” 1977; 9(1):18.

Dragan, P., “Land & Groove Count from Bullet Cores,” 1978; 10(2):28.

Dunbar, D.A., “Identification of a Fired Sabot and a Distance Determination Involving a Shotshell
Cartridge,” 1997; 29(1):26-29.

Ernest, R.N., “Bryco Arms Change in Rifling,” 1992; 24(1):22.

Fadul, T.G., “Pen Pistol,” 1995; 27(4):294-296.

Fournier, R.J., and Lemmer, J.T., “Type Sugiura: Oriental 32 ACP Pistol,” 1985; 17(2):38.

Fraser, D., “Further Information on the Enfield: Lee Enfield Confusion,” 1994; 26(3):173-175.

George, W., “Excam 25 ACP Pistol Design and Rifling Change,” 1989; 21(1):78.

---. “Smith & Wesson 10mm and Beretta 9mm,” 1990; 22(3):288-294.

Gieszl, R., “Bersa 380 Semiautomatic Pistols,” 1991; 23(3):862-866.

FATM Training Manual Page 77 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

---. “Six Left Ruger Security-Six Revolver,” 1991; 23(4):1002-1003.

Gieszl, R., and Wolslagel, P., “Atypically Rifled SWD Cobray Pistols,” 1990; 22(3):328-329.

Goodman, R.E., Santora, D.N., and Trochum, T., “Kahr K9,” 1996; 28(3):166-167.

Haag, L.C., “Class Characteristics of Rifled Barrels,” 1978; 10(2):11.

Haag, L.C., and Petronino, J., “Colt: Right Twist Rifling,” 1974; 6(5-6):10.

Hamby, J.E., “Heckler & Koch Model 9 & 9s Pistol,” 1974; 6(2):16.

Harden, L.R., “Charter Arms Rifling Specifications & Serial Number Information,” 1972; 4(3A):29.

---. “Fox Carbine,” 1977; 9(2):119.

---. “Krieghoff Firearms,” 1977; 9(1):15.

---. “Rohm Manufacturing Plant,” 1978; 10(1):15.

---. “Savage Rifling Specifications,” 1972; 4(4):29.

Hart, R.P., “9MM Microgroove Bullet,” 1987; 19(3):310-311.

---. “Information on Weapons Frequently Encountered,” 1981; 13(4):51.

---. “Measurement and Value of Rate of Twist,” 1982; 14(3):27.

---. “Unrifled Bullet at 4000 FPS,” 1977; 9(1):55.

Heard, B.J., “Unusual Gun,” 1978; 10(3):41.

Heflin, T.F., “Rifling Characteristics for the Iver Johnson 38 Special Revolver,” 1985; 17(2):82.

---. “Ruger Model 77 300 Win Magnum GRC,” 1988; 20(2):205.

Howe, W.J., “Ruger Security Six Rifling Specifications,” 1973; 5(4):24.

Hueske, E.E., “Conversion Kit for a Colt Government Model,” 1988; 20(2):162.

Johnson, T.D., and Matty, W., “Arcadia Machine and Tool: Notes on A M T Firearms,” 1986; 18(3):69.

Jordan, T.D., and Looney, J., “Class Characteristics of Overpressured Cast Bullets,” 1981; 13(4):100.

Kennington, R.H., “Ordnance Manufacturing Corporation Model Back-Up,” 1977; 9(1):42.

---. “Pre-Rifled? .38 Caliber Bullet Cores,” 1988; 20(2):189.

Kent, R.H., “Thompson Center Contender Barrel Specifications,” 1983; 15(3):23.

Krcma, V.J., “Rifling Specifications, Sauer Revolvers,” 1969; 1(4):22.

FATM Training Manual Page 78 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Kreiser, M.J., “AMT Back-Up Pistol Manufacturer Marking Information,” 1984; 16(3):20.

Komar, S.M., “Unusual Rifling,” 1989; 21(4):653.

Larson, E.G., “Rifling Specifications on All Remington Firearms Currently Catalogued,” 1973; 5(4):30.

Laskowshi, G.E., “Identification of a Bullet to a Firearm Using a Barrel Cast,” 1997; 29(2):215-222.

Lomoro, V.J., “FIE Titanic Up-Date,” 1977; 9(2):64.

Lutz, M.C., “Four Plus Two Makes Three,” 1977; 9(2):38.

---. “Smoothbore 38 Special Derringer: Davis Industries Model D38,” 1996; 28(3):174-176.

---. “Smoothbore Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1994; 26(3):203-205.

Mason-Rooke, A., “Stripping and Axial Bullet Engraving,” 1981; 13(1):53.

Mathews, J.H., “Gain Rifling,” 1985; 17(2):100.

McBrayer, W.S., “380 Caliber Colt with 12 Lands & Grooves,” 1979; 11(4):22.

---. “Randall 45 Caliber Stainless Steel Pistol,” 1983; 15(3):16.

---. “RG-15 Derringer with Different Rifling,” 1987; 19(3):314.

Meyers, C.R., “North American Revolver with Faint Rifling,” 1985; 17(2):76.

---. “Wiping and General Rifling Characteristics,” 1970; 2(5):23.

Mikko, D., “Ceska Zbrojoka (CZ) Model 50 Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1993; 25(4):264-265.

Molnar, S., “Characteristics of the Erma .22 Caliber Luger Pistol,” 1970; 2(4):26.

---. “Rifling and Name Change Noted in 25 Caliber German-Made Auto Pistol,” 1969; 1(3):27.

---. “Rifling Changes Noted in Bauer & Guardian .25 Auto Pistol,” 1978; 10(1): 16.

---. “Rifling Impressions from Italian Made Firearms,” 1969; 1(4):40.

---. “Rifling Specifications in Some of the Firearm Replicas,” 1970; 2(2):8.

---. “Rifling Specifications of Newer .25 Caliber Pistols,” 1972; 4(4):6.

---. “Simplified Technique for L & G Measurement: Twist Rate,” 1969; 1(4):28.

---. “Technique for Counting Lands & Grooves,” 1971; 3(2):33.

---. “Torque Shifts in Rifling Impressions Indicate Direction of Rotation,” 1970; 2(2):2-13.

Monturo, C., “.410/.45 Colt Street Sweeper,” 1997; 29(1):19-20.

FATM Training Manual Page 79 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Munhall, B.D., “Weatherby Rifling Specifications,” 1972; 4(3):10.

Nennstiel, R., “Computer Supported Method of Firearm Type Determination,” 1986; 18(4):4.

Nielsen, F.I., “Heckler & Koch P7 (PSP),” 1981; 13(4):37.

Nordhoff, T.J., “Information on Colt 10mm Semiautomatic Pistols,” 1989; 21(1):86.

Parian, R.W., “Land and Groove Tabulation,” 1976; 8(1):15.

Pearl, A., “Unidentified Pistol,” 1974; 6(4):9.

Pearl, A., and Trusty, G.A., “German Derringer with Multiple Rifling Characteristics,” 1977; 9(2): 168.

Perkins, W.E., “Colt Revolver with Right Hand Twist,” 1969; 1(2):5.

Prystauk, G.S., “Encom MK IV Assault Pistol,” 1994; 26(3):176-180.

Reynolds, T.W., “Phoenix Arms (Model HP22),” 1995; 27(4):314.

Rios, F.G., and Thornton, J.I., “Comments on the Trigonometrical Basis of Bullet Twist Measurements,”
1983; 15(1):104.

Roberts, J.L., “Information on Gun Barrels Manufactured by Fred Kart,” 1982; 14(1):70.

Royse, D., “Identification Made on a Bullet Fired from an Unrifled Pistol,” 1995; 27(3):197.

Schecter, B., “Novel Training Weapon: A Sub-Caliber RPG,” 1986; 18(3):64.

Sham, P., “Smith and Wesson Model SW9F Pistol,” 1995; 27(2):152-153.

Smith, D., “Delu .25 Auto Caliber Vestpocket Pistol,” 1972; 4(2):33.

Sojat, J.G., and Hart, R.P., “Heckler & Koch Model HK-4 Pistol,” 1973; 5(2):19.

Stanton, R.B., “Bryco Arms Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1990; 22(2):194.

---. “Feather Model AT-9 Semiautomatic Carbine,” 1990; 22(3):333.

---. “Some Interesting Information From Amadeo Rossi Company,” 1974; 6(5-6):17.

Stauffer, J.C., “.38 S&W American Bulldog (Belgium),” 1973; 5(5):8.

Stengel, R.F., “Thoughts on Bullet Comparisons and No Gun Cases,” 1987; 19(3):306-307.

Striupaitis, P.P., “New 25 Caliber Pistol,” 1982; 14(4):8.

---. “New Over and Under: Rifle/Shotgun,” 1983; 15(2):9.

Templin,R.H., “Jennings, Model J-22 Semiautomatic Pistol Information,” 1987; 19(1):18.

FATM Training Manual Page 80 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Thompson, E., “Intratec Tec 22 Scorpion Pistol,” 1990; 22(1):51-54.

Thompson, E.J., “National Cartridge Rifled Sub Caliber Adapters,” 1988; 20(4):463-464.

Thornton, J.I., “Origin of the Term Land,” 1983; 15(4):8.

Trumble, C., “Ortgies Pocket Pistols,” 1997; 29(1):87-92.

---. “Raven Arms Company’s Gift to Crime Laboratories,” 1997; 29(1):93-97.

Uchiyama, T., and Nagai, M., “Rifle Markings of Titan 25 Caliber Semiautomatic Pistols,” 1986; 18(2):3.

---. “Rifle Markings of Titan 25 Caliber Semiautomatic Pistols,” 1989; 21(2):387-402.

Vaughan, R.T., and Gilman, P.L., “Information of the Rogak LES P18 Pistol,” 1985; 17(2):72.

Walch, W.N., and Wilhelm, R.M., “Uniform Bullet Classification System,” 1977; 9(2):26.

Walsh, J.F., “Accuracy Speed and Convenience in Rifling Measurements,” 1977; 9(1):50.

Warehime, L.E., “Remington Ammunition with Manufactured Lands & Grooves,” 1989; 21(1):76.

Warner, E.N., “Erma EP 25 Auto Pistol,” 1971; 3(2):28.

Whitmarsh, J.W., “Jennings Model J 22 Semiautomatic Pistol Information,” 1987; 19(1):18.

Williams, D.L., “In Reply to Land and Groove Count from Bullet Cores,” 1978; 10(3):31.

Zahn, M.S., “RPB Industries M10 Autoloading Pistol: New Rifling Observed,” 1981; 13(2):32.

---. “Smith & Wesson 9mm Autoloading Pistol Are Now Rifled 5R,” 1978; 10(1):6.

---. “Taurus Revolver Rifling Change,” 1979; 11(2):45.

Comparison Techniques

Barbetta, S., “Bullet Holding Adhesive,” 1987; 19(3):301.

Belveal, D.N., “Firearms Identification Based Upon Bullet Comparisons: Expertise or Guess-work?,” 1979;
11(2):9.

Conrad, W.E., “Comparisons of Nyclad Ammunition,” 1979; 11(4):116.

Janelli, R., and Geyer, G., “Smoking a Bullet,” 1977; 9(2):128.

Kennington, R.H., “Solution for Inconclusives,” 1997; 29(2):197-203.

McBrayer, W.S., “Effect of MAG-NA-PORT on Bullet Comparisons,” 1982; 14(1):34.

Molnar, S., “Firearms Tick Tack Toe: A Methodical Searching Technique,” 1972; 4(3):18.

Robinson, M.K., “Stikki-Wax,” 1982; 14(2):4.

FATM Training Manual Page 81 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Shem, R.J., “Modifying Mushroomed Bullet Jackets to Facilitate Comparisons,” 1993; 25(2):149-150.

Stengel, R.F., “Thoughts on Bullet Comparisons and No Gun Cases,” 1987; 19(3):306-307.

Thompson, E., and Caine, C., “AO Fiber Optic Light Diffusors,” 1987; 19(3):321.

Vander Werff, K., “Effect Changing and Altering Firearms Parts Has on Bullet and Cartridge Case
Comparisons,” 1987; 19(3):316-317.

Wagoner, A.T., “Determination of a Possible Ammunition and Weapon Using a Multi Faceted Approach,”
1989; 21(4):629-632.

Ward, D., and Sibert, R., “Use of Vacuum Evaporation of Metals for Surface Feature Enhancement,”
1986; 18(4):76.

Automated Systems

Blackwell, R.J., and Framan, E.P., “Automated Firearms Identification System (AFIDS) Phase I,” 1980;
12(4):11.

Dillon, J.H., and Sibert, R.W., “FBI Laboratory’s DRUGFIRE Program,” 1990; 22(2): 216.

Gardner, G.Y., “Computer Identification of Bullets,” 1979; 11(2):26.

Masson, J.J., “Confidence Level Variations in Firearms: Identifications through Computerized

Technology,” 1997; 29(1):42-44.

Moran, B., “Manual and Automated Bullet and Cartridge Case Comparison Systems: A Commentary,”
1997; 29(1):55-57.

Shutt, J., “CLIS: Ballistics Database Rifles Fast Reply on Gun Makes,” 1981; 13(1):43.

Thompson, R.M., Desrosiers, M., and Hester, S., “Computerized Image Analysis for Firearms
Identification: The Integrated Ballistic Identification System: IBIS,” 1996; 28(3):194-203.

Uchiyama, T., “Automated Landmark Identification System,” 1993; 25(3):172-196.

Shotshell Components -General

Silliman, J.R., “Crime Scene Search: Evidence at the Scene of a Shotgun Shooting,” 1977; 9(2):111.

Watkins, R.L., and Haag, L.C., “Shotgun Evidence,” 1978; 10(3):10.

Shot Pellets

MacPhee, H.M., “Determination of Shot Content in Fired Shot Shells,” 1978; 10(2):24.

Mann, M.J., Espinza, E.O., Ralston, R.M., Stroud, R.K, Scanlan, M.D., and Strauss, S.J., “Shot Pellets:
An Overview,” 1994; 26(3):223-241.

FATM Training Manual Page 82 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Mann, M.J., Ferguson, W., Henderson, C., and Stroud, R., “Analysis of Unusual Home Made Shot Pellets
from Louisiana,” 1994; 26(3):242-250.

Shotshell Slugs

Arrowood, M.C., and Bullock, J.J., “Identification of a 12 Gauge Slug,” 1983; 15(2):58.

Ernest, R.N., “Exploring the Possibility of Matching Fired Shotgun Ammunition Components to Unaltered
Shotguns,” 1992; 24(1):28-36.

Freels, R.H., “Comparison of a Shotshell Shot Collar to a Cut Barrel,” 1983; 15(3):21.

Galan, J.I., “Identification of a Rifled Slug Through Front Sight Defect,” 1986; 18(4):62.

Hueske, E.E., “Class Characteristics of Mossberg C-Lect-Choke Barrels with Factory Porting,” 1990;
22(4):401-407.

Royse, D., “Identification Made on a Fired 00 Buckshot Pellet,” 1996; 28(4):252-253.

Thompson, J., “Identification of a Rifled Slug,” 1994; 26(2):136-138.

Townshend, D.G., “Identification of Rifled Slugs,” 1970; 2(1):21.

Shotshell Wadding

Christansen, R.P., “Tricky Wads,” 1978; 10(1):27.

Edmondson, R., “Shotgun Sports,” 1990; 22(1):91.

---. “Shotgun Sports,” 1990; 22(1):90.

---. “Shotgun Sports,” 1990; 22(2):230.

---. “Shotgun Sports,” 1990; 22(2):230-231.

Franovich, J., “20 Gauge Filler Wads Used in 12 Gauge Shotgun Shells,” 1996; 28(2):92-94.

McJunkins, S.P., “Identification of Plastic Shotgun Waddings,” 1970; 2(4):24.

Buffer Material

Freels, R.H., and Wheeler, B.P., “Forensic Analysis of Shot Buffering Materials,” 1983; 15(2):31.

Hueske, E.E., “Forensic Aspects of Shotshell Buffers,” 1983; 15(2):26.

---. “Forensic Aspects of Shotshell Buffers,” 1989; 21(2):326-330.

Thornton, J.I., and Guarino, K., “Polyethylene Shotshell Buffer & Determination of Trajectory,” 1984;
16(3):132.

FATM Training Manual Page 83 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Manufacturing Marks

Crum, R.A., “Manufacturing Toolmark Identification on the Base of Jacketed Bullets,” 1987; 19(4):447-
450.

Hamman, J.E., “Loading Machine Marks on Federal Shotshell Wads,” 1980; 12(1):36.

Kellet, P.M., “The Identification of a Tool Mark on the Interior of a Semi-Jacketed Bullet,” 1984; 16(3):22.

---. “The Comparison and Identification of Toolmarks on the Base of Remington Semi-Jacketed Bullets,”
1984; 16(3):81-83.

---. “The Comparison of Mold Marks on Cast Bullets and Punch Marks in Copper Gas Checks,” 1984;
16(3):104-106.

Kreiser, M.J., “Identification of Cast Bullets and Their Molds,” 1985; 17(3):88.

Nagai, M., and Uchiyama, T., “Identification of a Tool Mark on the Jacket of a Bullet,"“1989; 21(1):80.

Skolrood, R.W., “Do Not Disregard Mould Markings,” 1975; 7(1):73-74.

FATM Training Manual Page 84 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

I. CARTRIDGE/CARTRIDGE CASE EXAMINATIONS AND

COMPARISONS
1. Describe "class characteristics" as the phrase applies to markings on a cartridge or a
fired cartridge case. Determine the types of marks that may be left on a cartridge
case/cartridge during loading/extracting and firing. Review video regarding the slow
motion of firing sequences using semiautomatic firearms.

(Use Training Assignment #45 to complete this objective.)

________________ ________
Examiner Date

2. Test fire each of the following firearms (or similar) at least twice. Using the test fired
cartridge cases, visually relate the markings imparted to the fired cartridge case with
the part on the firearm which produced these markings. Also load and extract at least
two cartridges from each of the following firearms and visually relate the markings
imparted to the unfired cartridges with the part on the firearm that will produced these
markings.

a. 9mm SWD Inc., M11/Nine, submachine gun

b. 9mm Glock pistol
c. .45 Auto caliber U.S. Pistol, Model 1911 (or similar)
d. 9mm Beretta pistol, model 92F
e. .22 Long Rifle caliber Ruger, MKII, pistol
f. .22 Long Rifle caliber Ruger, 10/22, rifle

(Use Training Assignment #46 to complete this objective.)

________________ ________
Examiner Date

3. Using the test cartridge cases and cartridges from paragraph 2, above,
microscopically examine all of the markings with each other. Include the following
types of markings in your microscopic comparisons: firing pin impression, breechface
marks, chamber marks, anvil marks, extractor marks, ejector marks, ramp marks, and
slide drag marks, slide scuff marks, ejection port scuffmarks and magazine lip marks.
Photograph the results of your comparisons.

(Use Training Assignment #46 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

4. Test fire the following firearms (or similar) using comparable CCI, Remington, Federal,
and Winchester ammunition of the appropriate caliber type for each firearm. Select
ammunition with both nickel and brass primers. Test fire each firearm at least twice
FATM Training Manual Page 85 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

using each brand of ammunition. Microscopically examine and photograph the

markings as in paragraph 3, above.

a. 38 Special caliber Smith & Wesson, Model 10, revolver

b. 357 Magnum caliber Smith & Wesson, Model 19, revolver
c. 9mm Smith & Wesson, Model 669, pistol
d. 22 Long Rifle caliber Colt, Woodsman, pistol

(Use Training Assignment #47 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

5. Test fire a .22 Long Rifle caliber six-shot revolver, fire six .22 Long Rifle caliber
cartridges, six .22 Long caliber cartridges, and six .22 Short caliber cartridges of the
same manufacturer. Mark each cartridge to note the chamber in which it is fired.
Examine and photograph the markings imparted to the fired cartridge cases.

(Use Training Assignment #48 to complete this exercise.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

6. Discuss the possibility of comparing and identifying reloading-type marks on

cartridges/cartridge cases. Identify the various types of marks that may be indicative
of reloaded ammunition. Become familiar with the reloading equipment in the Section
and the procedures used in reloading cartridges. Reload several cartridges and
compare reloading-type marks on these cartridges with each other.

(Use Training Assignment #49 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

7. Discuss the feasibility of comparing and identifying manufacturing toolmarks on a fired

cartridge case from the scene of a crime with cartridges that can be associated with
the suspect. Identify the various types of manufacturing toolmarks that may be
present on cartridges or cartridge cases.

(Use Training Assignment #49 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

8. Test fire a .30 Carbine caliber U.S. Carbine and compare the test cartridge cases with
each other. Compare all of the marks imparted to the fired cartridge cases. Load and
extract cartridges from this same firearm. Note and compare all of the marks imparted
to the test cartridges.
FATM Training Manual Page 86 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

(Use Training Assignment #50 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

9. Read the following two articles in the October 1989 issue of the AFTE journal and
discuss them with your Technical Lead or an experienced examiner.
a. "Firing Pin Impressions - Their Measurement and Significance"

b. "Firing Pin Impressions - Their Relation to Hammer Fall Conditions"

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

10. Obtain a copy of and be familiar with the Firearm Section protocol for the examination
of cartridges and cartridge cases.

(Use Training Assignment #45 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

11. Compare test firings from various firearms before the breech and bore are cleaned
and after the breech and bore are cleaned.

(Use Training Assignment #51 to complete this objective.)

________________ _________
Examiner Date

12. Use a series of examinations that incorporate bullets, cartridge cases, firearms and
the comparison microscope during an “on going investigation.”

(Use Practical Exercises #13. #16, #18 and #19 to complete this objective.)

________________ _________
Examiner Date

REFERENCE MATERIALS

CARTRIDGE AND CARTRIDGE CASE EXAMINATIONS AND COMPARISONS

The following reference materials serve several purposes:

• to provide a wider range of additional resources should you have a particular interest in a
given topic.
• to provide reference materials for your future professional use.

FATM Training Manual Page 87 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

• to allow you to gain additional depth in particular subject areas.

Should you encounter other references in this category, you are encouraged to make additional notes
about them at the end of this listing.

General

Burrard, G., The Identification of Firearms and Forensic Ballistics,

st
1 edition, Charles Scribner Sons, NY, 1934, revised edition, A.S. Barnes & Co., NY, 1964.

Datig, F.A., Cartridges for Collectors, Volumes I-III, Borden Publishing Co., 1956.

Davis, J.E., An Introduction to Tool Marks, Firearms and the Striagraph, Charles C. Thomas, Springfield,
IL, 1958.

Gunther, J.D., and Gunther, C.O., The Identification of Firearms, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York,
1935.

Hatcher, J.S., Hatcher’s Notebook, Military Service Publishing Company, Harrisburg, PA, 1947.
nd
Hatcher, J.S., Jury, F.J., and Weller, J., Firearms Investigation, Identification and Evidence, 2 edition,
Stackpole Books, Harrisburg, PA, 1957.

Heard, B.E., Handbook of Firearms and Ballistics: Examining and Interpreting Forensic Evidence, John
Wiley & Sons, New York, 1997.

Horn, W.R., Headstamps and Cartridge Identification Data, Horn Co., 1962.

James, C.R., “Fluted and Annular-Grooved Chamber Markings,” paper delivered at the AFTE annual
training seminar, Tampa, 1998.

Kennington, R.H., The Matrix: 9mm Parabellum - An Empirical Study of Type Determination, 1992.

Krcma, V., “Fluted and Annular Grooved Barrel Chambers in Firearms,” Journal of Forensic Sciences,
Vol. 41, No. 3, May 1966, pp. 407-417.

Mathews, J.H., Firearms Identification, Volumes I-III, Charles C. Thomas, Springfield, IL, 1962.

McClean, D.B., Small Arms Ammunition Identification Guide, Normount Technical Publications, 1971.

rd
NRA Firearms Fact Book, 3 edition, National Rifle Association, Fairfax, VA, 1989.
White, H.P., and Munhall, B.D., Cartridge Headstamp Guide, H.P. White Laboratory, 1963.

---. Pistol and Revolver Cartridges, H.P. White Laboratory, 1963.

AFTE Journal

Case Notes

“California Department of Justice Firearms Toolmark Identification Training Syllabus: Professionalism,”

1991; 23(1):559-578.

FATM Training Manual Page 88 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Examination Protocols and Procedures

“California Department of Justice Firearms Toolmark Identification Training Syllabus: Professionalism,”

1991; 23(2):703-715.

Worksheets

“California Department of Justice Firearms Toolmark Identification Training Syllabus: Professionalism,”

1991; 23(2):714.

Jordan, T.D., “Oklahoma State Bureau of Investigation Firearms Laboratory: A Pictorial Display,” 1979;
11(4):47.

“Laboratory Work Sheets,” Newsletter #2, Aug. 1969, p. 15.

Untitled insert, Newsletter #3, Oct. 1969, pp. 19-20.

Untitled insert, Newsletter #4, Dec. 1969, p. 25.

Reporting of Conclusions

“California Department of Justice Firearms Toolmark Identification Training Syllabus: Professionalism,”

1991; 23(2):719-726.

Jordan, T.D., “Oklahoma State Bureau of Investigation Firearms Laboratory: A Pictorial Display,” 1979;
11(4):50.

General

Bouley, B., “Determination of Firing Sequence by Cartridge Case Markings,” 1995; 27(3):237-241.

Byrd, S.C., “Misleading Cartridge Case Markings,” 1989; 21(3):522-523.

Davis, J.E., “Test Toolmarks from Weapon Parts May Facilitate Comparisons,” 1972; 4(3A):28.
Hart, R.P., “Information on Weapons Frequently Encountered,” 1981; 13(4):51.

Heard, B.J., “Case of Interest,” 1978; 10(2):21.

Hurst, F.M., “Unusual Brand of Pistol,” 1973; 5(6):29.

Kennington, R.H., and Galan, J.I., “Ejector Type Marks on Unfired Cartridges,” 1987; 19(4):452.

Lapierre, J.A.G., “Additional Identifying Features Dealing with Revolvers,” 1978; 10(3):36.

McGuire, D.L., “Potentially Incorrect Weapon Identification,” 1972; 4(3):30.

McKay, S.A., “Class Characteristics of Shotguns from Shell Markings,” 1971; 3(3):34.

Nennstiel, R., “Computer Supported Method of Firearm Type Determination,” 1986; 18(4):4.

Rathman, G.A., “Unusual Cartridge Case Identification,” 1976; 8(4):29.

FATM Training Manual Page 89 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Stengel, R.F., “Which Cartridge Was Fired First?,” 1987; 19(3):325-326.

Walsh, K.A., and Buckleton, J.S., “Firing Sequence Involving Two 303 British Cartridges,” 1991;
23(3):816-819.

Welch, N.E., “Matching a Bullet to a Cartridge Case,” 1981; 13(4):79.

Headstamps

Al Khalifa, A.K., “Headstamps With Arabic Markings,” 1983; 15(2):64.

Anderson, E.J., “Headstamps of 5.56mm and 7.62mm Cartridges, Reportedly Manufactured in

Singapore,” 1974; 6(1):21.

Barabash, T., “New Cartridge,” 1978; 10(3):46.

Bates, J.S., “Another Ammunition Oddity,” 1973; 5(4):22.

Berg, S.O., “Could You Have Identified It?,” 1970; 2(10):32.

---. “Interesting Headstamp,” 1970; 2(7):22.

---. “Interesting Headstamp,” 1971; 3(4):14.

Bridgemon, R.R., “Aguila Cartridges,” 1985; 17(2):116.

Clanet, C., “French Small Firearm Cartridge Headstamps,” 1972; 4(2):26.

Canning, D.R., “Headstamps for Stud Guns,” 1976; 8(1):53.

Cassidy, F.H., “What Caused the Unusual Headstamp Mark?,” 1989; 21(4):655.

Dougherty, P.M., “Eldorado Cartridge Corporation Headstamps,” 1990; 22(4):443.

Edwards, R.L., “Circumferential Fractures,” 1991; 23(3):806-807.

---. “New Type of Ammunition by MFS (Matravideki Femmuvek),” 1993; 25(4):254-258.

Ernest, R.N., and Fite, K., “Remington Cartridge Made By Winchester,” 1989; 21(3):520.

Garland, P.V., “Color Code Identification of Small Arms Cartridges,” 1974; 6(2):27.

---. “Headstamp Designator +P,” 1974; 6(2):10.

Gieszl, R., “New Ammunition,” 1982; 14(1):40.

Green, K., “Remington Announces a New Headstamp for Rimfire,” 1983; 15(3):18.

Haag, L.C., “Korean Ammunition Available in North America,” 1981; 13(1):7.

---. “Stirling .22 Rimfire Ammunition,” 1977; 9(2):226.

FATM Training Manual Page 90 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Hall, J.M., “American Ballistics Grand Slam Cartridge,” 1991; 23(2):679-681.

Hamby, J.E., “Information on Delay Cartridges,” 1974; 6(1):5.

---. “Japanese Ammunition Information,” 1976; 8(2):19.

---. “New Headstamp on KTW Metal Piercing Cartridges,” 1971; 3(5):16.

---. “Tests on the Squibman .22 Caliber Cartridge,” 1971; 3(2):29.

---. “Two New Cartridges,” 1978; 10(3):47.

Hampton, H.L., “Letter From SAAMI: Headstamp Explanation,” 1974; 6(2):14.

Harden, L.R., “Geco Headstamp Information,” 1973; 5(3):10.

---. “Hi-Jacker Cartridge,” 1977; 9(1):39.

Heard, B.J., “Ammunition Information,” 1983; 15(1):65.

---. “New CBC Ammunition,” 1983; 15(2):16.

“Headstamps,” 1991; 23(3):874-875.

Heflin, T.F., “9MM Steyr Cartridge Conversions,” 1987; 19(3):262-265.

---.” Information on Various Cartridges,” 1985; 17(2):85.

Interpol, “Cartridge Identification,” 1976; 8(4):72.

---. “Cartridge Identification,” 1977; 9(1):69.

---. “Interpol: Cartridge Information,” 1976; 8(2):112.

Johnson, T.D., “Imported Ammunition,” 1979; 11(1):36.

Johnson, T.D., and Matty, W.G., “Starline Brass,” 1984; 16(4):60.

Kass, G.A., “Ammunition Information: Manufacturer & Headstamp,” 1983; 15(2):9.

---. “Headstamps,” 1990; 22(3):346-347.

---. “Headstamps,” 1991; 23(2):659.

Kellett, P.M., “Egyptian Headstamp,” 1990; 22(2):226.

---. “Toolmarks on the Case of Remington Semi-Jacketed Bullets,” 1984; 16(3):81.

Lambert, R.R., “Ammunition Headstamps,” 1972; 4(3):36.

Lomoro, V.J., “.22 Short, .22 Long Rifle and Now the .22 In-Between,” 1975; 7(2):33.

FATM Training Manual Page 91 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Lorsbach, L.A., “Dots Make a Difference,” 1976; 8(2):15.

Lutz, M.C., “Explosive Projectiles for Small Arms,” 1973; 5(1):12.

---. “Special .380 Submachine Gun Cartridge for MAC (Ingram) SMG,” 1972; 4(3A):35.

---. “Winchester & Hirtenberg Ammunition Sold by Sears Roebuck & Federal Cartridge Co.,” 1974;
6(4):14.

Matthews, J.W., “9X19 SP Headstamp,” 1980; 12(1):40.

Matty, W., “Wahib Arms Ammunition Information,” 1983; 15(1):68.

Moline, K., and Lansing, J., “Ammunition Information,” 1993; 25(3):204-205.

Molnar, S., “Observation While Firing HP Ammunition,” 1971; 3(5):6.

Nennstiel, R., “Collection of Headstamps and Projectiles,” 1985; 17(4):7.

Nicholson, T., “Headstamp Oddity,” 1970; 2(3):31.

Nielsen, F.I., “Unusual Head Stamps,” 1973; 5(5):27.

Poust, W.R., “Headstamp Impressions in Oily Residue,” 1987; 19(3):300.

---. “Observation of Different Headstamps in Same Box of Ammunition,” 1982; 14(2):12.

“Smith & Wesson Information,” 1979; 11(1):22.

Smith, A.G., “Cartridges Offered by Centennial Arms Corporation,” 1974; 6(3):16.

Smith, O.C., “Headstamps from Desert Storm,” 1993; 25(2):110-111.

Smith, R.J., “Star Ammunition,” 1975; 7(3):57.

Steidler, R.A., “Caliber .22 Ammunition With B Headstamp,” 1973; 5(1):27.

Stubits, F., “New Cartridge: The 22 Caliber Devastator,” 1981; 13(3):15.

Tokano, K., “Double Marked WW Headstamp,” 1989; 21(4):583.

Tulleners, F.A., “New Headstamp Cascade Cartridge International,” 1979; 11(2):87.

Waite, M.D., “Identification of Browning Arms Co Ammunition,” 1973; 5(3):26.

Woodin, W.H., “Military and Police Ammunition Research Identification,” 1981; 13(4):102.

Specific Models and Mechanism Marks

Carr, J.C., “AMT Automag II Identification by Dots,” 1990; 22(2):163-166.

---. “Lorcin L25 A Barrel With Class,” 1992; 24(1):17-21.

FATM Training Manual Page 92 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Celovsky, J.R., “Heckler & Koch, Model HK4 Pistol, Additional Outstanding Class Characteristics,” 1973;
5(5):23.

Celovsky, J.R., and Lemmer, J.T., “Heckler & Koch Pistol, Model VP702 9mm Parabellum,” 1984;
16(3):108.

Dujanovich, M.B., “Heckler & Koch 9x19mm Firearms,” 1995;

27(4):297-302.

---. “Navy Arms Model TU90 Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1994; 26(2):121-126.

Fournier, R.J., and Lemmer, J.T., “Type Sugiura: Oriental 32 ACP Pistol,” 1985; 17(2):38.

Garland, P.V., “SATA Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1970; 2(7):23.

Gieszl, R., “Bersa 380 Semiautomatic Pistols,” 1991; 23(3):862-866.

Kennington, R.H., “380 Auto Arcology: The Firing Pin Ejector Models,” 1996; 28(2):82-91.

---. “Ordnance Manufacturing Corporation Model Back-Up,” 1977; 9(1):42.

Kreiser, M.J., “Unusual Cartridge Marking by a Model 39 Smith & Wesson,” 1983; 15(4):13.

Lutz, M.C., “Central Kentucky Arms Semiautomatic Rifle,” 1983; 15(4):40.

Maciejewski, K., “Possible Identification Feature: .22 Caliber Smith & Wesson Model 61 Pistol,” 1970;
2(5):38.

Molnar, S., “Characteristics of the Erma .22 Caliber Luger Pistol,” 1970; 2(4):26.

Nichols, R.G., “Glock Versus Smith and Wesson Model SW40F: Comparison of Markings on Fired
Cartridge Cases,” 1995; 27(2):133-139.

Reynolds, T.W., “Phoenix Arms (Model HP22),” 1995; 27(4):314.

Shem, R.J., and Striupaitis, P.P., “Fired Bullets & Cartridge Cases from Raven Pistol,” 1983; 15(3):109.

Sojat, J.G., and Hart, R.P., “Heckler & Koch Model HK-4 Pistol,” 1973; 5(2):19.

Stauffer, J.C., “Caliber .25 Sterling Auto Pistol,” 1972; 4(5):30.

Thompson, E., “Intratec Tec 22 Scorpion Pistol,” 1990; 22(1):51-54.

Firing Pin Impressions

Cochrane, D.W., “Firing Pin or Ejector?,” 1981; 13(4):106.

Fraser, D.A., “Rimfire Firing Pin Impressions,” 1983; 15(3):85.

Frazier, R.A., “Firing Pin Impressions: Their Relationship to Hammer Fall Conditions,” 1989; 21(2):589-92.

FATM Training Manual Page 93 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Haag, L.C., “Firing Pin Protrusion and Impression Depth Measurement,” 1990; 22(3):295-298.

Matty, W., and Johnson, T., “Comparison of Manufacturing Marks on Smith & Wesson Firing Pins,” 1984;
16(3):51.

McBrayer, W.S., “Unique Firing Pin Impression,” 1981; 13(4):116.

Miller, J., “Pressure Effects on Firing Pin Impression Depth,” 1995; 27(3):242-245.

Nielsen, F.I., “Ruger 10/22 Firing Pin Modification,” 1988; 20(3):325.

Ojena, S.M., and Murdock, J.E., “Evaluation of an Alibi: Relative Firing Pin Impression Depths,” 1981;
13(3):79.

Stephenson, J.S., McPhillips, E.T., and Jachimowicz, E., “Use of a Duplex Nail as a Firing Pin in the
Intratec Tec-9 Pistol,” 1996; 28(1):15-18.

Verbeke, D.J., and Stauffer, J.C., “Unique Firing Pin Identification,” 1975; 7(1):59.

Anvil Marks

Dutton, G., “Anvil Bounce,” 1996; 28(4):243-246.

Ernest, R.N., “Anvil Marks in Centerfire Cartridge Cases,” 1992; 24(4):367-370.

Gieszl, R., “Don’t Forget 22 Rimfire Anvil Marks,” 1991; 23(4):997-999.

Tuira, Y.J., and Ziegler, P.A., “Anvil Bounce,” 1995; 27(4):318-319.

Manufacturing Marks

Dutton, G., “Manufacturing Marks on 12 Gauge Cartridges,” 1997; 29(2):170-172.

Klees, G., “Aberrant Manufacturing Marks on Federal Ammunition,” 1997; 29(1):21-23.

LaVoy, T.A., and Willmer, J.H., “Toolmarkings from a Reloading Die,” 1979; 11(2):37.

Matty, W., “Persistence of Toolmarks in the Cartridge Case Head Forming Process,” 1983; 15(1):108.

Quirk, T.W., “Toolmarks on Primers of ‘Rio’ Brand Ammunition,” 1987; 19(3):309-310.

Robinson, M.K., “Another Manufactured Toolmark,” 1996; 28(3):164-165.

Swim, J.D., “Firearms Examiners Beware,” 1979; 11(1):33-34.

Breech Face Marks

Cook, C.W., “Breech Face Markings from a Non Operable Weapon,” 1983; 15(4):53.

Esposito, A.J., “Apparent Mirror Image Breech Face Marking in the Stevens Model 311 Side by Side
Shotgun,” 1995; 27(3):200-201.

FATM Training Manual Page 94 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Matty, W., “Raven 25 Automatic Pistol Breech Face Toolmarks,” 1984; 16(3):57.

Molnar, S., “False Breech Face ID’s,” 1996; 28(2):95-96.

---. “Marks of Spanner Wrench Holes in Firing Pin Escutcheons,” 1970; 2(7):34.

---. “Notes on Breech Face Marks and Fouling,” 1977; 9(1):21.

Thompson, E., “Davis Derringer Breech Face Markings,” 1996; 28(3):177-178.

Uchiyama, T., “Similarity Among Breech Face Marks Fired from Guns with Close Serial Numbers,” 1986;
18(3):15.

Wilson, R.J., “Mikrosil Breech Face Comparison,” 1983; 15(4):24.

Chamber Marks

Della Penna, A., “Chamber Markings?,” 1974; 6(2):22.

Dickinson, J.A.H., “Identification of Firearms by Chamber Marks on the Expended Cartridge Case,” 1976;
8(1):25.

Hamby, J.E., “Adapter Cartridges & Insert Barrels,” 1979; 11(4):23.

---. “Cartridge Adapters,” 1975; 7(3):16.

Hofmeister, A.G., “Revolver Chamber Markings,” 1979; 11(2):42.

Miller, J., “Chamber Marks from Dry-Fire Damage,” 1992; 24(2):162-164.

Shem, R.J., “Fireformed Chamber Striations on Rimfire Cartridge Cases,” 1987; 19(3):282-283.

Thompson, E., “Odd Chamber Markings in a 9mm Armi Tanfoglio Pistol,” 1992; 24(1):61-62.

Bunter Marks

Dodson, R.V., and Masson, J.J., “Bunter Marks: What Do They Mean,” 1997; 29(1):33-36.

Johnson, T.D., and Matty, W.G., “Starline Brass,” 1984; 16(4):60.

Matty, W., “Persistence of Toolmarks in the Cartridge Case Head Forming Process,” 1983; 15(1):108.

Zahn, M.S., “Unique Markings on a Shotshell Head Due to a Worn or Chipped Bunter Tool,” 1984;
16(3):8.

Basic References:

Ackley, P.O., Handbook for Shooters & Reloaders

Hodgon Powder Co., Hodgdon's Reloading Data Manual

Hornaday Staff, Hornaday Handbook of Cartridge Reloading

FATM Training Manual Page 95 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

NRA Staff, The NRA Handloader's Guide

Rumage, Lyman Cast Bullet Handbook

Sharpe, Complete Guide to Hand Loading

Shooter’s Bible, Reloader's Guide

Sierra Staff, Sierra Bullets Reloading Manual

Speer Staff, Speer Reloading Manual

FATM Training Manual Page 96 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

J. SHOTSHELL AND SHOTSHELL COMPONENT EXAMINATIONS AND

COMPARISONS
1. Determine what type of examinations may be conducted and what conclusions can be
reached from an examination of the following components. Discuss this with your
Technical Lead or experienced examiner.

Shot, deformed and undamaged

Fired card or fiber wads
Fired plastic wads
Fired shotshell casings
Unfired shotshells
Shot buffer material
Shot collar and shot cup
(Use Training Assignment #56 and Practical Exercise #17 to complete this objective.)

_____________ ________
Examiner Date

2. Familiarize yourself with the use of the SAF in regard to the determination of gauge
and manufacturer of fired shotshell components. Know the limitations in regard to
making such determinations. Demonstrate your proficiency in using the SAF to
conduct this type of search to your Technical Lead or an experienced examiner.

(Use Training Assignment #55 to complete this objective.)

_____________ ________
Examiner Date

3. Using a shotgun, saw off a portion of the barrel. Test fire this shotgun using a
Remington shotshell with a power piston wad. Recover the test shotshell wads and
make microscopic comparisons of marks imparted to the test wads.

(Use Training Assignment #59 to complete this objective.)

_____________ ________
Examiner Date

4. Test fire the following (or similar) shotguns using at least two test shotshells from each
shotgun and microscopically compare the marks imparted to these fired shotshells.
Include in your comparisons the following types of marks: firing pin impression,
breechface marks (primer, battery cup, and head), extractor marks, ejector marks,
chamber marks, and any other mechanism marks. Photograph these marks and
discuss the significance of identifying any of these types of marks.

FATM Training Manual Page 97 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Mossberg, model 500, pump-action shotgun

Remington, Model 1100, semiautomatic shotgun
Marlin, model 55, bolt-action shotgun
J.C. Higgins, Model 1011, top-break single shot shotgun
Beretta, Silver Snipe model, over-under double barrel shotgun
Stevens, Model 311, side by side double barrel shotgun
(Use Training Assignment #58 to complete this objective.)

______________ ________
Examiner Date

5. Using a 12-gauge Remington, Model 1100, shotgun, obtain at least two test shotshell
casings with each of the following types of ammunition. Also, recover a representative
number of the fired pellets and fired wadding from each test firing. Compare markings
on these test fired shotshells with each other. Examine the fired components that are
recovered and compare them to unfired components of the same type. Discuss the
significance of your findings.

12-gauge Remington, 2 3/4" Magnum, 00 Buck

12-gauge Remington, 2 3/4" Shur-Shot, #8 shot
12-gauge Federal, 2 3/4" Magnum, 00 Buck
12-gauge Federal, 2 3/4" Field load, #9 shot
12-gauge Activ, 2 3/4" Field load, #7 shot
12-gauge Activ, 2 3/4" Magnum, BB shot
12-gauge Winchester, 2 3/4" Xpert, #6 shot
12-gauge Winchester, 2 3/4" Super-X, #7 shot

(Use Training Assignment #57 to complete this exercise.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

6. Discuss in detail the procedures used in reloading shotshells and familiarize yourself
with the shotshell reloading equipment in the Firearm Section. Know how to recognize
reloaded shotshells from an examination of the shotshell casing and/or its
components. Reload shotshells using the shotshell reloading equipment in the section
and examine the reloaded shotshells for reloading-type marks.

(Use Training Assignment #60 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

FATM Training Manual Page 98 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

7. Research the current U.S. shot sizes and weights and obtain a chart reflecting the
data. Familiarize yourself with the variations worldwide in shot size and composition.
Learn the significance of the “Rule of 17" as it applies to shot size.

(Use Training Assignment #55 to complete this objective.)

________________ _________
Examiner Date

8. Coordinate with your Technical Lead or an experienced examiner to go to a shotgun

range to pattern shotguns. A variety of shotguns, chokes, and ammunition are
required for this assignment. You will create patterns at differing distances using
different combinations of shotguns, chokes, and ammunition. Different target surfaces
will be used.

(Use Training Assignment #60 to complete this objective.)

________________ _________
Examiner Date

REFERENCE MATERIALS

SHOTSHELL AND FIRED SHOTSHELL EXAMINATIONS AND COMPARISONS

The following reference materials serve several purposes:

• to provide a wider range of additional resources should you have a particular interest in a
given topic.
• to provide reference materials for your future professional use.
• to allow you to gain additional depth in particular subject areas.

Should you encounter other references in this category, you are encouraged to make additional notes
about them at the end of this listing.

General

Burrard, G., The Identification of Firearms and Forensic Ballistics,

st
1 edition, Charles Scribner Sons, NY, 1934, revised edition, A.S. Barnes & Co., NY, 1964.

Datig, F.A., Cartridges for Collectors, Volumes I-III, Borden Publishing Co., 1956.

Davis, J.E., An Introduction to Tool Marks, Firearms and the Striagraph, Charles C. Thomas, Springfield,
IL, 1958.

Gunther, J.D., and Gunther, C.O., The Identification of Firearms, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York,
1935.

Hatcher, J.S., Hatcher’s Notebook, Military Service Publishing Company, Harrisburg, PA, 1947.

FATM Training Manual Page 99 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016

Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

nd
Hatcher, J.S., Jury, F.J., and Weller, J., Firearms Investigation, Identification and Evidence, 2 edition,
Stackpole Books, Harrisburg, PA, 1957.

Heard, B.E., Handbook of Firearms and Ballistics: Examining and Interpreting Forensic Evidence, John
Wiley & Sons, New York, 1997.

Horn, W.R., Headstamps and Cartridge Identification Data, Horn Co., 1962.

James, C.R., “Fluted and Annular-Grooved Chamber Markings,” paper delivered at the AFTE annual
training seminar, Tampa, 1998.

Kennington, R.H., The Matrix: 9mm Parabellum - An Empirical Study of Type Determination, 1992.

Krcma, V., “Fluted and Annular Grooved Barrel Chambers in Firearms,” Journal of Forensic Sciences,
Vol. 41, No. 3, May 1966, pp. 407-417.

Mathews, J.H., Firearms Identification, Volumes I-III, Charles C. Thomas, Springfield, IL, 1962.

McClean, D.B., Small Arms Ammunition Identification Guide, Normount Technical Publications, 1971.

Remage, Lyman Shotshell Hand Book, Third Edition.

rd
NRA Firearms Fact Book, 3 edition, National Rifle Association, Fairfax, VA, 1989.

White, H.P., and Munhall, B.D., Cartridge Headstamp Guide, H.P. White Laboratory, 1963.

---. Pistol and Revolver Cartridges, H.P. White Laboratory, 1963.

AFTE Journal

Case Notes

“California Department of Justice Firearms Toolmark Identification Training Syllabus: Professionalism,”

1991; 23(1):559-578.

Examination Protocols and Procedures

“California Department of Justice Firearms Toolmark Identification Training Syllabus: Professionalism,”

1991; 23(2):703-715.

Worksheets

“California Department of Justice Firearms Toolmark Identification Training Syllabus: Professionalism,”

1991; 23(2):714.

Jordan, T.D., “Oklahoma State Bureau of Investigation Firearms Laboratory: A Pictorial Display,” 1979;
11(4):47.

“Laboratory Work Sheets,” Newsletter #2, Aug. 1969, p. 15.

FATM Training Manual Page 100 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Untitled insert, Newsletter #3, Oct. 1969, pp. 19-20.

Untitled insert, Newsletter #4, Dec. 1969, p. 25.

Reporting of Conclusions

“California Department of Justice Firearms Toolmark Identification Training Syllabus: Professionalism,”

1991; 23(2):719-726.

Jordan, T.D., “Oklahoma State Bureau of Investigation Firearms Laboratory: A Pictorial Display,” 1979;
11(4):50.

Plastic Shotshells

Gallant, J.J., “Will Plastic Shotshells Hinder Firearms Identification?,” 1987; 19(1):17.

Mason, J.J., “Unusual Identification of All-Plastic Shotshell Cases,” 1989; 21(4):635.

General

Bouley, B., “Determination of Firing Sequence by Cartridge Case Markings,” 1995; 27(3):237-241.

Byrd, S.C., “Misleading Cartridge Case Markings,” 1989; 21(3):522-523.

Davis, J.E., “Test Toolmarks from Weapon Parts May Facilitate Comparisons,” 1972; 4(3A):28.

Hart, R.P., “Information on Weapons Frequently Encountered,” 1981; 13(4):51.

Heard, B.J., “Case of Interest,” 1978; 10(2):21.

Hurst, F.M., “Unusual Brand of Pistol,” 1973; 5(6):29.

Kennington, R.H., and Galan, J.I., “Ejector Type Marks on Unfired Cartridges,” 1987; 19(4):452.

Lapierre, J.A.G., “Additional Identifying Features Dealing with Revolvers,” 1978; 10(3):36.

McGuire, D.L., “Potentially Incorrect Weapon Identification,” 1972; 4(3):30.

McKay, S.A., “Class Characteristics of Shotguns from Shell Markings,” 1971; 3(3):34.

Nennstiel, R., “Computer Supported Method of Firearm Type Determination,” 1986; 18(4):4.

Rathman, G.A., “Unusual Cartridge Case Identification,” 1976; 8(4):29.

Stengel, R.F., “Which Cartridge Was Fired First?,” 1987; 19(3):325-326.

Walsh, K.A., and Buckleton, J.S., “Firing Sequence Involving Two 303 British Cartridges,” 1991;
23(3):816-819.

Welch, N.E., “Matching a Bullet to a Cartridge Case,” 1981; 13(4):79.

FATM Training Manual Page 101 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Headstamps

Al Khalifa, A.K., “Headstamps With Arabic Markings,” 1983; 15(2):64.

Anderson, E.J., “Headstamps of 5.56mm and 7.62mm Cartridges, Reportedly Manufactured in

Singapore,” 1974; 6(1):21.

Barabash, T., “New Cartridge,” 1978; 10(3):46.

Bates, J.S., “Another Ammunition Oddity,” 1973; 5(4):22.

Berg, S.O., “Could You Have Identified It?,” 1970; 2(10):32.

---. “Interesting Headstamp,” 1970; 2(7):22.

---. “Interesting Headstamp,” 1971; 3(4):14.

Bridgemon, R.R., “Aguila Cartridges,” 1985; 17(2):116.

Clanet, C., “French Small Firearm Cartridge Headstamps,” 1972; 4(2):26.

Canning, D.R., “Headstamps for Stud Guns,” 1976; 8(1):53.

Cassidy, F.H., “What Caused the Unusual Headstamp Mark?,” 1989; 21(4):655.

Dougherty, P.M., “Eldorado Cartridge Corporation Headstamps,” 1990; 22(4):443.

Edwards, R.L., “Circumferential Fractures,” 1991; 23(3):806-807.

---. “New Type of Ammunition by MFS (Matravideki Femmuvek),” 1993; 25(4):254-258.

Ernest, R.N., and Fite, K., “Remington Cartridge Made By Winchester,” 1989; 21(3):520.

Garland, P.V., “Color Code Identification of Small Arms Cartridges,” 1974; 6(2):27.

---. “Headstamp Designator +P,” 1974; 6(2):10.

Gieszl, R., “New Ammunition,” 1982; 14(1):40.

Green, K., “Remington Announces a New Headstamp for Rimfire,” 1983; 15(3):18.

Haag, L.C., “Korean Ammunition Available in North America,” 1981; 13(1):7.

---. “Stirling .22 Rimfire Ammunition,” 1977; 9(2):226.

Hall, J.M., “American Ballistics Grand Slam Cartridge,” 1991; 23(2):679-681.

Hamby, J.E., “Information on Delay Cartridges,” 1974; 6(1):5.

---. “Japanese Ammunition Information,” 1976; 8(2):19.

FATM Training Manual Page 102 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

---. “New Headstamp on KTW Metal Piercing Cartridges,” 1971; 3(5):16.

---. “Tests on the Squibman .22 Caliber Cartridge,” 1971; 3(2):29.

---. “Two New Cartridges,” 1978; 10(3):47.

Hampton, H.L., “Letter From SAAMI: Headstamp Explanation,” 1974; 6(2):14.

Harden, L.R., “Geco Headstamp Information,” 1973; 5(3):10.

---. “Hi-Jacker Cartridge,” 1977; 9(1):39.

Heard, B.J., “Ammunition Information,” 1983; 15(1):65.

---. “New CBC Ammunition,” 1983; 15(2):16.

“Headstamps,” 1991; 23(3):874-875.

Heflin, T.F., “9MM Steyr Cartridge Conversions,” 1987; 19(3):262-265.

---.” Information on Various Cartridges,” 1985; 17(2):85.

Interpol, “Cartridge Identification,” 1976; 8(4):72.

---. “Cartridge Identification,” 1977; 9(1):69.

---. “Interpol: Cartridge Information,” 1976; 8(2):112.

Johnson, T.D., “Imported Ammunition,” 1979; 11(1):36.

Johnson, T.D., and Matty, W.G., “Starline Brass,” 1984; 16(4):60.

Kass, G.A., “Ammunition Information: Manufacturer & Headstamp,” 1983; 15(2):9.

---. “Headstamps,” 1990; 22(3):346-347.

---. “Headstamps,” 1991; 23(2):659.

Kellett, P.M., “Egyptian Headstamp,” 1990; 22(2):226.

---. “Toolmarks on the Case of Remington Semi-Jacketed Bullets,” 1984; 16(3):81.

Lambert, R.R., “Ammunition Headstamps,” 1972; 4(3):36.

Lomoro, V.J., “.22 Short, .22 Long Rifle and Now the .22 In-Between,” 1975; 7(2):33.

Lorsbach, L.A., “Dots Make a Difference,” 1976; 8(2):15.

Lutz, M.C., “Explosive Projectiles for Small Arms,” 1973; 5(1):12.

---. “Special .380 Submachine Gun Cartridge for MAC (Ingram) SMG,” 1972; 4(3A):35.

FATM Training Manual Page 103 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

---. “Winchester & Hirtenberg Ammunition Sold by Sears Roebuck & Federal Cartridge Co.,” 1974;
6(4):14.

Matthews, J.W., “9X19 SP Headstamp,” 1980; 12(1):40.

Matty, W., “Wahib Arms Ammunition Information,” 1983; 15(1):68.

Moline, K., and Lansing, J., “Ammunition Information,” 1993; 25(3):204-205.

Molnar, S., “Observation While Firing HP Ammunition,” 1971; 3(5):6.

Nennstiel, R., “Collection of Headstamps and Projectiles,” 1985; 17(4):7.

Nicholson, T., “Headstamp Oddity,” 1970; 2(3):31.

Nielsen, F.I., “Unusual Head Stamps,” 1973; 5(5):27.

Poust, W.R., “Headstamp Impressions in Oily Residue,” 1987; 19(3):300.

---. “Observation of Different Headstamps in Same Box of Ammunition,” 1982; 14(2):12.

“Smith & Wesson Information,” 1979; 11(1):22.

Smith, A.G., “Cartridges Offered by Centennial Arms Corporation,” 1974; 6(3):16.

Smith, O.C., “Headstamps from Desert Storm,” 1993; 25(2):110-111.

Smith, R.J., “Star Ammunition,” 1975; 7(3):57.

Steidler, R.A., “Caliber .22 Ammunition With B Headstamp,” 1973; 5(1):27.

Stubits, F., “New Cartridge: The 22 Caliber Devastator,” 1981; 13(3):15.

Tokano, K., “Double Marked WW Headstamp,” 1989; 21(4):583.

Tulleners, F.A., “New Headstamp Cascade Cartridge International,” 1979; 11(2):87.

Waite, M.D., “Identification of Browning Arms Co Ammunition,” 1973; 5(3):26.

Woodin, W.H., “Military and Police Ammunition Research Identification,” 1981; 13(4):102.

Specific Models and Mechanism Marks

Carr, J.C., “AMT Automag II Identification by Dots,” 1990; 22(2):163-166.

---. “Lorcin L25 A Barrel With Class,” 1992; 24(1):17-21.

Celovsky, J.R., “Heckler & Koch, Model HK4 Pistol, Additional Outstanding Class Characteristics,” 1973;
5(5):23.

Celovsky, J.R., and Lemmer, J.T., “Heckler & Koch Pistol, Model VP702 9mm Parabellum,” 1984;
16(3):108.
FATM Training Manual Page 104 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Dujanovich, M.B., “Heckler & Koch 9x19mm Firearms,” 1995; 27(4):297-302.

---. “Navy Arms Model TU90 Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1994; 26(2):121-126.

Fournier, R.J., and Lemmer, J.T., “Type Sugiura: Oriental 32 ACP Pistol,” 1985; 17(2):38.

Garland, P.V., “SATA Semiautomatic Pistol,” 1970; 2(7):23.

Gieszl, R., “Bersa 380 Semiautomatic Pistols,” 1991; 23(3):862-866.

Kennington, R.H., “380 Auto Arcology: The Firing Pin Ejector Models,” 1996; 28(2):82-91.

---. “Ordnance Manufacturing Corporation Model Back-Up,” 1977; 9(1):42.

Kreiser, M.J., “Unusual Cartridge Marking by a Model 39 Smith & Wesson,” 1983; 15(4):13.

Lutz, M.C., “Central Kentucky Arms Semiautomatic Rifle,” 1983; 15(4):40.

Maciejewski, K., “Possible Identification Feature: .22 Caliber Smith & Wesson Model 61 Pistol,” 1970;
2(5):38.

Molnar, S., “Characteristics of the Erma .22 Caliber Luger Pistol,” 1970; 2(4):26.

Nichols, R.G., “Glock Versus Smith and Wesson Model SW40F: Comparison of Markings on Fired
Cartridge Cases,” 1995; 27(2):133-139.

Reynolds, T.W., “Phoenix Arms (Model HP22),” 1995; 27(4):314.

Shem, R.J., and Striupaitis, P.P., “Fired Bullets & Cartridge Cases from Raven Pistol,” 1983; 15(3):109.

Sojat, J.G., and Hart, R.P., “Heckler & Koch Model HK-4 Pistol,” 1973; 5(2):19.

Stauffer, J.C., “Caliber .25 Sterling Auto Pistol,” 1972; 4(5):30.

Thompson, E., “Intratec Tec 22 Scorpion Pistol,” 1990; 22(1):51-54.

Firing Pin Impressions

Cochrane, D.W., “Firing Pin or Ejector?,” 1981; 13(4):106.

Fraser, D.A., “Rimfire Firing Pin Impressions,” 1983; 15(3):85.

Frazier, R.A., “Firing Pin Impressions: Their Relationship to Hammer Fall Conditions,” 1989; 21(2):589-92.

Haag, L.C., “Firing Pin Protrusion and Impression Depth Measurement,” 1990; 22(3):295-298.

Matty, W., and Johnson, T., “Comparison of Manufacturing Marks on Smith & Wesson Firing Pins,” 1984;
16(3):51.

McBrayer, W.S., “Unique Firing Pin Impression,” 1981; 13(4):116.

FATM Training Manual Page 105 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Miller, J., “Pressure Effects on Firing Pin Impression Depth,” 1995; 27(3):242-245.

Nielsen, F.I., “Ruger 10/22 Firing Pin Modification,” 1988; 20(3): 325.

Ojena, S.M., and Murdock, J.E., “Evaluation of an Alibi: Relative Firing Pin Impression Depths,” 1981;
13(3):79.

Stephenson, J.S., McPhillips, E.T., and Jachimowicz, E., “Use of a Duplex Nail as a Firing Pin in the
Intratec Tec-9 Pistol,” 1996; 28(1):15-18.

Verbeke, D.J., and Stauffer, J.C., “Unique Firing Pin Identification,” 1975; 7(1):59.

Anvil Marks

Dutton, G., “Anvil Bounce,” 1996; 28(4):243-246.

Ernest, R.N., “Anvil Marks in Centerfire Cartridge Cases,” 1992; 24(4):367-370.

Gieszl, R., “Don’t Forget 22 Rimfire Anvil Marks,” 1991; 23(4):997-999.

Tuira, Y.J., and Ziegler, P.A., “Anvil Bounce,” 1995; 27(4):318-319.

Manufacturing Marks

Dutton, G., “Manufacturing Marks on 12 Gauge Cartridges,” 1997; 29(2):170-172.

Klees, G., “Aberrant Manufacturing Marks on Federal Ammunition,” 1997; 29(1):21-23.

LaVoy, T.A., and Willmer, J.H., “Toolmarkings From a Reloading Die,” 1979; 11(2):37.

Matty, W., “Persistence of Toolmarks in the Cartridge Case Head Forming Process,” 1983; 15(1):108.

Quirk, T.W., “Toolmarks on Primers of ‘Rio’ Brand Ammunition,” 1987; 19(3):309-310.

Robinson, M.K., “Another Manufactured Toolmark,” 1996; 28(3):164-165.

Swim, J.D., “Firearms Examiners Beware,” 1979; 11(1):33-34.

Breech Face Marks

Cook, C.W., “Breech Face Markings from a Non Operable Weapon,” 1983; 15(4):53.

Esposito, A.J., “Apparent Mirror Image Breech Face Marking in the Stevens Model 311 Side by Side
Shotgun,” 1995; 27(3):200-201.

Matty, W., “Raven 25 Automatic Pistol Breech Face Toolmarks,” 1984; 16(3):57.

Molnar, S., “False Breech Face ID’s,” 1996; 28(2):95-96.

---. “Marks of Spanner Wrench Holes in Firing Pin Escutcheons,” 1970; 2(7):34.

FATM Training Manual Page 106 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

---. “Notes on Breech Face Marks and Fouling,” 1977; 9(1):21.

Thompson, E., “Davis Derringer Breech Face Markings,” 1996; 28(3):177-178.

Uchiyama, T., “Similarity Among Breech Face Marks Fired from Guns with Close Serial Numbers,” 1986;
18(3):15.

Wilson, R.J., “Mikrosil Breech Face Comparison,” 1983; 15(4):24.

Chamber Marks

Della Penna, A., “Chamber Markings?,” 1974; 6(2):22.

Dickinson, J.A.H., “Identification of Firearms by Chamber Marks on the Expended Cartridge Case,” 1976;
8(1):25.

Hamby, J.E., “Adapter Cartridges & Insert Barrels,” 1979; 11(4):23.

---. “Cartridge Adapters,” 1975; 7(3):16.

Hofmeister, A.G., “Revolver Chamber Markings,” 1979; 11(2):42.

Miller, J., “Chamber Marks from Dry-Fire Damage,” 1992; 24(2):162-164.

Shem, R.J., “Fireformed Chamber Striations on Rimfire Cartridge Cases,” 1987; 19(3):282-283.

Thompson, E., “Odd Chamber Markings in a 9mm Armi Tanfoglio Pistol,” 1992; 24(1):61-62.

Bunter Marks

Dodson, R.V., and Masson, J.J., “Bunter Marks: What Do They Mean,” 1997; 29(1):33-36.

Johnson, T.D., and Matty, W.G., “Starline Brass,” 1984; 16(4):60.

Matty, W., “Persistence of Toolmarks in the Cartridge Case Head Forming Process,” 1983; 15(1):108.

Zahn, M.S., “Unique Markings on a Shotshell Head Due to a Worn or Chipped Bunter Tool,” 1984;
16(3):8.

FATM Training Manual Page 107 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

K. GUNSHOT RESIDUE EXAMINATIONS AND DISTANCE

DETERMINATIONS
1. Successfully complete the Gunpowder and Primer Residues Course at the FBI
Academy, Quantico, Virginia, or equivalent course. Coordinate this with your
Technical Lead.

(Use Training Assignment #52 to complete this objective.)

____________________________________________________________
Instructor, Location, and Date

_________________ ________
Technical Lead Date

2. Demonstrate your proficiency in preparing the chemicals and the test papers used in
the modified Griess test, the Sodium Rhodizonate test and copper testing, including
the test media and the photographic paper.

(Use Training Assignment #53 to complete this objective.)

________________ ________
Examiner Date

3. Describe in detail the chemical reactions that take place in the burning of smokeless
powder, the modified Griess test, the Sodium Rhodizonate test and copper testing.

(Use Training Assignment #53 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

4. Demonstrate your proficiency in conducting the following techniques, using the

techniques set out in the Firearm Section protocol manual:

a. conventional Modified Griess test

b. reverse Griess test
c. sodium rhodizonate test
d. copper testing
e. Bashinsky transfer
f. blotting transfer
_________________ ________
Examiner Date

5. Using specimens provided to you by your Technical Lead or an experienced

examiner, demonstrate your proficiency in conducting "muzzle-to-garment" distance
FATM Training Manual Page 108 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

tests in cases involving the deposition of gunshot residues. Your examination should
include note taking, microscopic and chemical examinations, test firing to produce test
patterns and accurately determining "muzzle-to-garment" distance.

(Use Practical Exercises #21, 22, 24, 25, 26 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

6. Using specimens provided to you by your Technical Lead, demonstrate your

proficiency in conducting "muzzle-to-garment" distance tests in cases involving shot
patterns. Your examination should include note taking; microscopic; and chemical
examinations; test firing of shot patterns; gunshot residue patterns; and accurately
determining "muzzle-to-garment" distance; orientation of the firearm; sources and
patterns of gunshot residues (e.g., muzzle perpendicular vs. muzzle oblique; GSR
patterns from flash suppressors; sound suppressors; and revolver cylinder gap); and
geometric aspects of powder and GSR patterns.

(Use Practical Exercises #23 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

7. Read the article entitled "Graphical Analysis of the Shotgun/Shotshell Performance

Envelope in the Distance Determination Cases" in the AFTE Journal, October 1989,
issue. Discuss this article with your Technical Lead or an experienced examiner.

(Use Training Assignment #54 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

8. Attend an autopsy of a shooting victim at the Medical Examiner's facilities. Document

any indications of gunshot residue deposits photographically. Also, document the
physical effects of the projectile on the body. Prepare a report on your observations
and include any information obtained by medical examiner personnel concerning their
opinions on distance determination and bullet effects, cause of death, direction of
bullet travel and other information pertinent to firearm identification.

_____________________________________________________________
Medical Examiner, Location, and Date
________________ _________
Training Officer Date

FATM Training Manual Page 109 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

REFERENCE MATERIALS

TERMINAL BALLISTICS: GUNSHOT RESIDUES, SHOT TERMINAL BALLISTICS: GUNSHOT

RESIDUES, SHOT PATTERNS, DISTANCE DETERMINATIONS, BULLET PATH ANALYSES AND
WOUND EFFECTS ANALYSES AND WOUND EFFECTS

The following reference materials serve several purposes:

• to provide a wider range of additional resources should you have a particular interest in a
given topic.
• to provide reference materials for your future professional use.
• to allow you to gain additional depth in particular subject areas.
Should you encounter other references in this category, you are encouraged to make additional notes
about them at the end of this listing.

Books

Association of Firearm and Tool Mark Examiners Standardization Committee, Glossary of the Association
of Firearm and Toolmark Examiners, AFTE website.

Davis, T. L., The Chemistry of Powder and Explosives, reprinted by Angriff Press, Las Vegas, NV
(Originally printed in two separate volumes in 1941 and 1943; also reprinted by John Wiley and Sons.
New York 1950.) pp. 244-330, pp. 400-458.

Di Maio, V.J., Gunshot Wounds - Practical Aspects of Firearms, Ballistics, and Forensic Techniques, 2nd
edition, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, 1998.

Fiegl, F., “Spot Tests in Organic Analysis,” 7th edition, Elsevier Publishing Co., New York, 1966.

Fiegl, F., and Anger, V., “Spot Tests in Inorganic Analysis,” 6th edition, Elsevier Publishing Co., New
York, 1972.

Fisher, R.S., “Shotgun Wounds” in W.U. Spitz and R.S. Fisher, eds., Medicolegal Investigation of Death,”
Charles C. Thomas, Springfield, IL, 1980, pp. 275-294.

Kirk, Crime Investigation

Spitz, W.U., “Gunshot Wounds” in W.U. Spitz and R.S. Fisher, eds., Medicolegal Investigation of Death,”
Charles C. Thomas, Springfield, IL, 1980, pp. 216-274.

Wilson, Homicide Investigation Techniques

AFTE Journal

Gunshot Residues

Allen, D.E., “Effects of Blood on Gunshot and Gunpowder Residue,” 1983; 15(2):102.

Bashinski, J.S., Davis, J.E., and Young, C., “Detection of Lead in Gunshot Residues on Targets Using the
Sodium Rhodizonate Test,” 1974; 6(4):5.

FATM Training Manual Page 110 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Bonfanti, M., and Gallusser, A., “Problems Encountered in the Detection of

Gunshot Residues,” 1995; 27(2):105-122.

Branch, D.M., “Possible Griess Test Contamination,” 1982; 14(3):l 1.

Brown, C.G., “Detection of Nitrites and Lead in Gunpowder Residue Patterns,” 1985; 17(2):118.

Bydal, B.A., “Percussion Primer Mixes,” 1990; 22(l):1-26.

Campbell, P.A., “Antazoline Hydrochloride vs The Griess Test,” 1982; 14(2):87.

Carr, J.C., “Alternative Device for Distance Measurement in Range Determination Tests,” 1992; 24(l):76-
78.

Cayton, J.C., “Blackpowder Firearms, Powder Residue & Ball Penetration,” 1984; 16(4):80.

Cochrane, D.W., “Test Pattern Cloth Range Determination Examination,” 1981; 13(2):55.

Cole, M.D., Ross N., and Thorpe, J.W., “Gunshot Residue and Bullet Wipe Detection Using a Single Lift
Technique,” 1992; 24(3):254-259.

Cook, C.W., “Test Pattern Target Material for Proximity Testing,” 1979; 11(4):25.

---. “Halo Effect,” 1978:10(2):17.

Davis, J.E., “Some Notes on Bullet Holes and Powder Residues,” 1972; 4(4):17.

---. “Some Notes on Bullet Holes and Powder Residues,” 1989; 21(2):152-155.

---. “Target Materials for Powder Patterns,” 1977; 9(l):59.

Denio, D.J., “Forms to Document Procedure in Case Notes: Chemical Tests for Gunshot Residues,”
1997; 29(l):61-65.

Deobald, G., “Spiral Pattern,” 1995; 27(3):247.

Dillon, J.H., “Manufacture of Conventional Smokeless Powder,” 1991; 23(2):682-688.

---. “Modified Griess Test: A Chemically Specific Chromophoric Test for Nitrite Compounds in Gunshot
Residues,” 1990; 22(3):243-250.

---. “Protocol for Gunshot Residue Examinations in Muzzle-to-Target Distance Determinations,” 1990;
22(3):257-274.

---. “Sodium Rhodizonate Test: A Chemically Specific Chromophoric Test for Lead in Gunshot Residues,”
1990; 22(3):251-256.

Dodson, R.V., and Stengel, R.F. “Recognizing Vaporized Lead from Gunshot Residue,” 1995; 27(l):43-44.

Doyle, J.S., “Griess Test Modification,” 1987; 19(2):165-168.

Dragan, P., and Brand, R., “Lead Deposits on Window Screen,” 1979; 11(2):43.

FATM Training Manual Page 111 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Gamboe, T.E., “Peculiar Feature in Near Contact Gunshot Residue Pattern,” 1993; 25(4):292-293.

Ghabbour, F.B., Walsh, M.I., and Abo-Namous, S.A., “Detection of Lead in Gunshot Residue: A Case
Study,” 1990; 22(2):149-153.

Haag, L., “Gunshot Residue Testing of Bloody Garments,” 1994; 26(2):155-156.

Haag, L.C., “American Lead Free 9mm Parabellum Cartridges,” 1995; 27(2):142-149.

---. “Method for Improving the Griess and Sodium Rhodizonate Tests for GSR Patterns on Bloody
Garments,” 1991; 23(3):808-815.

---. “Phenyltrihydroxyfluorone: A New Reagent for Use in Gunshot Residue Testing,” 1996; 28(l):25-31.

---. “Powder in a Most Peculiar Place,” 1990; 22(2):110-114.

---. “Propellant Type from the Examination of Fired Bullets,” 1980; 12(2):26.

---. “Microchemical Test for Copper Containing Bullet Wiping,” 1989; 13(3):22.

---. “Microchemical Test for Copper Containing Bullet Wiping,” 1989; 21(2): 298-303.

Haag, M.G., “2-Nitroso-1-Naphthol versus Dithiooxamide in Trace Copper Detection at Bullet Impact
Sites,” 1997; 29(2):204-209.

Harden, L.R., “Gunpowder,” 1975; 7(l):63.

Harris, C.E., “Sherlock Holmes Would Be Impressed,” 1985; 17(l):16.

Horvath, M.A., “Gunshot Residue Patterns Using Infrared Microscopy,” 1981; 13(l):21.

Howe, W.J. “References Pertaining to Firearms Discharge Residues and Related Subject Matters,” 1972;
4(3A):26.

Hueske, E.E., “Gunshot Residue Testing of Blood Stained Garments,” 1994; 26(l):26-33.

Kreiser, M.J., “Lighting as a Consideration During Range Determinations on Skin,” 1983; 15(3):27.

---. “Potential False Reaction With the Griess Test,” 1984; 16(3):9.

Lambert, R.R., “Demonstrative Evidence,” 1970; 2(5):37.

---. “Powder Residue and Metallic Traces,” 1971; 3(3):30.

Lansing, J.F., and Powers, D.C., “Barrel Length vs Shot Powder Dispersion,” 1982; 14(l):29.

Lindman, D.A., “Weathering Time Factor in GSR Proximity Determinations,” 1989; 21(3):500-502.

Lindman, D.A., and Papke, R.E., “Range Determination by a Different Method,” 1991; 23(3):856-858.

Lutz, M.C., “Gunshot Residue Problems,” 1978; 10(l):4.

FATM Training Manual Page 112 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

---. “Problems with Sodium Rhodizonate,” 1987; 19(l):15.

Lutz, M.C., and Templin, R.H., “Some Disinfectants Cause Positive Reaction to Griess Test,” 1983;
15(4):35.

Matty, W., “Primer Composition and Gunshot Residue,” 1987; 19(l):8-13.

---. “Unusual Source of Gunshot Residue Particles,” 1991; 23(l):535-537.

Molnar, S., “Bullet Bears Unusual Indications of Distance of Shot,” 1979; 11(4):21.

---. “Powder Residues Can Give Valuable Clues to Examiner,” 1969; 1(4):37.

---. “Powder Residues Sometimes Reveal Barrel Length,” 1969; 1(4):39.

Murdock, J.E., “Collection of Gunshot Discharge Residues,” 1984; 16(3):136.

Nielsen, F.I., and Simpson, R., “Unusual Firearms Discharge Residues,” 1979; 11 (2):44.

Owens, M., and George, W., “Gunshot Residue Examinations: Modification in the Application of the
Sequence of Chemical Tests,” 1991; 23(4):940-942.

Poole, R.A., “Nitrite Detection Kit,” 1978; 10(3):26.

---. “Revolver Cylinder Smoke Rings,” 1979; 11(2):61.

Rathman, G.A., “Gunpowder Gunshot Residue Deposition: Barrel Length vs Powder Type,” 1990;
22(3):318-327.

Shem, R.J., “Bleeding as a Source of Lead Particulates on Clothing,” 1994; 26(4):269-275.

---. “Vaporization of Bullet Lead by Impact,” 1993; 25(2):75-78.

Stone, I.C., “Evidence of Firearms Discharge Residues,” 1982; 14(4):25.

---. “Investigation into Examination and Analysis of Gunshot Residues,” 1984; 16(3):63.

Stone, I.C., and DiMaio, V.J.M., “Metallic Residues in Gunshot Wounds,” 1977, 9(2):31.

Stone, I.C. and Fletcher, L., “Primer Residue Study,” 1986; 18(2):49.

Stone, I.C., Fletcher, L., Jones, J., and Huang, G., “Investigation into Examinations and Analysis of
Gunshot Residues,” 1989; 21(2):345-354.

Templin, R.H., “Unusual Powder Pattern Results,” 1988; 20(1):61-63.

Thompson, E., “Square Gunshot Residue Pattern,” 1997; 29(1):30-32.

Thompson, R.C., “Effects of Wind Velocity on Gunshot Powder and Residue,” 1997; 9(2):139.

Vandiver, J.V., “Toolmarks on Smokeless Powder: A Preliminary Inquiry,” 1976; 8(1):19.

FATM Training Manual Page 113 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Vaughan, R.T., and Gilman, P.L., “Barrel Length from Examination of a Contact Powder Pattern,” 1984;
16(3):16.

Veitch, G.M., “Examination of the Variables Encountered in Gun Shot Residue Patterns,” 1981; 13(2):35.

Watson, D.J., “Gunshot Residue vs. Fingerprint Powder,” 1984; 16(3):134.

“Nitrites Examination in Propellant Powder Residue,” 1979; 11(1):32.

Shot Patterning

Besant, P.E., Thompson, E.J., Hamby, J.E., Wolberg E., Haag, L., Martini, L.T., Loznycky, B., and
Gailistel, T., “Rifled Shotgun Barrel Effect,” 1992; 24(3):246-253.

Boehm, A.P., “Bullet Holes/Shotgun Patterns in Metal Screens,” 1977; 9(2):181.

Dillon, J.H., “Graphical Analysis of the Shotgun/Shotshell Performance Envelope in Distance

Determination Cases,” 1989; 21(4):593-594.

---. “Protocol for Shot Pattern Examinations in Muzzle-to-Target Distance Determinations,” 1991;
23(1):511-521.

Dunbar, D.A., “Identification of a Fired Sabot and a Distance Determination Involving a Shotshell
Cartridge,” 1997; 29(1):26-29.

Garrison, D.H., “Field Recording and Reconstruction of Angled Shot Pellet Patterns,” 1995; 27(3):204-
208.

Kamaka, S.K., “Sawed Off Shotgun and Shot Pattern,” 1970; 2(7):26.

Kapelsohn, E., “Shotgun Patterns, Chokes and Performances,” 1988; 20(4):421-434.

Kley, E.P., and Rowe, W.F., “Trajectories of 00 Buckshot,” 1989; 21(2):457-460.

---. “Trajectories of 00 Buckshot,” 1988; 20(4):404-407.

Lutz, M.C., “Pellet Counting Device & Shot Measuring Device,” 1983; 15(3):24.

Mann, M.J., Espinza, E.O., Ralston, R.M., Stroud, R.K., Scanlan, M.D., and Strauss, S.J., “Shot Pellets:
An Overview,” 1994; 26(3):223-241.

Mann, M.J., Ferguson, W., Henderson, C., and Stroud, R., “Analysis of Unusual Home Made Shot Pellets
From Louisiana,” 1994; 26(3):242-250.

Matunas, E., “All About Shot,” 1988; 20(3):280-289.

Molnar, S., and Nicholson, T.V., “Shot Pattern With 00-Buck,” 1977; 9(2):132.

Omilion, P.M., “Effects of Window Glass on Shotgun Pellets Pattern,” 1979; 11(4):54.

Silliman, J.R., “Crime Scene Search: Evidence at the Scene of a Shotgun Shooting,” 1977; 9(2):111.
FATM Training Manual Page 114 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Thornton, J.I., and Guarino, K., “Polyethylene Shotshell Buffer & Determination of Trajectory,” 1984;
16(3):132.

Vincie, P., and Thornton, J., ”Quality Assurance in Shotshell Manufacture Implications for Determination
of Discharge Distance,” 1985; 17(3):70.

Watkins, R.L., and Haag, L.C., “Shotgun Evidence,” 1978; 10(3):10.

Wound Effects

“International Wound Ballistics Association and the Wound Ballistics Review,” 1991; 23(2):654.
“Terminal Ballistics Results,” 1975; 7(2):110.

Bell, E.A., “Wound Characteristics,” 1975; 7(3):74.

Di Maio, V.J.M., “Wound Ballistics,” 1972;4(5):27.

Dougherty, P.J., “Early Investigations into the Mechanisms of Wounding,” 1984; 16(4):46.

Fackler, M.L., “Bullet Penetration: Modeling the Dynamics and Incapacitation Resulting from Wound
Trauma, by Duncan MacPherson,” 1995; 27(2):150-151.

---. “Handgun Bullet Performance,” 1988; 20(4):446-448.

---. “Ordnance Gelatin Ballistic Studies,” 1987; 19(4):403-405.

---. “Tissue Disruption Pattern Used to Determine the Direction of Fire in an Unusual Bullet Wound,” 1995;
27(3):250-253.

---. “Wound Ballistics,” 1989: 21(1):25.

---. “Wounding Patterns of Military Rifle Bullets,” 1989; 21(4):643-649.

Jason, A., Fackler, M., Dougherty, P., and Malinowski, J., “Omnishock Bullets,” 1989; 21(1):32.

Gag, J., “Survey of Handgun Cartridges for Law Enforcement Applications,” 1982; 14(2):110.

Gerns, J.S., “Wounding Effects of Unconventional Ammunition,” 1984; 16(2):103.

Haag, L.C., “Ballistic Gelatin: Controlling Variances in Preparation and a Suggested Method for the
Calibration of Gelatin Blocks,” 1989; 21(3):483-489.

Hall, J.M., “Unusual Bullet Wound,” 1992; 24(1):55-57.

Hanson, S.R., “Physical Evidence Collection for Medical Personnel,” 1985; 17(1):69.

Jones, J.A., “Evaluation of Police Ammunition: .38 Special, .45 ACP and 9mm Parabellum,” 1974;
6(1):11.

Lattig, K.N., “Sizing Shotgun Slug Entrance Wounds,” 1987; 19(4):433-437.

FATM Training Manual Page 115 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

---. “Sizing Shotgun Slug Entrance Wounds,” 1989; 21(2):429-433.

Minnigerode, S.C., “Missile Wounds: Entrance and Exit Gunshot Wounds,” 1977; 9(2):157.

Poole, R.A., Cooper, R.E., Emanuel, L.G., Fletcher, L.A., and Stone, I.C., “Angle Effect on Hollow Point
Bullets Fired into Gelatin,” 1994; 26(3):193-198.

Reich, J.E., “Cooperation Between the Firearms Examiner and Medical Examiner,” 1983; 15(1):30.

---. “Five Gunshot Wounds Caused by a Single Shot,” 1979; 11(2):34.

Robert, G.K. and Bullian, M.E., “Comparison of the Wound Ballistic Potential of 9mm vs 5.56(.223)
Cartridges for Law Enforcement Entry Applications,” 1993; 25(2):142-148.

Roberts, G.K., and Wolberg, E.J., “Book Review: Handgun Stopping Power: The Definitive Study,” 1992;
24(4):383-387.

Smith, W.C., “Notes on Terminal Ballistic Effects, Using Caliber.30 Military Ammunition,” 1970; 2(5):20.

Thorpe, J.C., “Penetration Tests of Two 38 Special +P Ammunitions,” 1985; 17(2):83.

---. “Penetration Tests of Societe Francaise Munitions (SFM) T.H.V. 9mm & 357 Magnum,” 1987;
19(2):151-164.

Tuira, Y.J., “Classic Contact Wound,” 1981; 13(2):21.

Voorhees, R.S., “One Bullet Wound Two Bullets,” 1979; 11(3):60.

Wecht, C.H., and Perper, J.A., “Forensic Examination of Gunshot Wound Fatalities,” 1980; 12(1):11.

Wilson, R.J., “Identification of an Unknown Firearm from Contact Wound Characteristics,” 1996;
28(3):154-163.

---. “Technique for Recording Gunshot Wounds: Plastic Overlay,” 1984; 16(3):74.

Shooting Reconstruction

Cook, C.W., “Ballistics and the Firearm Examiner,” 1978; 10(2):49.

---. “Bullet Hole Size Determination,” 1983; 15(4):38.

Courtney, M., and Hueske, E.E., “Use of Hand Held Laser Pointers in the Reconstruction of Events at
Crime Scene,” 1994; 26(3):170-172.

Davis, W.C., “Baltecl Computer Program Update,” 1990; 22(1):40-50.

French, M.L., “Impact Angle Determination through Plastic Windows,” 1997; 29(l):73-79.

French, M.L., and Thompson, E.J., “Scene Reconstruction Using a Ballistic Alignment Laser,” 1997;
29(3):372-374.

Garrison, D.H., “Effective Use of Bullet Hole Probes in Crime Scene Reconstruction,” 1996; 28(1):57-63.
FATM Training Manual Page 116 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

---. “Examining Auto Body Penetration in the Reconstruction of Vehicle Shootings,” 1995; 27(3):209-212.

---. “Reconstructing Bullet Paths With Unfixed Intermediate Targets,” 1995; 27(1):45-48.

---. “Reconstructing Drive-By Shootings from Ejected Cartridge Case Location,” 1993; 25(1):15.

---. “Recording Bullet Defects at Crime Scenes,” 1996; 28(3):168-172.

---. “Shooting Reconstruction vs Shooting Reenactment,” 1993; 25(2):125-127.

Haag, L.C., “Bullet Impact Spalls in Frangible Surfaces,” 1980; 12(4):71.

---. “Bullet Ricochet: An Empirical Study and a Device for Measuring Ricochet Angle,” 1975; 7(3):44.

---. “Bullet Ricochet: An Empirical Study and a Device for Measuring Ricochet Angle,” 1989; 21(2):182-
188.

---. “Bullet Ricochet From Water,” 1979; 11(3):27.

---. “Construction of an Inexpensive Portable Laser For Use in Shooting Reconstructions,” 1987;
19(2):175-177.

---. “Forensic Use of Exterior Ballistic Calculations,” 1979; 11(1):13.

---. “Hornady Vector Ammunition: A New Tool in Studying Selected Exterior and Terminal Ballistic Events
of Forensic Interest,” 1996; 28(1):32-40.

---. “Measurement of Bullet Deflection by Intervening Objects and the Study of Bullet Behavior After
Impact,” 1987; 19(4):382-387.

---. “Portable Laser Theodolite System for Use in Shooting Scene Reconstruction,” 1991; 23(1):538-542.

---. “Use of Ballistic Calculations in the Solution of a Crime,” 1976; 8(4):45.

---. “Use of Ballistic Calculations in the Solution of a Crime,” 1989; 21(2):190-195.

---. “Vertical Ballistics,” 1990; 22(1):27-33.

Houde, J., and Cassidy, F.H., “Short-Range Bullet Trajectory Computer Program for MS-DOS
Computers,” 1991; 23(3):784-791.

Hueske, E.E., “Calculation of Trajectory Angles Using an Inexpensive Angle Gauge,” 1993; 25(3):231-
233.

Lattig, K.N., “Determination of the Point of Origin of Shots Fired into a Moving Vehicle,” 1991; 23(1):524-
534.

Laskowski, G.E., “Use of the LaserMax Gunsight as a Ballistics Alignment Tool,” 1997; 29(3):369-371,
329.

Molnar, S., “Bullets, Bullet Holes, Strings, Line of Sight,” 1969; 1(4):6.

FATM Training Manual Page 117 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

---. “Use of Scale Drawings to Establish Facts in Shooting Cases,” 1970;

2(2):2-14.

Nennstiel, R., “Accuracy in Determining Long-Range Position of Gunman,” 1985; 17(1):47.

---. “Determination of the Line of Sight Angle Through Firing Experiments,” 1991; 23(4):919-924.

---. “E.B. Version 4.0 Now Available,” 1995; 27(1):35-37.

---. “E.B. Version 2.0 Upgrade Now Available,” 1991; 23(1):505.

---. “Exterior Ballistics (EB), The Computer Program Revised,” 1990; 22(3):341-342.

---. “Forensic Aspects of Bullet Penetration of Thin Metal Sheets,” 1986; 18(2):18.

---. “How do Bullets Fly?” 1996; 28(2):104-143.

---. “Software Review,” 1990; 22(2):217-219.

---. “Study of Bullet Ricochet on a Water Surface,” 1984; 16(3):88.

Nicolosi, F.M., “Ballistics Alignment Laser,” 1992; 24(1):65-68.

Patty, J.R., “Associating Recovered Bullets with Ricochet Sites,” 1975; 7(2):28.

Prendergast, J.M., “Determination of Bullet Impact Position From the Examination of Fractured
Automobile Safety Glass,” 1994; 26(2):107-118.

Rathman, G.A., “Bullet Impact Damage and Trajectory Through Auto Glass,” 1993; 25(2):79-86.

---. “Bullet Ricochet and Associated Phenomena,” 1987; 19(4):374-381.

Roberts, J.L., and Hamby, J.E., “Reconstruction of a Shooting to Prove/Disprove a Trajectory,” 1985;
17(2):53.

Stone, R.S., “Calculation of Trajectory Angles Using a Line Level,” 1993; 25(1):21.

Thornton, J.I., “Effect of Tempered Glass on Bullet Trajectory,” 1983; 15(3):29

Trahin, J.L., “Bullet Trajectory Analysis,” 1987; 19(2):124-150.

Vaughan, R.T. and Dunklau, P., “Bullet Penetration Through Plastic,” 1992; 24(4):356- 357.

Warren, G., “Simple Measurement of Angles of Elevation,” 1991; 23(3):869.

Zeldes, I., “Laser Beam: A New Tool for Firearm Examiner,” 1981; 13(4):21.

Journals

“Ball Powder” (with four page flow chart), Chemical Engineering, Dec. 1946, pp. 136-139.

FATM Training Manual Page 118 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Barnes, F.C., and Helson, R.A., “An Empirical Study of Gunpowder Residue Patterns,” Journal of
Forensic Sciences, Vol. 19, 1974, pp. 448-462.

Breitenecker, R., and Senior, W., “Shotgun Patterns I - An Experimental Study on the Influence of
Intermediate Targets,” Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 12,1967, pp. 193-204.

Fann, C.H., Ritter, W.A., Watts, R.H., and Rowe, W.F., “Regression Analysis Applied to Shotgun Range-
of-Fire Estimates: Results of a Blind Study,” Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 31, 1986, pp. 840-854.

Jauhari, M., Chatterjea, S.M., and Ghosh, P.K., “Statistical Treatment of Pellet Dispersion Data for
Estimating Range of Firing,” Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 17, 1972. pp.141-149.

Moreau, T.S., Nickels, M.L., Wray, J.L., Bottemiller, K.W., and Rowe, W.F., “Pellet Patterns Fired by
Sawed-Off Shotguns,” Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 30, 1985, pp. 137-149.

Rowe, W.F., and Hanson, S.R., “Range of Fire Estimates from Regression Analysis Applied to the
Spreads of Shotgun Pellet Patterns: Results of the Blind Study,” Forensic Science lnt., Vol. 28,1985, pp.
239-250.

Walker, J.T., “Bullet Holes and Chemical Residues in Shooting Cases,” Journal of American Institute of
Criminal Law and Criminology, Vol. 31, 1940, pp. 497-521.

Wray, J.L., McNeil, J.E., and Rowe, W.F., “Comparison of Methods for Estimating Range of Fire Based
on the Spread of Buckshot Patterns,” Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 28, 1983, pp. 846-857.

Zeichner, A., and Glattstien, B., “Improved Reagents for Firing Distance Determination, “Journal of
Energetic Materials, Vol. 4, 1986, pp. 187-197.

Periodicals

Brown, P., “What is This Ball Powder?” (with charts), The American Rifleman, Dec. 1952, p. 17.

“Computerized Ballistics,” Gun Tests, Feb. 1994.

“Computerized Ballistics II, More High-Tech Data,” Gun Tests, Feb. 1996.

"Gunpowder and Gunshot Residue" FBI Manual

“Winchester Super Unleaded Ammo,” Law Enforcement Technology, Jul. 1995, pp. 56 and 58-60.

Wooters, J., “Winchester-Western’s New Ball Powder Line,” The Handloader Magazine, Sep.-Oct. 1973,
p. 36.

Papers

Ballou, S., “Reconstruction of Trajectory Paths Through the Use of Basic Trigonometric Functions,” paper
presented at the FBI Laboratory Crime Scene Processing and Reconstruction Seminar, September 4-6,
1996, Quantico, VA.

Bashinski, J.S., Davis, J.E., and Young, C., “Detection of Gunshot Residues - the Sodium Rhodizonate
Test.” Presented at the 1974 spring meeting of the California Association of Criminalists, Long Beach,
CA.
FATM Training Manual Page 119 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Bashinski, J.S., “The Evaluation of Gunshot Residues - the Sodium Rhodizonate Test.” Presented at the
1974 fall meeting of the California Association of Criminalists, Berkeley, CA.

Ernest, R., “A Study of Shooting Scene Dynamics,” paper presented at the FBI Laboratory Crime Scene
Processing and Reconstruction Seminar, September 4-6, 1996, Quantico, VA.

Taormina, S., “Reconstructive Placement of a Victim Within the Kill Site of a Homicidal Shotgun
Discharge, paper presented at the FBI Laboratory Crime Scene Processing and Reconstruction Seminar,
September 4-6, 1996, Quantico, VA.

FATM Training Manual Page 120 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

L. TOOLMARK EXAMINATIONS AND COMPARISONS

1. Review your notes in reference to the section entitled "Manufacture of Modern
Firearms.” Those machining methods are the basis for toolmark identification as they
were for firearm identification. However, it should be noted that in the broad definition
of toolmarks identification, certain other related types of examinations are also
performed.

(Use Training Assignment #61 to complete this objective.)

________________ ________
Examiner Date

2. Define the word "tool" and “toolmarks identification” in the narrow sense of the
expression. Also define toolmark identification in its broadest sense, and determine
the kinds of conclusions that may be reached in toolmark identification. Set these out
in detail and be prepared to discuss these with your Technical Lead or an experienced
examiner.

(Use Training Assignment #61 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

3. Discuss the significance of examining submitted tools first for trace evidence and
itemize several types of such deposits.

(Use Training Assignment #61 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

4. In a case involving a toolmark examination wherein no tool is submitted, determine the

types of conclusions which can be reached. Consider such things as the type of tool,
size of the tool, action employed by tool, value of toolmark for comparison purposes,
and unusual tool features. Discuss the "no tool" case with your Technical Lead or an
experienced examiner.

(Use Training Assignment #61 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

5. Define the following terms as they relate to toolmark identification and give three
examples of tools or methods that could produce each category:

a. Shearing
b. Pinching
FATM Training Manual Page 121 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

c. Fracture
d. Scrape mark
e. Impression
f. Slicing

(Use Training Assignment #62 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

6. Define the term "class characteristics" as it applies to toolmark identification. Using

the tools or methods selected as examples in the above, describe their respective
class characteristics in detail.

Select at least two tools representative of each category listed in paragraph 5, above. Produce toolmarks
with each tool and observe the class characteristics of the toolmark. Vary the angle and force with which
each tool is used.

(Use Training Assignment #62 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

7. Using soft copper wire of approximately 1/4-inch diameter, make cuts through it with
the tools that employ a shearing, pinching and slicing action. Make test cuts in lead
using the same tools. Attempt to identify the cuts in the copper wire as having been
made by the same tool as that which cut the test lead. Support your results with
photographs and note any lighting considerations made necessary by the color
difference between copper and lead.

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

8. Select a flat-bladed tool such as a screwdriver, and a pry bar and make marks in a
piece of copper or brass sheeting. Make the same type of marks in lead with both
tools. Microscopically compare those in the brass or copper sheeting with the test
marks in the lead. Attempt to identify the appropriate marks with the appropriate tool.
Photograph your results and comment on the difference in the quality of marks made
by each tool.

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

9. Using a drive pin punch, produce an impression in a piece of brass sheeting. Produce
a set of test marks in lead and examine these two marks. Attempt to identify these as
having been made by the same tool. Support your results by photographs.

_________________ ________
FATM Training Manual Page 122 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Examiner Date

10. Using a junked doorknob and a serrated-jawed tool, have your Technical Lead or an
experienced examiner produce impressions and scrape marks like those produced by
an attempt at an entry. Devise a method of obtaining test marks in lead like those
produced by the serrated-jawed tool on the doorknob. Microscopically examine the
marks on the doorknob with those on the test material. Identify the tool with the marks
on the doorknob and reproduce the tool-doorknob orientation and relate each mark to
its respective serration on the tool.

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

11. Learn the technique of reverse lighting. Obtain a piece of brittle material such as
Plexiglas or pot metal and fracture it into two fragments. Attempt to identify the two
fragments as having once been a single object. Take notes and support your results
by photographs.

_______________ _______
Examiner Date

12. Obtain an ax blade that contains numerous defects. Cut a piece of seasoned wood
such as dowel rod with the ax blade and attempt to identify the blade with the cut.
Insure that your test cuts are consistent with your "unknown" with respect to the
orientation of the ax to the wood and the direction of the grain. Support your results
with sketches and photographs.

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

13. Obtain a section of large-diameter telephone cable and cut it with the ax used above
and study the effects of a slicing action on a multi-stranded cable. Note the quality
and extent of microscopic marks of each strand and comment on the problems
involved in identifications of this sort. Photograph the sliced end of the cable.

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

14. Discuss the fact that generally saws, files and abrasive tools are not identifiable with
the marks they produce. Cite any exceptions to this rule.

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

15. Obtain a used tire and make cuts and stabs into the sidewall with a fixed blade knife.
Attempt to make comparisons of the toolmarks produced by the knife. Support your
results with photographs and notes. Discuss how the results of your examinations
might be altered if the knife had been sharpened after making the questioned cuts, or
if the knife had been used for an extended period of time after making the initial
questioned cuts.
FATM Training Manual Page 123 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

16. Investigate pressure/contact examinations in regard to objects that may have been in
contact with each other for an extended time. Research several cases of this type and
set these out in your notes.

(Use Training Assignment #61 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

17. Discuss and demonstrate the making of casts of toolmarks. Also, discuss the
potential of such casts and of photographs alone in making toolmarks identifications.

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

18. Conduct examinations of toolmark evidence submitted from crime scenes that are part
of an ongoing investigation. Conduct all examinations as if it were a real case and
prepare the proper notes and reports that might be required.

(Use Practical Exercises #20, 27, and 28 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

REFERENCE MATERIALS

TOOLMARK EXAMINATIONS, COMPARISONS AND IDENTIFICATIONS

The following reference materials serve several purposes:

• to provide a wider range of additional resources should you have a particular interest in a
given topic.
• to provide reference materials for your future professional use.
• to allow you to gain additional depth in particular subject areas.
Should you encounter other references in this category, you are encouraged to make additional notes
about them at the end of this listing.

Criteria for the Identification of Toolmarks

(Including Those Found on Fired Ammunition Components)

AFTE Peer Group on Certification, “Firearms and Tool Mark Identification: A Forensic Science Discipline,”
AFTE Journal, 1980; 12(3):12-15.
FATM Training Manual Page 124 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Association of Firearm and Tool Mark Examiners, “Theory of Identification,” AFTE Glossary, AFTE
website..

Belveal, D.N., “Firearms Identification Based Upon Bullet Comparisons: Expertise or Guesswork,”
California Attorneys for Criminal Justice Forum, Vol. 4, No. 2, Mar.-Apr. 1977, p. 17.

Biasotti, A.A., “Bullet Comparisons - A Study of Fired Bullets Statistically Analyzed,” unpublished Master’s
thesis, School of Criminology, University of California, Berkeley, 1955, 97 pages.

---. “A Statistical Study of the Individual Characteristics of Fired Bullets,” Journal of Forensic Sciences,
Vol. 4, No. 1, Jan. 1959, pp. 34-50.

---. “The Principles of Evidence Evaluation as Applied to Firearms and Tool Mark Identification,” Journal of
Forensic Sciences, Vol. 9, No. 4, Oct. 1964, pp. 428-433.

---. “Firearms and Toolmark Identification: A Forensic Science Discipline, AFTE Journal, 1980; 12(3):12.

---. “Characteristics in Firearms and Toolmark Identification,” AFTE Journal, 1980; 12(4):81.

---. “Rifling Methods - A Review and Assessment of the Individual Characteristics Produced,” AFTE
Journal, 1981; 13(3):34.

---. “Methods Applied to the Comparison of Class and Individual Characteristics in Firearms and Toolmark
Identification,” AFTE Journal, 1989; 21(2):260-263.

Biasotti, A.A., and Murdock, J.E., “Criteria for Identification or State of the Art of Firearms and Toolmark
Identification,” AFTE Journal, 1984; 16(4):16-22.

---. “Firearms and Toolmark Identification,” Modern Scientific Evidence: The Law and Science of Expert
Testimony, Vol. 2, West Publishing, St. Paul, MN, 1997, pp. 124-155.

Blackwell, R., and Framan, E., “Automated Firearms Identification System (AFIDS): Phase I, AFTE
Journal, 1980; 12(4):11-37.

Bonfanti, M., and DeKinder, J., “The Influence of Manufacturing Processes on the Identification of Bullets
and Cartridge Cases - A Review of the Literature,” Science and Justice, Vol. 39, No. 1, 1999, pp. 3-10.

Boyd, K.T., “Use of Probability Theory in Making Identifications Through Common Characteristics,” paper
presented at AFTE meeting in Washington, D.C., Feb. 1974.

Brackett, J., “A Study of Idealized Striated Marks and Their Comparison Using Models,” Journal of the
Forensic Science Society, Vol. 10, No. 1, 1970, pp. 27-56.

Brown, C., and Bryant, W., “Consecutively Rifled Gun Barrels Present in Most Crime Labs,” AFTE
Journal, 1995, 27(3):254-258.

Brundage, D.J., “The Identification of Consecutively Rifled Gun Barrels,” AFTE Journal, 1998; 30(3):438.

Burd, D.Q., and Gilmore, A., “Individual and Class Characteristics of Tools,” Journal of Forensic Sciences,
Vol. 13, No. 3, Jul. 1968, pp. 390-396.

FATM Training Manual Page 125 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Burd, D.Q., and Greene, R.S., “Tool Mark Comparisons in Criminal Investigations,” Journal of Criminal
Law, Criminology and Police Science, Vol. 39, 1948, pp. 379-391.

---. “Tool Mark Examination Techniques,” Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 2, 1957, pp. 297-310.

Burd, D.Q., and Kirk, P.L., “Toolmarks: Factors Involved in Their Comparison and Use as Evidence,”
Journal of Police Science, Vol. 32, No. 6, 1942, pp. 679-686.

Butcher, S., and Pugh, D., “A Study of Marks Made by Bolt Cutters,” Journal of the Forensic Science
Society, Vol. 15, No. 2, Apr. 1975, pp. 115-126.

Cassidy, F.H., “Examination of Toolmarks from Sequentially Manufactured Tongue and Groove Pliers,”
Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 25, No. 4, Oct. 1980, pp. 796-809.

Churchman, J., “The Reproduction of Characteristics in Signatures of Cooey Rifles,” RCMP Gazette, Vol.
11, No. 5, May 1949, pp. 133-140.

Collins, J., “The Language of Toolmarks,” AFTE Journal, 1998; 30(1):82.

---. “Wire Nails and Their Forensic Significance,” AFTE Journal, 1998; 30(4):614.

Conrad, E.C., “The Expert and Legal Certainty,” Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 9, No. 4, Oct. 1964,
pp. 445-455.

DeKinder, J., Prevot, P., Perlot, M., and Nys, B., “Surface Topology of Bullet Striations: An Innovative
Technique,” AFTE Journal, 1998; 30(2):294.

Deschenes, M., et al., “Statistics and Toolmark Comparisons,” AFTE Journal, 1995; 27(2):140-141.

Deinet, W., “Studies of Models of Striated Marks Generated by Random Processes,” Journal of Forensic
Sciences, Vol. 26, No. 1, Jan. 1981, pp. 35-50.

Dougherty, P.M., “Report on Two Early United States Firearms Identification Cases,” Journal of Forensic
Sciences, Vol. 14, No. 4, Oct. 1969, pp. 453-459.

Flynn, E.M., “Toolmark Identification,” Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 2, Jan. 1957, pp. 95-106.

Fox, R.J., “The Myth of Bullet Matching,” Forensic Science, Civil and Criminal Symposium conducted in
Eugene, Oregon, November 1987.

Freeman, R., “Consecutively Rifled Polygon Barrels,” AFTE Journal, 1978; 10(2):40-42.

Goddard, C.H., “Scientific Identification of Firearms and Bullets,” AFTE Journal, 1979; 11(4):97.

Greene, R.S., and Burd, D.Q., “Special Techniques Useful in Tool Mark Comparisons,” Journal of
Criminal Law, Criminology and Police Science, Vol. 41, 1950, pp. 523-527.

Grzybowski, R.A., Summary of Proficiency Testing Results in the Firearms and Toolmark Field extracted
from Peterson, J.L., and Markham, P.N., “Crime Laboratory Proficiency Testing Results, 1970-1991, II:
Resolving Questions of Common Origin,” Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 40, No. 6, Nov. 1995, pp.
1009-1029.

FATM Training Manual Page 126 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Gunther, C.O., “Markings on Bullets and Shells Fired from Small Arms,” Mechanical Engineering, May
1932, pp. 341-345.

Hall, E., “Bullet Markings from Consecutively Rifled Shilen DGA Barrels,” AFTE Journal, 1983; 15(1):33-
47.

Hall, J., “Consecutive Cuts by Bolt Cutters and Their Effect on Identification,” AFTE Journal, 1992;
24(3):260-272.

Hornsby, B., “MCC Bolt Cutters,” AFTE Journal, 1989; 21(3):508.

Kingston, C.R. “The Law of Probabilities and the Credibility of Witnesses and Evidence,” Journal of
Forensic Sciences, Vol. 15, No. 1, Jan. 1970, pp. 18-27.

Kirby, S.J., “Comparison of 900 Consecutively Fired Bullets and Cartridge Cases from a 455 Caliber S&W
Revolver,” AFTE Journal, 1983; 15(3):113-126.

Kirk, P.L., and Kingston, C.R., “Evidence Evaluation and Problems in General Criminalistics,” Journal of
Forensic Sciences, Vol. 9, No. 4, Oct. 1964, pp. 434-444.

Kockel, R., “About the Appearance of Clues or Marks from Knife Blades,” AFTE Journal, 1980; 12(3):16.

Kreiser, J., “Identification of Cast Bullets and Their Molds,” AFTE Journal, 1985; 17(3):88-90.

Lardizibal, P., “Cartridge Case Study of the Heckler and Koch USP,” AFTE Journal, 1995; 27(1):49-51.

Lopez, L., “Striae Matching and Angle of Incident,” AFTE Journal, 1998; 30(2):271.

Lutz, M.C., “Consecutive Revolver Barrels,” AFTE Newsletter, Aug. 1970, pp. 24-28.

Masson, J.J., “Confidence Level Variations in Firearms: Identifications Through Computerized

Technology,” AFTE Journal, 1997; 29(1):42-44.

Matty, W., “Comparison of Three Individual Barrels Produced from One Button Rifled Barrel Blank” AFTE
Journal, 1985; 17(3):64-69.

---. “Raven 25 Automatic Pistol Breech Face Toolmarks,” AFTE Journal, 1984; 16(3):57.

Matty, W., and Johnson, T., “Comparison of Manufacturing Marks on Smith & Wesson Firing Pins,” AFTE
Journal, 1984; 16(3):51.

May, L.S., “The Identification of Knives, Tools and Instruments, A Positive Science,” American Journal of
Police Science, Vol. 24, No. 6, 1936, p. 246.

Meyers, C.R., “Objective vs. Subjective Boondoggle,” AFTE Journal, 1987; 19(1):24-30.

Miller, J., “Cut Nail Manufacturing and Tool Mark Identification,” AFTE Journal, 1998; 30(3):492.

---. “Reproducibility of Impressed and Striated Toolmarks: 4d Cut Flooring Nails,” AFTE Journal, 1998;
30(4):631.

Miller, J., and McLean, M., “Criteria for Identification of Toolmarks,” AFTE Journal, 1998; 30(1):15-61.

FATM Training Manual Page 127 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Murdock, J.E., “Effect of Crowning on Gun Barrel Individuality,” AFTE Journal, 1970; 2(3):12.

---. “Individuality of Toolmarks Produced by Desk Staplers,” AFTE Journal, 1974; 6(5-6):23.

---. “A General Discussion of Gun Barrel Individuality and an Empirical Assessment of the Individuality of
Consecutively Button Rifled .22 Caliber Rifle Barrels,” AFTE Journal, 1981; 13(3):84-111.

---. “Some Suggested Court Questions to Test Criteria for Identification Qualifications,” AFTE Journal,
1992; 24(1):69-75.

Nichols, R.G., “Firearm and Toolmark Identification Criteria: A Review of the Literature,” Journal of
Forensic Sciences, Vol. 42, No. 3, 1997, pp. 466-474.

Ogihara, Y., Kubota, M., Sanada, M., Fukuda, K., Uchiyama, T., and Hamby, J.E., “Comparison of 5000
Consecutively Fired Bullets and Cartridge Cases from a 45 Caliber M1911A1 Pistol,” AFTE Journal, 1983;
15(3):127-140.

Reitz, J., “An Unusual Toolmark Identification Case,” AFTE Journal, 1975; 7(3):40-43.

Rowe, W.F., “Statistics in Forensic Ballistics,” The Use of Statistics in Forensic Science, C.G.G. Aitken
and D.A. Stoney, Elllis Hammond, 1991.

Serhant, J.E., “The Admissibility of Ballistics in Evidence,” American Journal of Police Science, May-Jun.
1930.

Skolrood, R., “Comparison of Bullets Fired from Consecutively Rifled Cooey Rifles,” Canadian Society of
Forensic Science Journal, Vol. 8, No. 2, 1975, pp. 49-52.

Springer, E., “Toolmark Examinations - A Review of Its Development in the Literature,” Journal of
Forensic Sciences, Vol. 40, No. 6, Nov. 1955, pp. 964-968.

Stoney, D.A., “What Ever Made Us Think We Could Individualize Using Statistics,” Journal of the Forensic
Science Society, Vol. 31, No. 2, 1991, pp. 197-199.

Taroni, F., Champod, C., and Margot, P., “Statistics, A Future in Toolmarks Comparisons?,” AFTE
Journal, 1996:28(4):222-232.

“Theory of Identification, Range of Striae Comparison Reports and Modified Glossary Definitions - An
AFTE Criteria for Identification Committee Report,” AFTE Journal, 1992, 24(3):336-340.

Thomas, F., “Comments on the Discovery of Striation Matching and on Early Contributions to Forensic
Firearms Identification,” Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 12, No. 1, Jan. 1967, pp. 1-7.

Thompson, E., “Individual Characteristics Criteria,” AFTE Journal, 1998; 30(2):276.

---. “Phoenix Arms (Raven) Breech Face Toolmarks,” AFTE Journal, 1994; 26(2):134-135.

---. “False Breech Face ID’s,” AFTE Journal, 1996; 28(2):95-96.

FATM Training Manual Page 128 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Thornton, J.I., “The General Assumptions and Rationale of Forensic Identification,” Chapter 20, Modern
Scientific Evidence: The Law and Science of Expert Testimony, (D.L. Faigman, D.H. Kaye, M.J. Saks and
J. Sanders, eds., 1997), Vol. 2, pp. 1-49.

---. “The Validity of Firearms Evidence,” California Attorneys for Criminal Justice Forum, Vol. 5, No. 4,
Aug. 1978, p. 15.

---. “The Validity of Firearms Evidence,” AFTE Journal, 1979, 11(2):16.

Tuira, Y.J., “Tire Stabbing with Consecutively Manufactured Knives,” AFTE Journal, 1982; 14(1):50-52.

Tulleners, F., Hamiel, J., and Giusto, M., “Striae Reproducibility on Sectional Cuts of Thompson
th
Contender Barrel,” paper presented at the 28 AFTE Training Seminar, Annapolis, MD, July 1997.

Uchiyama, T., “Similiarity Among Breech Face Marks Fired from Guns with Close Serial Numbers,” AFTE
Journal, 1986; 18(3):15.

---. “Change of Rifling Marks of the Bullets Fired from a Revolver,” AFTE Journal, 1986; 18(4):40.

---. “A Criterion for Land Mark Identification,” AFTE Journal, 1988; 20(3):236-251.

---. “A Criterion for Land Mark Identification Using Rare Marks,” AFTE Journal, 1988; 20(3):260-268.

---. “Probability of Corresponding Striae in Toolmarks,” AFTE Journal, 1992; 24(3):273-290.

Uchiyama, T., Igarashi, N., and Nagai, M., “Frequency of Occurrence of Individual Characteristics of
Firearms on Fired Bullets,” AFTE Journal, 1988; 20(4):376-390.

Uchiyama, T., and Nota, O., “Non-Firing Markings on Primer of Remington Cartridges,” AFTE Journal,
1986; 18(4):78.

Uchiyama, T., and Tokano, K., “Non-Firing Markings on Shotshell Cases and Primers,” AFTE Journal,
1988; 20(1):46.

Vandiver, J., “New Screwdrivers Production and Identification,” AFTE Journal, 1976; 8(1):29-52.

Watson, D., “The Identification of Toolmarks Produced from Consecutively Manufactured Knife Blades in
Soft Plastics,” AFTE Journal, 1978; 10(3):43-45.

The Daubert Decision and Toolmarks/Firearms Identification

Andersen, G.R., “Round Pegs in Square Holes: The Aftermath of Daubert,” South Carolina Trial Lawyers
Association Bulletin, Fall, 1996, pp. 9-12.

Biasotti, A.A., and Murdock, J.E, “Firearms and Toolmark Identification: Scientific Status,” Chapter 23,
Section 23-210. Modern Scientific Evidence: The Law and Science of Expert Testimony (D.L. Faigman,
D.H. Kaye, M.J. Saks, and J. Sanders eds., West Publishing Co., 1997), Vol. 2, pp. 131-151.

Bohan, T.L., and Heels, E.J., “The Case Against Daubert: The New Scientific Standard’ and the
Standards of the Several States,” Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 40, No. 6, Nov. 1995, pp. 1030-
1044.

FATM Training Manual Page 129 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Faigman, D.L., Kaye, D.H., Saks, M.J., and Sanders, J., Modern Scientific Evidence: Firearms and
Toolmark Identification: Legal Issues, Section 23-1.0, West Publishing Co., 1997, Vol. 2, pp. 124-131.

Glossary of the Association of Firearms and Tool Mark Examiners (AFTE) AFTE Standardization
Committee, published by Available Business Group, Chicago, IL, AFTE website.

Grzybowski, R.A., and Murdock, J.E., “Firearm and Toolmark Examiners - Meeting the Daubert
Challenge,” AFTE Journal, 1998; 30(1):3-14.

Melson, G.R., “Qualifying as An Expert in State Court: The Impact of Daubert,” paper presented at the
Fourth Annual Conference for Medical and Forensic Experts, Dec. 6-7, 1997, Newport Beach, CA.

Peterson, J.L., and Markham, P., “Crime Laboratory Proficiency Testing Results 1978-1991, II: Resolving
Questions of Common Origin,” Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 40, No. 6, Nov. 1995, pp. 1009-1029.

Relman, A.S., and Angell, M., “How Good is Peer Review?”, (an editorial), The New England Journal of
Medicine, Vol. 321, No. 12, September 21, 1989, pp. 827-829.

Ruchlis, H., Discovering Scientific Method, Harper and Row Publishers, New York, 1963.

Saks, M.J., “Implications of the Daubert Test for Forensic Identification Science,” Shepard’s Expert and
Scientific Evidence, Vol. 1, No. 3, Winter, 1994, pp. 427-434.

Thornton, J.I., “Courts of Law v. Courts of Science: A Forensic Scientist’s Reaction to Daubert,”
Shepard’s Expert and Scientific Evidence, Vol. 1, No. 3, Winter, 1994, pp. 475-485.

Technical Protocols, Case Work Notes and Reports

California Department of Justice Firearms/Toolmark Identification Training Syllabus: Professionalism,

AFTE Journal, 1991; 23(2):716-718 (toolmark examination protocol).

---. AFTE Journal, 1991; 23(1):559-567 (case notes).

---. AFTE Journal, 1991; 23(2):719-726 (report writing)

Technical Examination Subtopics

Ammunition Manufacturing Processes

Crum, R.A., “Manufacturing Tool Mark Identification on the Base of Jacketed Bullets,” Crime Laboratory
Digest, Vol. 12, No. 2, Apr. 1985, pp. 29-31.

Kellet, P.M., “The Identification of a Tool Mark on the Interior of a Semi-Jacketed Bullet,” AFTE Journal,
1984; 16(3):22.

---. “The Comparison and Identification of Toolmarks on the Base of Remington Semi-Jacketed Bullets,”
AFTE Journal, 1984; 16(3):81-83.

---. “The Comparison of Mold Marks on Cast Bullets and Punch Marks in Copper Gas Checks,” AFTE
Journal, 1984; 16(3):104-106.

FATM Training Manual Page 130 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Matty, W., “The Formation and Persistence of Toolmarks in the Cartridge Case Head Forming Process,”
AFTE Journal, 1983; 15(1):108-113.

Nagai, M., and Uchiyama, T., “Identification of a Tool Mark on the Jacket of a Bullet," AFTE Journal,
1989; 21(1):80.

Quirk, T.W., “Toolmarks on Primers of ‘Rio’ Brand Ammunition,” AFTE Journal, 1987; 19(3):309-310.

Skolrood, R.W., “Do Not Disregard Mould Markings,” AFTE Journal, 1975; 7(1):73-74.

Swim, J.D., “Firearms Examiners Beware,” AFTE Journal, 1979; 11(1):33-34.

Automotive Ignitions

Arrowood, M.C., “Identification of a Metal Screw and Auto Ignition Cylinder,” AFTE Journal, 1983;
15(2):97.

Garland, P., “Identification of Dent Puller,” AFTE Journal, 1978; 10(3):38-40.

Paholke, A.R., “New Tool for Pulling Ignition Locks,” AFTE Journal, 1975; 7(3):17-20.

---. “Automobile Ignition Lock Puller,” AFTE Newsletter, Aug. 1969, p. 5.

Townshend, D.G., “Identification of Fracture Marks,” AFTE Journal, 1976; 8(2):74-75.

Beverage Tabs/Tops

Bridgemon, R.R., “The Individualization of Beverage Can Pull-Tabs,” AFTE Journal, 1984; 16(3):99-101.

Tenorio, F., “Identification of a ‘Pop-Top’ Tab and Beer Can,” AFTE Journal, 1983; 15(2):56-57.

White, R., “An Unusual Tool Mark Case,” AFTE Journal, 1975; 7(1):19.

Boltcutters

Butcher, S.J., and Pugh, P.D., “A Study of Marks Made by Bolt Cutters,” Journal of the Forensic Science
Society, Vol. 15, No. 2, Apr. 1975, pp. 115-126.

Cassidy, F., “An Unusual Tool Mark from a Bolt Cutter,” AFTE Journal, 1994; 26(1):21-22.

Hall, J., “Consecutive Cuts by Bolt Cutters and Their Effect on Identification,” AFTE Journal, 1992;
24(3):260-272.

Komar, S.M., and Scala, G.E., “Examiner Beware - New Bolt Cutter Blades, Class or Individual,” AFTE
Journal, 1993; 25(4):298-300.

Bone and Cartilage

Bonte, W., “Toolmarks in Bone and Cartilage, Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 20, No. 2, Apr. 1975, pp.
315-325.

Ernest, R.N., “Toolmarks in Cartilage Revisited,” AFTE Journal, 1991; 23(4):958-959.

FATM Training Manual Page 131 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Galan, J.I., “Identification of a Knife Wound in Bone,” AFTE Journal, 1986; 18(4):72-75.

Kelty, J.J., “Court Presentation of Toolmarks Identified in Stab Wounds,” AFTE Journal, 1985; 17(2):66.

Mikko, D., and Hornsby, B., “On the Cutting Edge II - An Identification Involving a Knife,” AFTE Journal,
1995; 27(4):293.

Burglary Tools

Molnar, S., “Burglar Tools,” AFTE Newsletter, 1970, p. 42.

Cable and Wire

Biasotti, A.A., “A Comparison of Hatchet Cuts on Wire,” Journal of Criminal Law, Criminology and Police
Science, Vol. 47, 1956, pp. 497-499.

Cilwa, R.B., and Townshend, D.G., “Tool Mark Identification, Knife to Cut Wire,” AFTE Journal, 1976;
8(4):66-67.

Dillon, D.J., “Comparisons of Extrusion Striae to Individualize Evidence,” AFTE Journal, 1976; 8(2):69-70.

Jordan, T., “Individual Characteristics on Copper Insulated Wire,” AFTE Journal, 1982; 14(1):53-56.

Kenny, R.L., “Identification of Insulating Material Surrounding Wires,” AFTE Journal, 1978; 10(2):64.

Molnar. S., “Identification by Extrusion Marks on Wire,” AFTE Newsletter, Jan. 1970, p. 22.

Ogle, R.R., and Mitosinka, G.T., “The Identification of Cut Multistranded Wires,” Journal of Forensic
Sciences, Vol. 19, No. 4, Oct. 1974, pp. 865-867.

Schubert, K.D., “Toolmarks Link Bomb Components with Suspects,” AFTE Journal, 1985; 17(2):122-123.

Williams, D.L., “Comparison of Cut Telephone Cables,” AFTE Journal, 1979; 11(2):39-41.

Wilson, C.M., “The Comparison and Identification of Wire in a Coal Mine Bombing Case,” Journal of
Criminal Law, Criminology and Police Science, Vol. 2, 1935-1936, pp. 873-902.

Casting Materials and Techniques

Barber, D.C., and Cassidy, F.H., “A New Dimension with ‘Mikrosil’ Casting Material,” AFTE Journal, 1987;
19(3):328-329.

Biasotti, A.A., “Plastic Replicas in Firearms and Tool Mark Identifications,” Journal of Criminal Law,
Criminology and Police Science, Vol. 47, 1956, pp. 110-117.

Brundage, D., “Dip-Pak Thermo-Plastic,” AFTE Journal, 1994; 26(4):307.

Carlson, C.J., “Use of Coe-Flex for Test Toolmarks,” AFTE Journal, 1983; 15(2):87.

Frazier, R.A., “Toolmark Test Material,” AFTE Journal, 1975; 7(1):25.

FATM Training Manual Page 132 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Goldman, G.L., “Coloring Casting Materials - An Alternative to Smoking or Dusting Casts for Improved
Visibility,” AFTE Journal, 1981; 13(3):112-115.

Klees, Greg, “Casting Material Update on Toolmark Replication,” AFTE Journal, 1988; 20(4):463.

McGraw, A.C., “Casting, Another Means of Identification,” Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 29, No. 4,
Oct. 1984, pp. 1212-1222.

Molnar, S., “Wax Replicas of Tool Marks,” AFTE Newsletter, Jan. 1970, p. 19.

Murdock, J.E., “Silicone Rubber Replicas of Tool Marks,” AFTE Journal, 1970; 2(3):22-23.

Ojena, S.M., “A New Silicone Rubber Casting Material Designed for Forensic Science Application,”
Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 29, No. 1, Jan. 1984, pp. 317-321.

Rees, P.O., and Cundy, K.R., “A Method for the Comparison of Tool Marks and Other Surface
Irregularities,” Journal of the Forensic Science Society, Vol. 9, 1969, pp. 153-155.

Thompson, R.W., “Sulfur Casting,” AFTE Journal, 1980; 12(2):15.

Townshend, D.G., “Examination of Tree Stumps,” AFTE Journal, 1981; 13(4):32-36.

Wilson, R.J., “Reproduced Impressed Markings for Comparison by Casting with Mikrosil,” AFTE Journal,
1994; 26(3):181-184.

Dies

Van Dijk, T.M., “Steel Marking Stamps - Their Individuality at the Time of Manufacture,” Journal of the
Forensic Science Society, Vol. 25, No. 4, Jul./Aug. 1985, pp. 243-253.

Watson, D.J., “Manufacturing Process of Crimping Dies and the Examination of Class versus Individual
Characteristics Between Them,” AFTE Journal, 1978; 10(3):19-21.

Drills/Lathes

Cilwa, R.B., and Townshend, D.G., “Identification of Lathe Shavings,” AFTE Journal, 1978; 10(1):23.

McNickle, J., “Sharpening Twist Drills,” AFTE Journal, 1988; 20(1):75-78.

Reitz, J.A., “An Unusual Tool Mark Identification Case,” AFTE Journal, 1975; 7(3):40-43.

Firearms Components

Bishop, E.E., “Tool Mark Identification on a Black Powder Revolver,” AFTE Journal, 1995; 27(4):310-313.

Davis, J.E., “Test Tool Marks from Weapon Parts May Facilitate Comparisons,” AFTE Journal, 1972;
4(3):28.

Dragan, P., “Watch the Nose,” AFTE Journal, 1974; 6(3):13-15.

La Voy, T.A., “Firearm/Tool Mark Identification on a Cap and Ball Revolver,” AFTE Journal, 1977; 9(1):66-
68.
FATM Training Manual Page 133 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Matty, W., “Raven .25 Auto Pistol Breech Face Tool Marks,” AFTE Journal, 1984; 16(3):57-60.

Matty, W., and Johnson, T., “A Comparison of Manufacturing Marks on Smith and Wesson Firing Pins,”
AFTE Journal, 1984; 16(3):51-56.

Thompson, E., “Phoenix Arms (Raven) Breech Face Toolmarks,” AFTE Journal, 1994; 26(2):134-135.

Verbeke, D.J., “Tool Mark on a Bullet,” AFTE Journal, 1975; 7(2):86-90.

General Toolmark References

Arrowood, M.C., “Back to Basics,” AFTE Journal, 1993; 25(3):197-198.

Burghardt, H.D., Machine Tool Operation, Vol. I & II, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., NY, 1936.

Cochrane, D.W., “Class Characteristics of Cutting Tools and Surface Designation,” AFTE Journal, 1985;
17(3):73-82.

Cook, C.W., A Practical Guide to the Basis of Physical Evidence, Chapter 16, Charles C. Thomas, IL,
1984.

---. “The Firearms/Tool Mark Investigator: An Excursion into the Realm of the Weird and Wonderful,”
AFTE Journal, 1979; 11(3):35-43.

Davis, J.E., An Introduction to Toolmarks, Firearms and the Striagraph, Charles C. Thomas, IL, 1958, pp.
3-67.

FBI Laboratory, Handbook of Forensic Science, toolmark identification subsection, (current edition).

“FBI Makes Tool Mark Examinations,” FBI Law Enforcement Bulletin, Sep. 1950, pp. 1-6.

Gibson, W.M., “AFTE Toolmark Article Index,” AFTE Journal, 1996; 28(4):266-286.

Herb, C.O., Machine Tools at Work, Vol. I-VII, The Industrial Press, NY, 1942.
nd
Kirk, P.L., “Tool Marks,” in Crime Investigation, 2 edition, J. I. Thornton (ed.), University of California,
Berkeley, CA, 1974.

Paholke, A.R., “The Identification of Class Characteristics of Tool Marks: The Evidence Receipt Activity
Report,” AFTE Journal, 1978; 10(2):59-62.

---. “A Change in Technique,” AFTE Journal, 1971; 3(5):14.

---. “Tool Mark, Two Words,” AFTE Newsletter, Aug, 1969, p. 18.
th
Soderman, H., and O’Connell, J.J., “Traces of Tools,” in Modern Criminal Investigation, 5 edition, Funk &
Wagnalls, NY, 1962.

Versailles, J., “Tool Marks: Striated Versus Impressed,” AFTE Journal, 1971; 3(5):13.

FATM Training Manual Page 134 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Impressions

Arrowood, M.C., and Berglund, J., “A Tool Mark Impression in a Unique Shooting Case,” AFTE Journal,
1976; 8(2):83 (firearm hammer).

Johnson, A.P., “Hammer Spur Impressions, Physical Evidence in Homicides,” FBI Law Enforcement
Bulletin, Sep. 1983, pp. 11-14.

Molnar, S., “Unusual Tool Mark Impression Identification,” AFTE Journal, 1970; 2(3):32-33.

Sherlock, W.E., “Ear Impression Case,” AFTE Journal, 1991; 23(3):850-852.

Knives

Cilwa, R.B., and Townshend, D.G., “Tool Mark Identification, Knife to Cut Wire,” AFTE Journal, 1976;
8(4):66-67.

Edwards, R.L., and Kelley, M.I., “The Straight Line (Springer) Knife,” AFTE Journal, 1993; 25(1):7-10.

Fears, J.W., “An Expert’s Guide to Knives, Part II,” Shooting Times, Aug. 1987, pp. 48-51.

Garcia, C.H., “Are ‘Knife-Prints’ Reliable Evidence: An Analysis of Tool Mark Evidence and Ramirez v.
State,” AFTE Journal, 1993; 25(4):266-280.

Hardings, L.F., “A Glossary of Knife Terminology,” AFTE Journal, 1982; 14(3):34-35.

Hollis, D., “The Knife, Man’s Oldest/Modern Tool,” Guns and Ammo, May 1986, pp. 56-72.

---. “Pocketknives, An American Tradition,” Guns and Ammo, Aug. 1986, pp. 53-97.

Kockel, R., “About the Appearance of Clues or Marks from Knife Blades,” AFTE Journal, 1980; 12(3):16-
28.

Love, E., “Knives and Knife Terminology,” AFTE Journal, 1989; 21(3):490-495.

Purtell, D.J., “The Identification of Paper Cutting Knives and Paper Cutters,” Journal of Criminal Law,
Criminology and Police Science, Vol. 44, 1953, pp. 262-268.

Watson, D.J., “The Identification of Tool Marks Produced from Consecutively Manufactured Knife Blades
in Soft Plastic,” AFTE Journal, 1978; 10(3):43-45.

Lighting Techniques

Heard, B.J., “A New Approach to the Examination of Stria on Transparent and Translucent Materials,”
AFTE Journal, 1986, 18(1):25-34.

Peterson, J.L., “Utilizing the Laser for Comparing Tool Striations,” Journal of the Forensic Science
Society, Vol. 14, No. 1, Jan. 1974, pp. 57-62.

Winkel, N., “A New Method of Comparative Investigation of Trace Replicas,” Bulletin for the Forensic
Laboratory, No. 2, Mar. 1979, pp. 8-10.

FATM Training Manual Page 135 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Ziegler, P.A., “Examination Techniques: The Beam Splitter and Reverse Lighting,” AFTE Journal, 1983;
15(2):37-41.

Locks and Keys

Molnar, S., “Bobby Pins . . . Lock Picking,” AFTE Newsletter, Oct. 1969, p. 28.

Paholke, A.R., “What a Toolmark Examiner Should Know About Locks (A Guide for the Firearms
Examiner),” AFTE Journal, 1989; 21(2):147-150.

---. “Surreptitious Entry,” AFTE Newsletter, Oct. 1969, p. 25.

---. “Lock Picking,” AFTE Newsletter, Dec. 1969, p. 13.

---. “Terminology of Locks,” AFTE Newsletter, Jan. 1970, p. 4.

---. “Notes on Lock Decoder and Picking,” AFTE Newsletter, Oct. 1970, p. 28.

---. “Locksmith Terminology,” AFTE Newsletter, Feb. 1971, p. 30.

---. “Rim Cylinder,” AFTE Newsletter, Feb. 1971, p. 31.

---. “Lock Nomenclature,” AFTE Newsletter, Aug. 1971, p. 16.

---. “Pen . . . A Lock Picking Device,” AFTE Newsletter, Aug. 1971, p. 24.

---. “A Key,” AFTE Newsletter, Feb. 1972, p. 14.

---. “A New Lock with Magnetic Key,” AFTE Newsletter, Aug. 1972, p. 21.

---. “A Twist on Unauthorized Entry,” AFTE Newsletter, Feb. 1973, p. 28.

---. “Pick Proof Locks,” AFTE Journal, 1975; 7(2):96-97.

Plumtree, W.G., “The Examination of Disc and Pin Tumbler Locks for Tool Marks Made by Lock Picks,”
Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 20, No. 4, Oct. 1975, pp. 656-667.

---. “Examination Techniques for Picked Locks,” AFTE Journal, 1982; 14(4):23-24.

Sherlock, W.E., and Paholke, A.R., “Comparison of Microscopic Striae on Keys,” AFTE Journal, 1982;
14(4):20-21.

Striupaitis, P.P., “Compression Spring Marks on Lock Pins,” AFTE Journal, 1982; 14(4):22.

Townshend, D.G., “The Lock Popper,” AFTE Journal, 1975; 7(3):61-62.

“Physical Security Devices, Part II,” The Chicago Police Department Training Bulletin, Vol. 15, No. 11,
June 24, 1974.

“Physical Security Devices, Part III,” The Chicago Police Department Training Bulletin, Vol. 15, No. 12,
July 8, 1974.

FATM Training Manual Page 136 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Miscellaneous Examination Subtopics

Arrowood, M.C., “A Tool Mark Identification with a Pop Rivet Gun,” AFTE Journal, 1987; 19(3):305.

Bailey, T., “What’s to Know About Files,” AFTE Journal, 1986; 18(4):105-110.

Bishop, E.E., “Tool Mark Identification on Nails,” AFTE Journal, 1995; 27(4):306-309.

Boudreau, A.J., “Significant Baling Wire Characteristics,” AFTE Journal, 1975; 7(2):99-103.

Good, R.G., “Tool Mark Identification in a Gambling Case: Identification of Illegally Manufactured Slugs,”
AFTE Journal, 1979; 11(3):49-50.

Hamby, J.E., “Matching of Tool Marks Made in Rubber,” AFTE Newsletter, Jun. 1972, p. 18.

Harden, L.R., “Tool Marks on a Rape Case,” AFTE Journal, 1979; 11(1):25.

Lambert, R.R., “A Tool Mark Case,” AFTE Newsletter, Aug. 1970, p. 34 (lock puller).

Lane, P., “Toolmarks on Battery Terminals,” AFTE Journal, 1988; 20(2):151-153.

Larsen, D., “Murder -- Buttons and Toolmarks,” AFTE Newsletter, Dec. 1971, p. 15.

Mason, J.J., and Grose, P., “The Individuality of Toolmarks Produced by a Label Maker Used to Write
Extortion Notes,” Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 32, No. 1, Jan. 1987, pp. 137-147.

Meyers, C., “Tool Marks on Paper Matches,” AFTE Journal, 1977; 9(2):131.

Molnar, S., “Cutting Torch Marks,” AFTE Newsletter, Aug. 1970, p. 32.

Piper, A.G., “The Matching of Secateurs to a Harvested Marijuana Crop - A Case Report,” Journal of the
Forensic Science Society, Vol. 25, No. 4, Jul./Aug. 1985, pp. 281-283.

Roberts, J.L., “Razor Blade Manufacturing Information,” AFTE Journal, 1976; 8(1):80-84.

Seestrom, J.L., and Lansing, J.F., “A Spot Identification,” AFTE Journal, 1975; 7(2):66-67.

Serpa, J., “Identification of Manufacturing Marks on Nylon Cable Ties,” AFTE Journal, 1994; 26(3):187-
192.

Vaughan, R.T., and Gilman, P.L., “An Identification With a Puncture Type Tool,” AFTE Journal, 1981;
13(4):78.

Versailles, J., “Toolmarks on Painted Metal,” AFTE Journal, 1973; 5(3):22.

Warren, G., “Glass Cutter Identification,” AFTE Journal, 1991; 23(4):925-927.

Photographic Techniques

Baney, R.E., “An Examination of Consecutive Scratch Marks on Kodak Instant Print Film,” AFTE Journal,
1981; 13(4):112-113.

FATM Training Manual Page 137 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Biasotti, A.A., “Photography and Illumination: Some Critical Factors, AFTE Journal, 1979; 11(4):60.

Catterick, T., and Taylor, M., “A Photometric Method for the Quantitative Mapping of Parallel Striated
Marks,” Forensic Science International, Vol. 33, 1987, pp. 197-207.

Sanchez, D.W., “Aluminum Oxide Casting, Technique for Comparison and Photography of Toolmarks,”
AFTE Newsletter, August, 1970, p. 20.

Townshend, D., “Photography and Casting Toolmarks,” FBI Law Enforcement Bulletin, Vol. 45, No. 4,
1976, pp. 9-11.

Ward, D.C., and Sibert, R.W., “The Use of Vacuum Evaporation of Metals for Surface Feature
Enhancement,” AFTE Journal, 1986; 18(4):76-77.

Physical/Fracture Matches

Agron, N., and Schecter, B., “Physical Comparisons and Some Characteristics of Electrical Tape,” AFTE
Journal, 1986; 18(3):53-59.

Brundage, D., “Glue Sticks Rapist in Joint,” AFTE Journal, 1975;

7(1):75-77.

Caine, C., and Thompson, E., “Physical Match of an Automobile Roof to the Body Section,” AFTE
Journal, 1989; 21(4):632-634.

Dixon, T.R., “Trace Evidence in a Toolmarks Case,” AFTE Journal, 1975; 7(1):70-71.

Funk, H.J., “Comparison of Paper Matches,” Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 13, No. 1, Jan. 1968, pp.
137-143.

Hathaway, R.A., “Physical Match of a Broken Pool Cue Stick,” AFTE Journal, 1994; 26(3):185-186.

Laux, D.L., “Identification of a Rope by Means of a Physical Match Between the Cut Ends,” Journal of
Forensic Sciences, Vol. 29, No. 4, Oct. 1994, pp. 1246-1248.

Moran, B., “An Interesting Physical Match,” CAC News, Summer 1995, p. 19.

---. “Physical Match/Tool Mark Identification Involving Rubber Shoe Sole Fragments,” AFTE Journal,
1984; 16(3):126-128.

Reich, J.E., “A Comparative Photography Case,” AFTE Journal, 1978; 10(3):23.

Striupaitis, P., “Physical Fit - Public Utility Cable,” AFTE Journal, 1981; 13(4):48-49.

Townshend, D.G., “Identification of Fracture Marks,” AFTE Journal, 1976; 8(2):74-75.

Verbeke, D.J., “An Indirect Identification,” AFTE Journal, 1975; 7(1):18-19.

White, R., and Arrowood, M., “Ultraviolet Fluorescence and a Physical Match,” AFTE Journal, 1975;
7(2):105-106.

FATM Training Manual Page 138 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Plastic Bags and Sheet Materials

Castle, D.A., Gibbins, B., and Hamer, P.S., “Physical Methods for Examining and Comparing Transparent
Plastic Bags and Cling Films,” Journal of the Forensic Science Society, Vol. 34, 1994, pp. 61-68.

Ford, K.N., “The Physical Comparison of Polythene Film,” Journal of the Forensic Science Society, Vol.
15, No. 2, Apr. 1975, pp. 107-113.

Kopec, R.J., and Meyers, C.R., “Comparative Analysis of Trash Bags - A Case History,” AFTE Journal,
1980; 12(1):23-26.

Meyers, C.R., “Toolmarks on a Plastic Bag,” AFTE Journal, 1988; 20(1):55-56.

Stone, R.S., “The Examination and Comparison of Plastic Bags Used in Home Heat Sealers,” AFTE
Journal, 1986; 18(1):21-23.

Pliers

Cassidy, F.H., “Examination of Toolmarks from Sequentially Manufactured Tongue-and-Groove Pliers,”

Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 25, No. 4, Oct. 1980, pp. 796-809.

Reloading

LaVoy, T.A., and Wilmer, J.H., “Tool Markings from a Reloading Die,” AFTE Journal, 1979; 11(2):37-38.

Safes

Dixon, T.R., “Trace Evidence in a Toolmarks Case,” AFTE Journal, 1975; 7(1):70-71.

Murdock, J.E., “Positive Association Through Tool Marks of a Safe Door Hinge Pin with a Damaged
Safe,” AFTE Journal, 1981; 13(3):72-78.

Sherlock, W.E., Fournier, R.J., and McCown, R., “Examination of a ‘Drilled’ Safe,” AFTE Journal, 1988;
20(4):441-442.

Templin, R.H., “A Safe Tool Mark,” AFTE Journal, 1980; 12(2):20.

“Physical Security Devices, Part V,” The Chicago Police Department Training Bulletin, Vol. 16, No. 2, Jun.
23, 1975.

“Physical Security Devices, Part IV,” The Chicago Police Department Training Bulletin, Vol. 16, No. 1,
Jan. 13, 1975.

Saws

Andahl, R.O., “The Examination of Saw Marks,” Journal of the Forensic Science Society, Vol. 18, No. 1,
Jan. 1978, pp. 31-46.

Cayton, J.C., “Hacksaw Blade, Shotgun Barrel, Toolmark Case,” AFTE Journal, 1973; 5(3):7.

Cook, C.W., A Practical Guide to the Basics of Physical Evidence, Charles C. Thomas, IL, 1984, p. 213.

FATM Training Manual Page 139 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Molnar, S., “Saw Cuts and Log Ends,” AFTE Newsletter, Apr. 1970, p. 30.

Paholke, A.R., “Rotary Saw,” AFTE Newsletter, Feb. 1971, p. 27.

Scanning Election Microscopy

Castro, S.M., Galbreath, N.W., Pecko, J.L., Hellman, F.N., and Rowl, W.F., “Use of the Scanning Electron
Microscope to Examine Film Impressions on Typewriter Correction Tape,” Journal of Forensic Sciences,
Vol. 40, 1995, pp. 291-295.

Matricardi, V.R., Clark, M.S., and DeRonja, F.S., “The Comparison of Broken Surfaces: A Scanning
Electron Microscope Study,” Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 20, 1975, pp. 507-523.

Ward, D., and Sibert, R.W., “The Use of Vacuum Evaporation of Metals for Surface Feature
Enhancement,” AFTE Journal, 1986; 18(4):76-77.

Screwdrivers

Burd, D.Q., and Gilmore, A.E., “Individual and Class Characteristics of Tools,” Journal of Forensic
Sciences, Vol. 13, No. 3, Jul. 1968, pp. 390-396.

Cook, C., A Practical Guide to the Basics of Physical Evidence, Charles C. Thomas, IL, 1984, p. 221.

Newquist, A.M., “Screwdriver Identified to Bullet Base,” AFTE Journal, 1978; 10(2):68.

Reich, J.E., “A Comparative Photography Case,” AFTE Journal, 1978; 10(3):23.

Vandiver, J.V., “New Screwdrivers, Production and Identification,” AFTE Journal, 1976; 8(1):29-52.

Speedometers

Stoner, D., and Zeldes, I., “An Aid in Accident Investigation,” FBI Law Enforcement Bulletin, Mar. 1980, p.
11.

Staplers/Staples

Hamby, J.E., “The Comparison of Staples,” AFTE Journal, 1974; 6(5&6):16-17.

Hofmeister, A.G., “Examination of Stapler Toolmarks,” AFTE Journal, 1981; 13(4):76.

Murdock, J.E., “The Individuality of Tool Marks Produced by Desk Staplers,” 1974; 6(5&6):23-39.

Test/Known Toolmark Production Techniques

Davis, J.E., “Indium Metal for Toolmarks, AFTE Journal, 1973; 5(4):29.

McGuire, D.L., and Kennington, R., “Comparative Micrography Techniques,” AFTE Journal, 1977; 9(1):7-
14.

McGuire, D.L., and Brodie, T.G., “Standard Toolmark Production Device,” AFTE Journal, 1975; 7(1):33-
37.

FATM Training Manual Page 140 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Molnar, S., “Techniques for Making Test Tool Marks Involving a Vise and C-Clamp,” AFTE Newsletter,
1970; 2(6):26-30.

Tires

Bridgemon, R.R., “The Examination of Cut Tires,” AFTE Journal, 1984; 16(3):102-103.

Rathman, G.A., “Tires and Toolmarks,” AFTE Journal, 1992; 24(2):146-159.

Tuira, Y.J., “Tire Stabbing with Consecutively Manufactured Knives,” AFTE Journal, 1982; 14(1):50-52.

Tool Orientation Effects

Deinet, W., “Studies of Models of Striated Marks Generated by Random Processes,” Journal of Forensic
Sciences, Vol. 26, No. 1, Jan. 1983, pp. 35-50.

Maheshwari, H.S., “Influence of Vertical Angle of a Tool on Its Tool Mark,” Forensic Science International,
Vol. 18, No. 1, Jan. 1981, pp. 5-12.

Trace Evidence Concerns

Dixon, T.R., “Trace Evidence in a Toolmarks Case,” AFTE Journal, 1975; 7(1):70-71.

Murdock, J.E., “Associative Evidence,” AFTE Journal, 1984; 16(2):5.

Versailles, J., “Metal Residue Build-Up on Tool Blades,” AFTE Journal, 1974; 6(4):7.

Vehicles

Arrowood, M.C., and Berglund, J.S., “Examination of Toolmarks from a Vehicle Involved in a Hit and
Run,” AFTE Journal, 1983; 15(2):100-101.

Brinkman, R.W., “An Unusual Tool Mark Comparison from a Hit and Run Case,” AFTE Journal, 1978;
10(1):33.

Lapierre, J., “Two Interesting and Unusual Tool Mark Cases,” AFTE Journal, 1978; 10(2):57-58.

Smith, R.M., “Another Hit and Run Toolmark Case,” AFTE Newsletter, Dec. 1972, p. 31.

Townshend, D.G., “Identification of Hub and Wheel,” AFTE Journal, 1975; 7(1):56-58.

Wilson, R., “Examination of Toolmarks from a Vehicle Involved in a Burglary,” AFTE Journal, 1983;
15(2):98-99.

Wood

Hathaway, R.A., “Physical Match of a Broken Pool Cue Stick,” AFTE Journal, 1994; 26(3):185-186.

Jordan, T., “A ‘Stumped’ Case,” AFTE Journal, 1981; 13(1):15-20.

FATM Training Manual Page 141 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Lapierre, J., “Two Interesting and Unusual Tool Mark Cases,” AFTE Journal, 1978; 10(2):57-58.

Mezger, O., Hasslacher, F., and Frankle, P., “Identification of Marks Made on Trees,” American Journal of
Police Science, 1930, pp. 358.

Molnar, S., “Saw Cuts and Log Ends,” AFTE Newsletter, Apr. 1970, p. 70.

Robinson, M.K., “Comparison of Growth Rings in Wood to Identify Clock Parts,” AFTE Journal, 1976;
8(1):88-91.

---. “Comparison of Gunstock Parts to Barreled Action,” AFTE Journal, 1976; 8(1):65-69.

Townshend, D.G., “Examination of Tree Stumps,” AFTE Journal, 1981; 13(4):32-36.

Versailles, J., “Tool Markings on Balsam Branches,” AFTE Journal, 1974, 6(1):10.

“Wood as Evidence,” FBI Law Enforcement Bulletin, Oct. 1975, pp. 5-7.

FATM Training Manual Page 142 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

M. SERIAL NUMBER RESTORATION

1. Read the Handbook of Methods for the Restoration of Obliterated Serial Numbers, by
Treptow. Be prepared to discuss the theory of number restoration.

(Use Training Assignment #63 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

2. Sketch the entire stressed area above and below the indentation of a stamped item
and depict what remains when the indented area is removed.

(Use Training Assignment #63 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

3. Make a list of the various methods used to mark items by private industry. This list
should include but not be restricted to: casting, stamping, embossing, debossing,
coining, vibratory pencil, laser and electrical discharge machining.

Discuss with the Technical Lead or an experienced examiner the effect each of
these marking techniques has on the subsurface of the marked area.
Discuss with the Technical Lead or an experienced examiner the marking
methods used that can directly affect the ability of the examiner to restore any
obliterated markings and why.

(Use Training Assignment #63 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

4. Define in your notebook the term "plastic deformation" of metal.

(Use Training Assignment #63 to complete this objective.)

____________________ ________
Examiner Date

5. Briefly discuss in your notebook and with your Technical Lead or an experienced
examiner the difference between cold rolled steel and cast iron metal.

(Use Training Assignment #63 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

FATM Training Manual Page 143 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

6. Discuss with your Technical Lead or an experienced examiner the effect that the
following types of alterations will have on the subsurface of the marked item and how
it will impact on the results of the examiner.

grinding
over stamping
pinging
gouging
heating
puddling
welding
removal
combinations of the above
(Use Training Assignment #63 to complete this objective.)

_______________ ________
Examiner Date

7. Determine the telltale signs that can be left by the various alteration methods. Discuss
how these signs will determine your specific approach to the restoration attempt.

(Use Training Assignment #64 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

8. Discuss with your Technical Lead or an experienced examiner the different types of
lighting (e.g., incandescent, infrared, UV, and fluorescent) and how they can improve
or enhance the restoration results. Be prepared to explain how the angle of incidence
of these lighting techniques might vary the results.

(Use Training Assignment #64 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

9. Discuss the various methods of surface preparation such as sanding and polishing
and how they will affect the results in the restoration attempt.

(Use Training Assignment #64 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

FATM Training Manual Page 144 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

10. Determine the chemical reaction that takes place when etching is conducted and
document in your notebook the appropriate chemical formulations for the general
reactions of acid with steel and aluminum.

(Use Training Assignment #64 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

11. Determine whether the reaction rate for the stressed area is faster or slower than the
etching rate of the rest of the surface and why.

(Use Training Assignment #64 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

12. Determine the specialized equipment that might be used in number restoration and
discuss these with your Technical Lead or an experienced examiner.

(Use Training Assignment #64 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

13. Discuss with your Technical Lead or an experienced examiner the appropriate
photography techniques and procedures to be used before, during, and after restoring
obliterated serial numbers.

(Use Training Assignment #64 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

14. Research the various kinds of magnifying and enhancing equipment used for number
restoration and explain when and why each would be used.

(Use Training Assignment #64 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

15. Become familiar with the following chemicals:

a. CuNH4Cl2
b. CuCl2
c. NaOH

FATM Training Manual Page 145 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

d. HCl
e. HNO3
f. KCN
g. K2SO4
h. H2SO4
i. FeCl3
j. H2O2
k. Tartaric acid
l. Ammonium Persulfate
(Use Training Assignment #64 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

16. Obtain the proper safety equipment (e.g., eyewear, masks, gloves, and lab coats)
before attempting any chemical restorations. Review the appropriate sections of the
Safety Manual to insure proper safety precautions are used. If you have any
questions, be sure to ask your Technical Lead or an experienced examiner before
making or using any chemical reagents.

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

17. Define and place in your notebook these common chemical terms:

Frye’s Reagent
Turner's Reagent
Davis' Reagent

(Use Training Assignment #65 to complete this objective.)

__________________ ________
Examiner Date

18. Become knowledgeable of the numbering systems and methods used by various
firearm manufacturers including but not limited to Colt, Ruger, Smith & Wesson, US
Repeating Arms (Winchester) and Remington.

(Use Training Assignment #65 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

FATM Training Manual Page 146 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

19. Determine the best chemicals and techniques to use in number restoration of the
following firearms:

a. Colt pistol
b. Smith & Wesson revolver
c. RG Industries revolver
d. Ruger stainless steel revolver
e. chrome/nickel 25 caliber autoloading pistol
f. shotgun alloy receiver
g. shotgun casehardened receiver
h. Winchester rifle

(Use Training Assignment #65 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

20. Obtain several firearms from your Technical Lead or an experienced examiner, alter
the serial numbers using different methods and then attempt to restore them. Prepare
notes and photographs to substantiate your conclusions and results.

(Use Training Assignment #65 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

21. Be prepared to discuss with your Technical Lead or an experienced examiner the
methods used and lessons learned during the restoration process.

(Use Training Assignment #65 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

22. Obtain several pieces of aluminum that have had stamped numbers removed.
Attempt to restore these numbers using various techniques. Prepare notes and
photographs to substantiate your conclusions and results.

(Use Training Assignment #66 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

23. Discuss with your Technical Lead or an experienced examiner how the combination of
brief application of CuNH4Cl2 followed by normal NaOH application can shorten the
processing time on aluminum.
FATM Training Manual Page 147 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

(Use Training Assignment #65 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

24. Discuss with your Technical Lead or an experienced examiner why alternating HNO3
and HCl can work so well on chrome or nickel plated firearms.

(Use Training Assignment #65 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

25. Research the effect of D. C. electricity (Include the proper polarity and voltage for
enhance etching/development of obliterated numbers and letters) on the reaction time
of the different chemical techniques you have learned. Conduct restorations using this
method.

(Use Training Assignment #65 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

26. You will receive a total of sixteen metal bars made from four different metals. Each
bar has four altered serial numbers. Using the reagents found in Treptow and
Training Assignment 65, restore these numbers. Make note of how the different
reagents react with the metals and determine which reagents work the best. Consult
with your Technical Lead or an experienced examiner for how to record the restoration
process. If possible, make use of the direct current and/or magnaflux during some of
the restorations.

(Use Training Assignment #66 to complete this objective.)

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

REFERENCE MATERIALS

RESTORATION OF OBLITERATED MARKINGS

The following reference materials serve several purposes:

• to provide a wider range of additional resources should you have a particular interest in a
given topic.
• to provide reference materials for your future professional use.
• to allow you to gain additional depth in particular subject areas.

FATM Training Manual Page 148 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Should you encounter other references in this category, you are encouraged to make additional notes
about them at the end of this listing.

Books

Brandt, D., Metallurgy Fundamentals, Goodheart-Wilcox Co., Inc., 1992.

Cook, C.W., “A Practical Guide to the Basics of Physical Evidence” Colorado Bureau of Investigation,
April 1975.

Cook, C.W., “Chemical Etching Reagents for Serial Number Restoration” Colorado Bureau of
Investigation, April 1975.

Doane, F.B., Principles of Magnaflux Inspection, Photopress Publishing, Inc., 1940.

nd
Hatcher, J.S., Jury, F.J., and Weller, J., Firearms Investigation, Identification and Evidence, 2 edition,
Stackpole Books, Harrisburg, PA, 1977.

Hein, Morris, et al., Foundations of College Chemistry, Dickenson Publishing Co., 1977.
th
Kegser, C.A., Basic Engineering Metallurgy - Theories, Principles and Applications, 6 edition, Prentice-
Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N.J., 1957.
rd
Kehl, G.L., The Principles of Metallographic Laboratory Practice, 3 edition, McGraw-Hill, New York,
1949.

Kotz and Purcell, Chemistry and Chemical Reactivity, Saunders College Publishing, 1991.

Krcma, V., The Identification and Registration of Firearms, Charles C. Thomas, Springfield, IL, 1971.

Mathews, J.H., Firearms Identification, Volume I, Charles C. Thomas, Springfield, IL, 1962, pp. 77-80.

Polk, D.E., and Giessen, B.C., Metallurgical Aspects of Serial Number Recovery, Institute of Chemical
Analysis-Northeastern University, Boston, MA (undated).

Treptow, R.S., Handbook of Methods for the Restoration of Obliterated Serial Numbers, NASA, 1978.

Vander Voort, G.F., Metallography, Principles and Practice, McGraw-Hill, 1984.

Van Klock, L.H., Elements of Materials Science and Engineering, Addison-Wesley Publishing Company,
1985.

Professional Journals

Katterwe, H., “Modern Approaches For the Examination of Toolmarks and Other Surface Marks,”
Forensic Science Review, Vol. 8, No. 1, Jun. 1996, pp. 46-71.

---. “The Recovery of Erased Numbers in Polymers,” Journal of Forensic Science Society, Vol. 34, 1994,
pp. 11-16.

Krcma, V., “The Identification of Pistols by Serial Numbers and Other Markings,” Journal of Forensic
Sciences, 1961.
FATM Training Manual Page 149 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

“Metallurgy vs. Crime,” FBI Law Enforcement Bulletin, Vol. 19, No. 11, Nov. 1950, p. 8.

“Restoring Altered and Obliterated Markings on Metal,” FBI Law Enforcement Bulletin, Vol. 25, No. 7, Jul.
1956, p. 13.

Thornton, J.I., and Cashman, P.J., “The Mechanism of the Restoration of Obliterated Serial Numbers by
Acid Etching,” Journal of the Forensic Science Society, Vol. 16, No. 69, 1976.

Turley, D.M., “Restoration of Stamp Marks on Steel Components by Etching and Magnetic Techniques,”
Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 32, No. 3, May 1987.

Young, S.G., “The Restoration of Obliterated Markings by Ultrasonically Induced Cavitation in Water,”
Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 19, No. 4, 1974, p. 820.

AFTE Journal

Barabash, T., and Fahey, R.T., “Non-Destructive Methods of Restoring Defaced Serial Numbers,” 1977;
9(1):23.

Brundage, D.J., “Surface Preparation for Serial Number Restoration,” 1982; 14(4):9.

Cantor, A., “Serial Number Restoration with Image Enhancement on the FBI Drugfire Computer,” 1997;
29(2):223-230.

Cook, C.W., “Chemical Etching Reagents for Serial Number Restoration,” 1975; 7(2):80.

---. “Obliterated Serial Numbers,” 1975; 7(1):27.

---. “Obliterated Serial Numbers,” 1989; 21(2):166-167.

Deats, B., “Serial Number Restoration Information,” 1980; 12(3):82.

Dragan, P., “Abrasive Wheels for Serial Number Restoration Preparation,” 1996; 28(1):21.

Garland, P.V., “Training the Firearms Examiner,” 1971; 3(1):32.

Harden, L.R., “Reader Reporter,” 1988; 20(2):171-173.

Heflin, T.M., “Examination of Serial Number Over-Stamp,” 1984; 16(3):12.

Hueske, E.E., “Browning Firearms Serial Numbering System,” 1988; 20(1):59-60.

Keisler, M.A., “Smith and Wesson Model SW9F and the Hidden Serial Number,” 1997; 29(2):186-187.

Knowles, M., “Instant Recovery of Obliterated Serial Numbers,” 1985; 17(3):63.

Lee, F.R., “Helpful Hint,” 1977; 9(2):37.

Lutz, M.C., “Evaluation of New Fiber Optics System,” 1986; 18(1):12.

FATM Training Manual Page 150 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Massiah, E.E., “Compilation of Techniques and Chemical Formulae Used in the Restoration of
Obliterated Markings,” 1976; 8(2):26.

Miller, J., “Book Review: The Law and Forensic Ballistics by T.A. Warlow,” 1997; 29(2):239, 173.

Miller, K.E., “Current Assist for Die Stamp Impression Restoration,” 1972; 4(3A):38.

Montgomery, J.L., “New Process Restores Filed Serial Numbers,” 1975; 7(3):80.

Nielson, B.C., “Restoration of Die Stamped Impressions on Metal,” 1972; 4(3):32.

O’Reilly, W.E., “Magnetic Restoration of Serial Number,” 1970; 2(3):26.

Paholke, A.R., “Restoration of Serial Numbers,” 1969; 1(4):38.

Polk, D.E., and Giessen, B.C., “Metallurgical Aspects of Serial Number Recovery,” 1975; 7(2):38.

---. “Metallurgical Aspects of Serial Number Recovery,” 1989; 21(2):174-181.

Roberts, V., “Restoration of Serial Numbers in Plastic,” 1981; 13(4):40.

Schaefer, J.R., “Serial Number Restoration Observation,” 1987; 19(3):276-278.

Sherlock, W.E., and Keating, D.M., “Obliterated Serial Number Tracking Program,” 1995; 27(4):264-280.

Taulbee, D., “3x5 Card File of Die Stamped Impressions on Metal,” 1973; 5(3):18.

Thompson, R.W., “Second Serial Number on Tarus Model 80 Revolvers,” 1980; 12(2):18.

Vaughan, R.T., “Serial Number Restoration on a Radar Warning Device,” 1987; 19(3):304.

---. “Technique for Restoring Obliterated Serial Numbers on Plastic Cards,” 1981; 13(2):30.

FATM Training Manual Page 151 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

N. RESEARCH PROJECT, REPORT WRITING, EXPERT TESTIMONY

AND EXTERNAL LABORATORY REVIEW AND TOURS
1. Review the methods of taking notes in cases and observe other examiners taking
notes during the examination of evidence. Make note of how to record essential data
on which conclusions are based, photo documentation, and how case forms are used.
Review the Standard Operating Procedures manual for general information on case
files and reports.

Discuss the above areas with your Technical Lead or an experienced examiner.

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

2. Read through copies of reports generated by all of the examiners for the purpose of
familiarization with report format and phraseology. Compile a reference file which
reflects correct phraseology divided into appropriate categories, i.e., bullet
examination, bullet "no conclusion,” bullet identification, cartridge case identification,
firearms function, accidental discharge, gunshot residues, etc. Discuss this with your
Technical Lead or an experienced examiner.

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

3. Attend moot courts of other trainees during your training period and evaluate the
demeanor and professionalism of the trainee, if applicable. Discuss this with your
Technical Lead or an experienced examiner

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

4. Attend the testimony of several examiners. Discuss their testimony with each
examiner.

_________________ ________
Examiner Date
________________ ________
Examiner Date
_________________ ________
Examiner Date

5. Discuss the meaning and/or definition of the following terms or phrases, as they apply
to testimony in the field of firearms/toolmark identification, with your Technical Lead or
an experienced examiner.

a. expert witness
b. reasonable degree of scientific certainty
c. hearsay
FATM Training Manual Page 152 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

d. opinion
e. voir dire
f. Daubert

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

6. Prepare a list of "qualification questions" which can be used by the prosecutor in court
to qualify you as an expert witness. Include in this questions which can be used as a
guide for the introduction in court of evidence which you have examined.

_________________ ________
Examiner Date

7. Confer with other examiners regarding personal hints and recommendations in regard
to courtroom testimony. This discussion should be lengthy and cover all aspects of
the topic.

_________________ ________
Examiner Date
_________________ ________
Examiner Date
_________________ ________
Examiner Date
_________________ ________
Examiner Date
_________________ ________
Examiner Date

REFERENCE MATERIALS

RESEARCH PROJECT

The following reference materials serve several purposes:

• to provide a wider range of additional resources should you have a particular interest in a
given topic.
• to provide reference materials for your future professional use.
• to allow you to gain additional depth in particular subject areas.
Should you encounter other references in this category, you are encouraged to make additional notes
about them at the end of this listing.

Research Techniques

Bennis, W., On Becoming a Leader, Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1989.

FATM Training Manual Page 153 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Carr, J.J., The Art of Science: A Practical Guide to Experiments, Observations, and Handling Data, High
Text Publications, San Diego, CA, 1992.

Copi, I.M., Introduction to Logic, 7th edition, MacMillan, NY, 1986.

Halpern, D.F., Thought and Knowledge: An Introduction to Critical Thinking, 2nd edition, Lawrence
Erlbaum Associates, Hillsdale, NJ, 1989.

Herceg, E.E., Handbook of Measurement and Control, Shawitz Engineering, Pennsauken, NJ, 1972.

Jaffe, A.J., and Spirer, H.F., Misused Statistics: Straight Talk about Twisted Numbers, Marcel Dekker,
Inc., NY, 1987.

Langley, R., Practical Statistics, Dover Publications, NY, 1968,1970.

Paul, R., Critical Thinking: What Every Person Needs to Survive in a Rapidly Changing World, Sonoma
State University, Rohnert Park CA, 1980.

Smith, G., Statistical Reasoning, Allyn & Bacon, Needham Heights, MA, 1991.

Tukey, J., and Mosteller, F., Data Analysis and Regression, Addison Welsey, Reading, MA, 1977.

Self-Directed Learning

Cross, P.K., Adults as Learners, Jossey-Bass, San Francisco, 1981.

Drumheller, S.J., Handbook of Curriculum Design for Individualized Instruction: a Systems Approach,
Educational Technology Publications, Englewood Cliffs, NJ 1971.

Dunn, R., and Dunn, K., Practical Approaches to Individualizing Instruction, Parker Publishing Co., West
Nyack, NY, 1972.

Knowles, M.S., The Modern Practice of Adult Education, Follet Publishing, Chicago, 1980.

Knowles, M.S., and Associates, Andragogy in Action: Applying Modern Principles of Adult Learning,
Jossey-Bass, San Francisco, 1984.

Knowles, M.S., Self-Directed Learning: A Guide for Learners and Teachers, Association Press, New York,
1975.

Knowles, M.S., The Adult Learner: A Neglected Species, Gulf Publishing Co., Houston, TX, 1973.

Messick, S., and Associates, Individualization in Learning, Jossey-Bass, San Francisco, 1976.

REFERENCE MATERIALS

ORAL PRESENTATIONS AND COURT TESTIMONY

The following reference materials serve several purposes:

• to provide a wider range of additional resources should you have a particular interest in a
given topic.
FATM Training Manual Page 154 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

• to provide reference materials for your future professional use.

• to allow you to gain additional depth in particular subject areas.
Should you encounter other references in this category, you are encouraged to make additional notes
about them at the end of this listing.

General

Andersen, G.R., “Round Pegs in Square Holes: The Aftermath of Daubert,” South Carolina Trial Lawyers
Association Bulletin, Fall, 1996, pp. 9-12.

Babitsky, S., and Mangravati, J.J., How to Excel During Cross-Examination; Techniques for Experts That
Work, SEAK, Inc., Falmouth, MA.

Bailey, F.L., and Rothblatt, H.B., Investigation and Preparation of Criminal Cases, Federal and State, The
Lawyers Co-operative Publishing Company, Rochester, NY, and the Bancroft-Whitney Company, San
Francisco, CA, 1970.

---. Crimes of Violence: Homicide and Assault, The Lawyers Co-operative Publishing Company,
Rochester, NY, and the Bancroft-Whitney Company, San Francisco, CA, 1973.

Biasotti, A.A., and Murdock, J.E., “Firearms and Toolmark Identification: Legal Issues and Scientific
Status,” Chapter 23, Modern Scientific Evidence: The Law and Science of Expert Testimony, (Faigman,
D.L., Kaye, D.H., Saks, M.J., and Sanders, J., eds., West Publishing Co., 1997), Vol. 2, pp. 124-151.

Bohan, T.L., and Heels, E.J., “The Case Against Daubert: The New Scientific ‘Standard’ and the
Standards of the Several States,” Journal of Forensic Sciences, Vol. 40, No. 6, Nov. 1995, pp. 1030-
1044.

Bradley, M.D., The Scientist and Engineer in Court, American Geophysical Union, Washington, DC, 1983.

Bronstein, D.A., Law for the Expert Witness, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, 1998.

Burke, J.J., “Testifying in Court,” FBI Law Enforcement Bulletin, Sep. 1975.
nd
Hatcher, J.S., Jury, F.J., and Weller, J., Firearms Investigation, Identification and Evidence, 2 edition,
Stackpole Books, Harrisburg, 1957, pp. 445-460.

Matson, J.V., Effective Expert Witnessing, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, 1994.

Melson, G.R., “Qualifying as An Expert in State Court: The Impact of Daubert,” paper presented at the
Fourth Annual Conference for Medical and Forensic Experts, Dec. 6-7, 1997, Newport Beach, CA.

Meyer, C.B., Expert Witnesses - Explaining and Understanding Science, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL,
1998.

Moenssens, A.A., Moses, R.E., and Inbau, F.E., Scientific Evidence in Criminal Cases, The Foundation
Press, Mineola, NY, 1973.

Molloy, J.T., New Women’s Dress for Success, Warner Books, 1996.

---. John T. Molloy’s New Dress for Success, Warner Books, 1988.
FATM Training Manual Page 155 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Moses, R.E., Scientific Proof in Criminal Cases - A Texas Lawyers Guide, The Lakeland Press, 1969.

Neal, M.W., “From the Hot Seat: Tips for Effective Courtroom Testimony,” Forensic Focus - The Journal
of The West Virginia State Police Forensic Laboratory, Vol. 1, No. 2, Jul.-Dec. 1995, pp. 1, 11-13.

Saks, M.J., “Implications of the Daubert Test for Forensic Identification Science,” Shepard’s Expert and
Scientific Evidence, Vol. 1, No. 3, Winter, 1994, pp. 427-434.

Sibert, R.W., “Laboratory Examinations Conducted Within the Field of Firearms Identification: A Tracing of
the Acceptance by the Courts of Their Use in Expert Testimony,” paper submitted to the George
Washington University Department of Forensic Sciences, 1973.

Thornton, J.I., “Courts of Law v. Courts of Science: A Forensic Scientist’s Reaction to Daubert,”
Shepard’s Expert and Scientific Evidence, Vol. 1, No. 3, Winter, 1994, pp. 475-485.

AFTE Journal

Adler, M., “How to Refute the Experts Told Members at Lawyers’ Club Meeting,” 1972; 4(3):26.

Bell, V.P., “Admissibility of Evidence of Experiments,” 1980; 12(3):51.

Bisbing, R.E., and Wilmer, J.H., “Admissibility of Fingernail Identification Undecided in Michigan,” 1985;
17(2):96.

Boyle, P.J., “Role of the Expert Witness,” 1989; 21(4):639.

“California Department of Justice Firearms Toolmark Identification Training Syllabus: Professionalism,”

1991; 23(1):554-558 (court appearances).

“California Department of Justice Firearms Toolmark Identification Training Syllabus: Professionalism,”

1991; 23(2):727-738 (demonstrative evidence and expert testimony).

Chicago Tribune, “False Testimony,” 1980; 12(3):84.

Crossman, E.B., “Qualifications of a Ballistics Expert,” 1985; 17(3):119.

District Court of Oklahoma, “Transcript of Bullet Examination Testimony,” 1986; 18(1):71.

“Effective Expert Testimony,” 1972; 4(4):8.

Garrison, D.H., “Intent Behind the Bullet,” 1993; 25(4):294-296.

---. “Little Gunmen: Shooting Reconstruction Miniatures,” 1991; 23(3):836-848.

Grzybowski, R.A., and Murdock, J.E., “Firearm and Toolmark Examiners - Meeting the Daubert
Challenge,” 1998; 30(1):3-14.

Hathaway, R.A., “Inadmissibility of Photographs,” 1979; 11(2):52.

Hodge, E.E., and Blackburn, B.D., “Courtroom Demeanor Information,” 1984; 16(4):35.

FATM Training Manual Page 156 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

---. “Firearms/Toolmark Examiner in Court,” 1979; 11(4):70.

---. “Firearms/Toolmark Examiner in Court,” 1989; 21(2):232-242.

Hodge, S.A. and Blackburn, S.A., "The Firearms-Toolmark Examiner in Court", October 1979.

Joling, R.J., and Stern, W.W., “An Overview of Firearms Identification Evidence for Attorneys, II:
Applicable Law of Recent Origin,” 1981; 13(4):134-139.

---. “An Overview of Firearms Identification Evidence for Attorneys, III: Qualifying and Using the Firearms
Examiner as a Witness,” 1981; 13(4):140-144.

---. “An Overview of Firearms Identification Evidence for Attorneys, IV: Practice and Procedures When
Using the Firearms Examiner and Demonstrative Evidence,” 1981; 13(4):145-148.

Keefe, J.F., “Forensic Sciences: Criminal Justice System Viewed by the Defense,” 1980; 12(2):59.

Mann, M., Henson, G., Stone, R., and Guerra, S., “Visual Aides for Firearm Training and Courtroom
Testimony,” 1994; 26(4):309-310.

“Maryland State Court of Appeals. Appeals Case: (Olen J. Kelly et. al. vs. R.G. Industries, Inc., et. al.),”
1986; 18(2):77.

Miller, K.E., “Proof of Opinion,” 1973; 5(2):8.

Molnar, S., “Some Comments on Testifying in Court,” 1971; 3(3):46.

Moses, R.E., “Scientific Proof in Criminal Cases: A Texas Lawyer’s Guide,” 1989; 21(2):123-128.

Munhall, B.D., “Tools for the Firearm Examiner in Tort Matters,” 1972; 4(3):11.

Murdock, J.E., “Some Suggested Court Questions to Test Criteria for Identification Qualifications,” 1992;
24(1):69-75.

“Science in Criminal Law Newsletter,” 1980; 12(3):85.

Tanton, R.L., “Jury Preconceptions and Their Effect on Expert Scientific Testimony,” 1980; 20(2):67.

Townshend, D.G., “Observation of the Witness,” 1973; 5(4):26.

White, R.H., “Idle Thoughts Concerning Admissibility,” 1976; 8(4):50.

Wilson, C.M., “Evidence in Firearms Cases,” 1983; 15(2):83.

REFERENCE MATERIALS

EXTERNAL LABORATORY REVIEW AND TOURS

The following reference materials serve several purposes:

• to provide a wider range of additional resources should you have a particular interest in a
given topic.
FATM Training Manual Page 157 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

• to provide reference materials for your future professional use.

• to allow you to gain additional depth in particular subject areas.
Should you encounter other references in this category, you are encouraged to make additional notes
about them at the end of this listing.

Books

Kirk, P.L., and Bradford, L.W., The Crime Laboratory: Organization and Operation, Charles C. Thomas,
Springfield, IL, 1965.

Osterberg, J.W., The Crime Laboratory, Clark Boardman Company, Ltd., New York, NY, 1982.

Periodicals

Cadman, W.J., “How to Get the Best from Your Laboratory,” The Police Chief, Feb. 1978, pp. 64-70.

Professional Journals

Fisher, A.J., “Developing a Forensic Science Laboratory,” Journal of Forensic Sciences, 1986, pp. 1177-
1184.

AFTE Journal

Bradford, L.W., “Barriers to Quality Achievement in Crime Laboratory Operations,” 1983; 15(2):71.

Fleming, P.J., and Purtell, D., “Scientists or Factory Workers?, “ 1989; 21(2):119-120.

Howe, W.J., “Crime Lab Study Funded By NIJ,” 1980; 12(3):73.

Lucas, D.M., “Laboratory Director’s View of the Firearms Section,” 1989; 21(2):188-190.

Rabren, C.L., “Laboratory Accreditation,“ 1982; 14(3):36.

Serrill, M.S., “Forensic Sciences: Overburdened, Underutilized,” 1980; 12(4):58.

Research Reports

Law Enforcement Assistance Administration, Utilization of Criminalistics Services by the Police, U.S.
Government Printing Office, Washington, DC, 1974.

National Institute of Justice, Forensic Evidence and the Police: The Effects of Scientific Evidence on
Criminal Investigations, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC, 1984.

Manuals

American Society of Crime Laboratory Directors, Laboratory Accreditation Board Manual, current edition

FATM Training Manual Page 158 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

APPENDIX A – TRAINING ASSIGNMENTS

FATM Training Manual Page 159 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 1
The following areas will be the topics of a short discussion session.

You will need to know the procedures in the pertinent sections of the Safety Manual regarding the
use of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) as well as the proper handling and examination of
evidence that may be contaminated with infectious diseases.

The following two areas are written assignments. Your answers should be concise and complete.

Define the following terms:

a. Firearm Identification

b. Ballistics

Read the applicable sections from the basic references and prepare an outline for a future report
concerning the history, principles, evolution and scope of firearms identification in its broadest
sense. Begin to accumulate documentation in your notebook for this report.

References:

"Firearms Identification" Vol. I, MATHEWS.

"Firearms Investigation, Identification and Evidence" HATCHER, JURY and

WELLER.

"The Identification of Firearms and Forensic Ballistics" BURRARD.

"The Identification of Firearms" GUNTHER and GUNTHER.

This will complete Section A #12, B #1 and begins

Section B #2 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 160 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 2

The following areas will be the topics of a discussion session.

Formulate an answer to each of the following questions:

a. Is firearms identification an art or science?

b. What are the types of conclusions that can be reached in firearms identification
comparisons?

c. What is the basis for each of the above conclusions?

d. Can experts in the field of firearms identification disagree regarding their conclusions?
Why?

e. How does "probability" relate to firearms identification?

Continue to work on your report concerning the history, principles, evolution and scope of firearms
identification.

References:

"Firearms Identification" Vol. I, MATHEWS.

"Firearms Investigation, Identification and Evidence" HATCHER, JURY and
WELLER.
"The Identification of Firearms and Forensic Ballistics" BURRARD.
"The Identification of Firearms" GUNTHER and GUNTHER.

Continue to work on your list of definitions.

This will complete Section B #2 and 3 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 161 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 3
1. Be able to discuss the early development of gunpowder.

2. Prepare a chronological outline of early firearms development from ”cannon lock” through “percussion
lock”. The listing should be in proper historical order. Be prepared to discuss how each type of
development was an improvement over the previous system.

Areas of consideration:
What features of these early firearms are still in use today?
What were the advantages of each of these systems?
What were the disadvantages of each of these systems?
Was there a common disadvantage to all these systems?
What was it and how was it overcome?
DIRECTIONS: The chronological outline should be in written form including a brief description of
each type of action. It does not need to be elaborate but complete. Be prepared
to answer questions concerning these areas.
READING LIST:

Book of Rifles by W. H. B. Smith, pages 3 through 43.

Book of Pistols & Revolvers by W. H. B. Smith, pages 6 through 20.
Small Arms of the World 8th Edition by Smith & Smith, pages 15 through 38
Firearms Investigation, Identification and Evidence by Hatcher, Jury & Weller, Chapter 2, pages 23
through 39
United States martial Pistols and Revolvers by Gluckman, Part I, pages 13 through 22.
Guns through the Ages by Boothroyd, Chapters 1 through 4, pages 15 through 37.
Encyclopedia of Firearms by Peterson.
Encyclopedia of Firearms by Ian Hogg
American Rifleman 1960 March, April, May & June "The Development of Firearms" by Peterson.
The Age of Firearms by Robert Held

This will complete Section C #1 of your training manual.

Be prepared to discuss your selection of a topic for a research project. This will be a preliminary look and
will be designed to be completed for presentation to the Association of Firearm and Tool Mark Examiners.
Think of something that has caught your interest or curiosity.
This will begin Section B #8 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 162 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 4
1. Trace the evolution of the rimfire cartridge from the mid-nineteenth century to the current
generation of modern .22 caliber rimfire cartridges. Be able to discuss this topic.

2. Prepare a chronological outline of rimfire ammunition development including firearms types that
were developed for this type ammunition. It should be in proper historical order. Be prepared to
discuss how each type of development was an improvement over the previous system.
Areas of consideration:

What features of these early ammunition/firearms are still in use today?

What were the advantages of each of these systems?
What were the disadvantages of each of these systems?
Was there a common disadvantage to all these systems?
What was it and how was it overcome?

DIRECTIONS:

The chronological outline should be in written form similar to previous assignments. It does not need to
be elaborate but complete.

Be prepared to answer questions concerning these areas.

You will be tested on the vocabulary list you received.

This will complete Section B #7, and C #4 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 163 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 5

1. Trace the evolution of the centerfire cartridge from the mid-nineteenth century to the present.
Pay particular attention to the transition from black powder to smokeless powder. Include any
information developed concerning caseless ammunition. Be able to discuss this topic.

2. Prepare a chronological outline of center fire ammunition development including firearms types
that were developed for this type ammunition. It should be in proper historical order. Be
prepared to discuss how each type of development was an improvement over the previous
system.

Areas of consideration:

What features of these early firearms are no longer in use today?

What were the advantages of each of the systems?
What were the disadvantages of each of the systems?
What areas are still open to improvement to any of these systems?
Include information regarding exterior bullet coatings which have been developed in the
last three decades and how they have impacted firearms examiners.

DIRECTIONS:

The chronological outline should be in written form similar to previous assignments. It does not need to
be elaborate but complete.
Be prepared to answer questions concerning these areas.
Prepare a statement regarding your research project for review. This should include your goal, rough
outline and some detail regarding your project.

This will complete Section B #7, C #5 and #7 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 164 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 6
Research in detail these processes and prepare a short written definition of each term listed below. The
definitions should be concise and complete. You should also have an understanding of how these
different procedures apply to firearms manufacturing.

a. Shaping
b. Planing
c. Drilling
d. Reaming
e. Turning
f. Boring
g. Milling-include both face milling and peripheral (slab) milling
h. Broaching
i. Abrasive machining-include honing, lapping, grinding, sanding, and ultrasonic methods
j. Sawing
k. Filing
l. Swaging
m. Electrochemical machining (ECM)
n. EDM
o. Investment casting

This will complete Section D #1 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 165 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 7
This assignment is designed to demonstrate your knowledge of the basic nomenclature of handguns,
rifles, and shotguns.

a. Obtain the following firearms from the FRC:

1. rifle (bolt action; semiautomatic; lever)

2. semiautomatic pistol (blowback & recoil)
3. revolver (single-action & double-action)

b. Be able to point out the following parts on these firearms:

breech face, breech bolt, bolt, bolt face, extractor, ejector, firing pin, rifling, barrel,
lands, grooves, ramp, magazine, clip, ejection port, receiver.

c. Be able to describe the cycle of fire for each firearm.

d. Discuss the manufacturing techniques which would have been used to fabricate
and finish each of the parts and note the machining marks on each part.

e. Point out any "mark of abuse" which could contribute to the uniqueness of each
part.

f. Identify areas that machining marks might "carry over" to another firearm.

Be prepared to give a short talk on one of each type of firearm you have examined. This talk should last
no more than approximately five minutes per firearm and include the cycle of fire and nomenclature. This
presentation will be for the entire section.

This will complete Section D #2 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 166 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 8
Research in detail the following rifling techniques:

a. Broach
b. Button
c. Hammer Forging
d. Hook method
e. Scrape method
f. ECM
g. EDM
h. Flow forming

Prepare a short paper discussing the differences in these rifling techniques including the advantages and
disadvantages for each as viewed by industry and the firearms examiner.

Obtain broaches and buttons for study from your Technical Lead. Determine the difference between
barrels which have been button rifled and those which have been broach rifled.

Discuss and define the following terms as they relate to firearms manufacture or firearms identification:

a. chambering
b. crowning
c. ballizing
d. bore slugging
e. forcing cone
f. bore
g. choke
h. choke tubes

Research the history and current significance of proof marks as they relate to the manufacture of
firearms. You need to understand how these will be helpful in firearms identification and where to obtain
necessary information.

This will complete Section D# 3, 4, 5 and 6 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 167 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 9

Define the following terms as they relate to modern ammunition and its manufacture. Prepare a brief
written outline of these terms for your notebook. These terms coincide with the practical exercise which is
attached. Ensure that you understand these terms and use them often.

a. Cartridge aa. Bullet

b. Cartridge case bb. Round-nosed bullet
c. Primer cc. "Hollow-point" bullet
d. Shotshell dd. Jacketed bullet
e. Shotshell casing ee. Bullet sizing
f. Bottleneck cartridge ff. Wadcutter bullet
g. Rebated-rim cartridge gg. Semi-wadcutter bullet
h. Rimless cartridge hh. Soft point bullet
i. Rimmed cartridge ii. Spitzer bullet
j. Semi-rimmed cartridge jj. Swaging
k. Shoulder kk. Cast lead bullet
l. Neck ll. Mold marks
m. Mouth mm. Truncated-nosed bullet
n. Head nn. Cannelure
o. Headstamp oo. Ogive
p. Proof cartridge pp. Brass-coated lead bullet
q. Tapered cartridge qq. Copper-coated lead bullet
r. Extractor groove rr. Nylon-coated lead bullet
s. Gauge ss. "Silvertip" bullet
t. Battery cup tt. Antimony
u. Brass uu. Arsenic
v. "Rule of 17" vv. Chilled shot
w. Wadding ww. High brass, low brass
x. Shot collar xx. Lubaloy
y. Crimp yy. Dram equivalent
z. Bunter zz. Single base, double base

As part of this week’s assignment, you are to complete Practical Exercise #1.

This will complete Section E #1 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 168 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 10

Be prepared to discuss in detail Berdan and Boxer primer. Prepare a cross-section sketch of both
Berdan and Boxer primers, showing their relationship to the head of the cartridge and illustrating how
each functions.

Be prepared to discuss the purpose and essential ingredients of priming mixture used in modern
cartridges.

Know and discuss the difference between caliber, caliber type and caliber designation. To accomplish
this assignment, obtain as many different cartridges from the following caliber families: .22 caliber, .30
caliber and .38 caliber. Identify each one as to caliber designation and be able to explain and
demonstrate the differences between the different caliber types.

This should be as complete as possible and will require you to research the ammunition files and
standards, obtain different examples and disassemble them for presentation. You need to take into
account different cartridge case sizes and shapes within the caliber family and also the variations in
bullets (weight, jacketing, design, cannelures, etc.). Your examples should be such that you and other
members of the unit can use them in the future for references.

Practical Exercise #2 is required for completion of this assignment.

This will complete Section E #2, 3, and 4 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 169 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 11
Define each of the following types of firearms and explain in detail the operation of each type to include
the loading of cartridges and the subsequent movement of the cartridge case and/or bullet after firing. Be
able to understand and explain the cycle of fire for each general type of firearm listed below.

a. revolver, single and double action

b. auto loading pistol, single and double action
c. derringer and single shot pistols
d. bolt-action rifle
e. auto loading rifle
f. pump-action rifle
g. various single shot rifles
h. various submachine gun
i. assault rifle

This will complete Section G #1 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 170 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 12
Using shotguns from the Firearms Reference Collection (FRC), explain and illustrate the differences
between a gas-operated and a recoil-operated auto loading shotgun.

Using firearms from the FRC, explain and illustrate the differences between the following types of auto
loading pistols:

a. blowback action
b. delayed blowback action
c. gas-delayed blowback action
d. short recoil action
e. long recoil action

This will complete Section G #2 and #3 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 171 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 13

You have been assigned Practical Exercise #8. This exercise is self-explanatory.

You will need Practical Exercise #8 to complete this assignment.

This will be a part of Section H #6 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 172 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 14
Using a .22 caliber rifle, test fire and recover two test bullets and identify these bullets with each other.
Using this same firearm, “slug’ the barrel and compare the previously-fired test bullets with the bullets
used to “slug” the barrel. Cut off approximately three inches (approximately 25 percent) of the muzzle of
the barrel and crown the muzzle end of the barrel. Test fire and recover two test bullets using the same
ammunition as above. “Slug” this portion of the barrel and compare these tests with the previous test
bullets. Microscopically compare these bullets with each other and with the previously-fired test bullets.

Compile a list of reasons as to why bullet identifications cannot be made in some cases, and why some
barrels and bullets can preclude or tend to preclude identifications. This list should include, but not be
limited to, the results of the testing you have conducted on the various assignments and practical
exercises.

This will complete Section H #15 and 22 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 173 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 15

Partially disassemble (field strip) and reassemble the following (or similar) revolvers from the Firearm
Reference Collection (FRC). Obtain a copy of an exploded drawing of each one of the revolvers listed
below. Ensure that the drawing identifies all of the parts of the firearm. Be able to describe the
differences in their mechanisms and identify each part by name.

a. Smith & Wesson double-action revolver

b. Colt double-action revolver
c. Ruger double-action revolver
d. "Old style" Ruger single-action revolver
e. "New style" Ruger single-action revolver "New Model"
f. Colt single-action revolver

Use the following references:

Firearms Assembly, NRA #4

Firearms Assembly/Disassembly Part II Revolvers
Exploded Firearms Drawings 2d Edition
Manufacturer’s information

This will complete Section G #4, 11, 12, 13, and 14 of your training
manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 174 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 16

Disassemble and reassemble the following (or similar) pistols from the Firearm Reference Collection
(FRC). Obtain a copy of an exploded drawing of each of the pistols listed below. Ensure that the drawing
identifies all of the parts of the firearm. Learn the names of the major components and how they interact.
Be able to describe the differences in their mechanisms and identify each part by name. Observe the
evolution of firearm development between the Browning and Walther designed firearms.

a. Browning Hi-Power pistol

b. US Pistol Model 1911A1 pistol
c. Walther P38 pistol
d. Walther PP pistol
e. Walther P1 pistol

Use the following references:

Firearms Assembly, NRA #2

Firearms Assembly/Disassembly Part I Automatic Pistols

Exploded Firearms Drawings 2d Edition

Manufacturer’s information

This will complete Section G #5, 11, 12, 13 and 14 of your training
manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 175 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 17

Partially disassemble (field strip) and reassemble the following pistols from the Firearms Reference
Collection ( FRC). Obtain a copy of an exploded drawing of each of the pistols listed below. Ensure that
the drawing identifies all of the parts of the firearm. Be able to describe the differences in their
mechanisms and identify each part by name.

a. Beretta Model 92F Semiautomatic pistol

b. Ruger P-Series Semiautomatic pistol
c. Smith & Wesson Semiautomatic pistol
d. Desert Eagle Semiautomatic pistol

Use the following references:

Firearms Assembly, NRA #2

Firearms Assembly/Disassembly Part I Automatic Pistols
Exploded Firearms Drawings 2d Edition
Manufacturer’s information

This will complete section G #5, 11, 12, 13, and 14 of your training
manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 176 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 18

Partially disassemble (field strip) and reassemble the following pistols from the Firearm Reference
Collection (FRC). Obtain a copy of an exploded drawing of each of the pistols listed below. Ensure that
the drawing identifies all of the parts of the firearm. Be able to describe the differences in their
mechanisms and identify each part by name.

a. Glock, Model 17 or 19 Semiautomatic pistol

b. SIG-Sauer, Model P220, P225, P226, P228, or P229 Semiautomatic pistol
c. Heckler & Koch Semiautomatic pistol
d. Mauser "Broomhandle" Self-loading pistol

Use the following references:

Firearms Assembly, NRA #2

Firearms Assembly/Disassembly Part I Automatic Pistols
Exploded Firearms Drawings 2d Edition
Manufacturer’s information

This will complete Section G #5, 11, 12, 13, and 14 of your training
manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 177 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 19

Disassemble and reassemble the following (or similar) pistols from the Firearm Reference Collection
(FRC). Obtain a copy of an exploded drawing of each of the pistols listed below. Ensure that the drawing
identifies all of the parts of the firearm. Be able to describe the differences in their mechanisms and
identify each part by name. If you cannot locate the below pistols, contact your Technical Lead or
Supervisor.

a. 9mm Interdynamic, KG-99, submachine gun

b. 9mm Intratec, TEC 9, submachine gun
c. 45 Auto caliber Thompson submachine gun
d. 9mm Luger SWD Inc., M11/Nine, submachine gun
e. 9mm A.A. Arm, Inc., model AP-9, submachine gun
f. 9mm Heckler & Koch, MP-5, submachine gun
g. 9mm Steyr, MPi, submachine gun
h. 45 Auto caliber RPB Industries, M10, submachine gun

Use the following references:

Firearms Assembly/Disassembly Part VI Law Enforcement Weapons

Manufacturer’s information.
Military Small Arms of the World

This will complete Section G #6, 11, 12, 13, and 14 of your training
manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 178 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 20

Disassemble and reassemble the following (or similar) pistols from the Firearm Reference Collection
(FRC). Obtain a copy of an exploded drawing of each of the pistols listed below. Ensure that the drawing
identifies all of the parts of the firearm. Be able to describe the differences in their mechanisms and
identify each part by name.

a. 25 Auto caliber Raven Arms pistol

b. 25 Auto caliber Colt Jr. pistol
c. 25 Auto caliber Beretta pistol
d. 25 Auto caliber Lorcin pistol
e. 25 Auto caliber Bauer pistol
f. 25 Auto caliber Titan pistol
g. 25 Auto caliber Browning pistol

You will need to contact your Training Officer if you have difficulty locating these firearms.

Use the following references:

Firearms Assembly/Disassembly Books

Manufacturer’s Information
Gun Parts Corp. Catalog

This will complete Section G #10, 11, 12, 13, and 14 of your training
manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 179 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 21

Disassemble and reassemble the following (or similar) rifles from the Firearm Reference Collection
(FRC). Obtain a copy of an exploded drawing of each of the rifles listed below. Ensure that the drawing
identifies all of the parts of the firearm. Be able to describe the differences in their mechanisms and
identify each part by name.

a. 30-30 Win. caliber Winchester 94 rifle

b. 303 British caliber Lee Enfield rifle
c. 30-06 Springfield caliber Browning BAR rifle
d. 30-06 Springfield caliber Remington model 03-A3

You will need to contact your Training Officer if you have difficulty locating these firearms.

This will complete Section G # 7, 11, 12, 13, and 14 of your training
manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 180 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 22

Disassemble and reassemble the following (or similar) rifles from the Firearm Reference Collection
(FRC). Obtain a copy of an exploded drawing of each of the rifles listed below. Ensure that the drawing
identifies all of the parts of the firearm. Be able to describe the differences in their mechanisms and
identify each part by name.

a. 308 Win. caliber Winchester model 70 rifle

b. 223 Remington caliber Colt rifle model AR-15
c. 25-06 caliber Ruger model M77 rifle
d. 7.62x39mm caliber SKS rifle
e. 7.62x39mm caliber AK-47 rifle

You will need to contact your Technical Lead or Supervisor if you have difficulty locating these firearms.

This will complete Section G # 7, 11, 12, 13, and 14 of your training
manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 181 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 23

Disassemble (field strip) and reassemble the following (or similar) shotguns from the Firearm Reference
Collection (FRC). Obtain a copy of an exploded drawing of each of the rifles listed below. Ensure that
the drawing identifies all of the parts of the firearm. Be able to describe the differences and similarities of
their mechanisms and identify each part by name.

a. Remington, Model 870, shotgun

b. Winchester, Model 12, shotgun
c. Mossberg, Model 500, shotgun
d. Browning, Model A5, shotgun
e. Remington, Model 1100, shotgun

Research the historical derivation of the various shotgun gauges and define gauge. Prepare a chart
concerning the diameter of various modern gauges you might encounter. Define any differences in
foreign and domestic shotgun gauges.

This will complete Section G # 8, 11, 12, 13, and 14 of your training
manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 182 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 24

Disassemble (field strip) and reassemble the following (or similar) shotguns from the Firearm Reference
Collection (FRC). Obtain a copy of an exploded drawing of each of the rifles listed below. Ensure that
the drawing identifies all of the parts of the firearm. Be able to describe the differences and similarities of
their mechanisms and identify each part by name.

a. NEF, model Pardner, shotgun

b. Stevens/ J.C. Higgins model 311, side-by-side, double-barrel, shotgun
c. Beretta, over-under, double-barrel, shotgun

Define the purpose of a choke on a shotgun. Name the various chokes and break them down into their
dimensions and geometry.

This will complete Section G # 8, 11, 12, 13, and 14 of your training
manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 183 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 25

Partially disassemble (field strip) and reassemble the following (or similar) firearms from the Firearm
Reference Collection (FRC). Obtain a copy of an exploded drawing of each of the firearms listed below.
Ensure that the drawing identifies all of the parts of the firearm. Be able to describe the differences in
their mechanisms and identify each part by name.

a. 22 caliber Marlin, Model 60, rifle

b. 22 caliber Winchester, Model 62, rifle
c. 22 caliber Ruger, Model 10/22, rifle
d. 22 caliber Ruger, MKII, pistol
e. 22 caliber Browning, Challenger III, pistol
f. 22 caliber High Standard, Dura-Matic, pistol

This will complete Section G #9, 11, 12, 13, and 14 of your training
manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 184 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 26

You have been assigned Practical Exercise #3 as your weekly assignment. Practical exercises are to be
treated as casework and evidence (except for marking the actual firearm). Follow the directions carefully
and if you have any questions please do not hesitate to ask.

You will need PRACTICAL EXERCISE #3 to complete this assignment.

This will complete Section G #12, 13, and 14 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 185 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 27

You have been assigned Practical Exercise #4 as your weekly assignment. Practical exercises are to be
treated as casework and evidence (except for marking the actual firearm). Follow the directions carefully
and if you have any questions please do not hesitate to ask.

You will need PRACTICAL EXERCISE #4 to complete this assignment.

This will complete Section G #12, 13, and 14 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 186 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 28

You have been assigned Practical Exercise #5 as part of your weekly assignment. Practical exercises
are to be treated as casework and evidence (except for marking the actual firearm). Follow the directions
carefully and if you have any questions please do not hesitate to ask.

Research, define, and determine the implications of the following terms as they relate to safety in the
operation of a firearm:

a. excessive headspace i. defective safety

b. barrel obstruction j. high primer
c. barrel bulge k. rail splitting
d. broken extractor l. hairline cracks
e. push off m. improper timing
f. trigger shoe n. excessive pressure
g. false half-cock o. dented barrel
h. disconnector

Become familiar with the Firearm Section firearms range including its physical dimensions, construction of
walls and backstop, and bullet velocity limitations. Become familiar with the “Range Rules” and
determine how to test fire firearms thought to be possibly unsafe. Become familiar with the use of all the
equipment on the range. Know the range rules and emergency medical treatment procedures.

You will need PRACTICAL EXERCISE #5 to complete this assignment.

This will complete Section G #12, 13, 14, 15 and 16 of your training
manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 187 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 29

You have been assigned Practical Exercise #6 as part of your weekly assignment. Practical exercises
are to be treated as casework and evidence (except for marking the actual firearm). Follow the directions
carefully and if you have any questions please do not hesitate to ask.

Research, define, and determine the implications of the following terms as they relate to identifying the
manufacturer and/or source of a firearm:

a. proof marks
b. inspector marks
c. factory numbers and markings
d. serial number
e. part numbers
f. company logos

Discuss the following topics with your Technical Lead or an experienced examiner and become familiar
with the capabilities and limitations of the Firearm Section in regard to these areas:

a. Marking evidence firearms

b. Determining whether an evidence firearm has been "recently" fired
c. Determining the manufacturer of a firearm from an examination of a part from a firearm
d. Determining the manufacturer of a firearm from a photograph and comparing an
evidence firearm to a photograph

You will need PRACTICAL EXERCISE #6, to complete this assignment.

This will complete Section G #12, 13, 14, 19 and 20 of your training
manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 188 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 30

You have been assigned Practical Exercise #7. This exercise is self-explanatory. This is your formal
introduction to the comparison microscopes and you should take your time learning everything you can
about the instrument. Be ready to demonstrate to an experienced examiner what you have learned and if
you have any questions do not hesitate to ask. It would be prudent to obtain copies of all the literature
you can find concerning the microscopes. See the Performance Check Policy for the Firearm and
Toolmark Section for the procedure to check the calibration of the comparison microscope.

Differentiate between the following:

a. compound microscope
b. stereo microscope
c. comparison microscope/macroscope

Study the instruction manual for the various brands of stereo microscopes. Determine how to insert a
reticule and/or how to check the calibration of the microscope.

You will need PRACTICAL EXERCISE #7 to complete this assignment.

Microscopic comparison practice can be substituted for practical exercise #7
including reworked cases, examining test fires, etc., with trainer and/or technical
lead approval.

This will complete Section F #1, 2, 3, 4, part of 5, and 6 of your training

manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 189 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 31

You have been assigned Practical Exercise #8 as part of your weekly assignment. This exercise is self-
explanatory.

Become familiar with and demonstrate the use of the following equipment:

a. micrometer
b. inertia bullet puller
c. steel rule (NIST traceable measuring devices)
d. reticle in ocular lens of binocular microscope
e. digital calipers
f. balances located in the Firearm Section
g. comparison microscopes
h. stereo microscopes

You will need PRACTICAL EXERCISE #7 to complete this assignment.

This will complete Section F # 5 and 7 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 190 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 32

Define what is meant by or determine the significance of the following terms or phrases as they relate to
the examination and comparison of fired bullets. Prepare written answers concerning these items.

a. slippage
b. shaving
c. obturation
d. leading edge and trailing edge
e. melting
f. blow-by
g. striation
h. individual microscopic marks
i. ogive
j. bearing surface
k. class characteristics
l. general rifling characteristics
m. "insufficient individual microscopic marks"
n. corrosion
o. leading
p. "limited individual microscopic marks"
q. "single-action" firing
r. "double-action" firing

This will complete Section H # 1 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 191 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 33

As they relate to the examination and comparison of fired bullets or bullet fragments, know the
importance of and limitations of determining the following:

a. weight
b. caliber
c. caliber type
d. manufacturer
e. general rifling characteristics
f. pitch of rifling
g. depth of rifling

Write a short descriptive answer describing the how these terms apply to firearms examination.

Familiarize yourself with the Standard Ammunition File (SAF). Know how to search this file in order to
determine the manufacturer of fired bullets. Discuss the problems encountered when using this file and
possible solutions.

Familiarize yourself with the General Rifling Characteristics (GRC) database. Know how to use this
database to compile a list of firearms in a "no-gun case”. Demonstrate your proficiency in using the GRC
database while working on Practical Exercise #9 which is being assigned as part of this assignment.

PRACTICAL EXERCISE #9 is required for completion of this assignment.

This will complete Section H # 2, 3, 4 and 5 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 192 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 34

Tour an Ammunition Manufacturing Facility and observe the various processes taking place. Pay
particular attention to the assembly process and any potential toolmarks that may be transferred to
ammunition components.

Prepare a detailed report of your tour and discuss what you observed and any potential toolmarks which
may find their way to the cartridges we use and evaluate in testing here in the laboratory.

Discuss the tour with your Training Officer and describe the most interesting aspect of the Ammunition
Manufacturing process.

You have been assigned Practical Exercise #8a as part of your weekly assignment. This
exercise is self explanatory.

You will need PRACTICAL EXERCISE #8a to complete this assignment.

This will be a part of Section H #6 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 193 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 35

You have been assigned Practical Exercise #10 as your weekly assignment.

Using the GRC database, create a list of possible firearms which may have been used to fire these
bullets.

You will need PRACTICAL EXERCISE #10 to complete this assignment.

This will complete Section H #6 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 194 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 36

You have been assigned Practical Exercise #11 as part of your weekly assignment. This exercise is self-
explanatory.

Using one of the 9mm Luger pistols included with your practical exercise, test fire two each of the
following cartridges and attempt to identify the test bullets with each other. Take appropriate photographs
and notes.

a. 9mm Luger Federal Hydra-shok

b. 9mm Luger Federal Nyclad
c. 9mm Luger military ball 115 grain FMJ
d. 9mm Luger Winchester Silvertip
e. 9mm Luger CCI Total Metal Jacket

You will need PRACTICAL EXERCISE #11 to complete this assignment.

This will complete Section H #14 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 195 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 37

You have been assigned Practical Exercise #12 as part of your weekly assignment. This exercise is self-
explanatory.

Using the 357 magnum revolver included with your practical exercise, test fire two each of the following
cartridges and attempt to identify the test bullets with each other. Take appropriate photographs and
notes.

a. 38 Special caliber Remington lead round-nosed bullet

b. 38 Special caliber Remington jacketed bullet
c. 357 Magnum caliber Remington “Golden Saber” bullet
d. 357 Magnum caliber Winchester “Silvertip” bullet
e. 357 Magnum caliber Federal Nyclad bullet

You will need PRACTICAL EXERCISE #12 to complete this assignment.

This will complete Section H #13 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 196 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 38

Using the attached test fired bullets, demonstrate your proficiency in accurately determining the rifling
characteristics of these fired bullets. Compile a list of firearms which could have been used to fire these
bullets using the GRC database and make microscopic inter-comparisons of the bullets to determine if
any have been fired through the same barrel.

Write a short paper on how polygonal rifling affects microscopic comparisons. Do you have any
recommendations concerning these types of firearms?

This will complete Section H #8 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 197 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 39

Become knowledgeable about the facilities in the Firearm Section for the recovery of fired test bullets.
Know. Test fire a 357 Magnum revolver into the bullet recovery tank and string box and observe the
difference between the recovered bullets.

Use the following types of ammunition:

38 Special with round nose lead bullet

38 +P Special with jacketed hollow-point bullet
38 Special with full metal jacketed bullet
357 Magnum with jacketed soft-point bullet

Know and observe all safety rules.

Familiarize yourself with the ammunition storage areas in the Firearm Section. Know how to locate test
ammunition after correctly selecting test ammunition using the Standard Ammunition (SAF). Discuss with
your Technical Lead or an experienced examiner the reasons for using substitute ammunition or
down-loading ammunition for test firing.

You will need Practical Exercise #13 to complete this assignment.

This will complete Section H #9 and 10 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 198 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 40

Using one of the .22 caliber firearm from PE#15, test fire two each of the following cartridges and attempt
to identify the test bullets with each other. Take appropriate photographs and notes.

a. .22 Long Rifle caliber Remington with lead bullets

b. .22 Long Rifle caliber Winchester with lead bullets
c. .22 Long Rifle caliber Remington with brass-coated lead bullets
d. .22 Long Rifle caliber Winchester with copper-coated lead bullets
e. .22 Long caliber Remington with lead bullets.

You will need PRACTICAL EXERCISE #15 to complete this assignment. This
exercise is self-explanatory.

This will complete Section H #12 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 199 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 41

For this assignment you will be given bullets fired from five "consecutively-manufactured" barrels.

You need to conduct microscopic comparisons among all the bullets. Compare the two bullets from each
envelope together and then compare one of those items to a bullet from each of the other envelopes.

Observe the differences and similarities in the striations, photograph them and prepare a short
paper/report discussing your findings and observations.

Pay particular attention to any sub-class carry over that may be occurring between these fired bullets.
Describe it in the narrative of your notes and document it with photographs.

This will complete Section H #11 of your training manual

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 200 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 42

Using a 30 caliber rifle, test fire two each of the following cartridges and compare the tests with each
other. Discuss your plans with each other and assist one another with firing. Prepare notes and a report
on your findings. All comparisons should be verified by your training officer. Photograph your
comparisons.

a. 30 caliber Remington jacketed soft-point bullet

b. 30 caliber Remington accelerator cartridges

Obtain at least three different 7.62 x 39mm caliber rifles. Test fire each of these rifles three times using
both steel jacketed and copper jacketed ammunition. Perform microscopic comparisons of the test
bullets. Prepare notes, photographs and a report on your findings. All comparisons should be verified by
your technical lead or an experienced examiner.

This will complete Section H #16 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 201 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 43

You have received a plastic bag containing mutilated bullets, bullet fragments and bullet cores of various
calibers. Determine the methods and techniques used to differentiate between the lead bullets and bullet
cores. Identify each of the items present in the assignment bag. Be as complete and thorough as
possible. Prepare appropriate notes and photographs of your findings.

This will complete Section H #7 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 202 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 44

Obtain a copy of and familiarize yourself with the Firearm Section protocol for the examination of fired
bullets.

Obtain different types of mediums to use in test firing. These should include aluminum, sheet
metal similar to that used in automobiles, different types of plastic and glass (plain and
laminated). Using several different calibers (22, 25, 9mm and 38) test fire each into the test
mediums. Determine the feasibility of determining caliber and the rifling characteristics of a fired
bullet from an examination of these bullet holes. Be prepared to discuss how much information
you could provide to an investigator from your examination of these holes. Also change the
angles of the shots to determine if this will change your findings.

Discuss the significance of identifying manufacturing toolmarks on a fired bullet from a victim
with those on unfired bullets loaded into cartridges from the suspect. Read the article in the April
1985 issue of the Crime Laboratory Digest concerning “Manufacturing Toolmark Identification on the
Base of Jacketed Bullets.”

This will complete Section H #20, 22, and 23 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 203 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 45

Obtain a copy of and be familiar with the Firearm Section protocol for the examination of cartridges and
cartridge cases.

Describe "class characteristics" as the phrase applies to markings on a cartridge or a fired cartridge case.
Determine the types of marks which can be left on a cartridge case/cartridge during loading/extracting
and firing. Prepare a written report concerning your findings and conclusions.

Read the following four articles in the issue of the AFTE journal and be prepared to discuss them with
your Training Officer.

a. “Pressure Effects on Firing Pin Impression Depths”, Miller, July 95, pg. 242
b. “Drop-Fired or Fired and Dropped?”, Haag, Spring 2000, pg. 154
c. “Anvil Bounce”, Tuira and Ziegler, October 95, pg. 318
d. “Anvil Bounce #2”, Dutton, October 96, pg. 243

This will complete Section I #1, 9 and 10 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 204 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 46

Test fire each of the following firearms three times. Using the test fired cartridge cases, visually relate the
markings imparted to the fired cartridge case with the part on the firearm which produced these markings.
Also load and extract at least two cartridges from each of the following firearms and visually relate the
markings imparted to the unfired cartridges with the part on the firearm which produced these markings.

a. 9mm SWD Inc., M11/Nine

b. 9mm Glock pistol
c. 45 Auto caliber Colt Pistol, Model 1911 (or similar)
d. 9mm Beretta pistol, Model 92F
e. 22 Long Rifle caliber Ruger, MKII, pistol
f. 22 Long Rifle caliber Ruger, 10/22, rifle

Using the test cartridge cases and cartridges from above, microscopically compare all of the markings
with each other. Include the following types of markings in your microscopic comparisons: firing pin
impression, breechface marks, chamber marks, firing pin drag, firing pin aperture shear, anvil marks,
extractor marks, ejector marks, ramp marks, and magazine marks. Photograph the results of your
comparisons.

This will complete Section I #2 and 3 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 205 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 47

Test fire the following listed (or similar) firearms, using comparable CCI, Remington, Federal, and
Winchester ammunition of the appropriate caliber type for each firearm. Select ammunition with both
nickel and brass primers when possible. Test fire each firearm three times using each brand of
ammunition.

a. 38 Special caliber Smith & Wesson, Model 10, revolver

b. 357 Magnum caliber Smith & Wesson, Model 19, revolver
c. 9mm caliber Smith & Wesson, Model 39, pistol
d. 22 Long Rifle caliber Colt, Woodsman, pistol

Using the test cartridge cases from above, microscopically examine all of the markings with each other.
Include the following types of markings in your microscopic comparisons: firing pin impression,
breechface marks, chamber marks, anvil marks, extractor marks, ejector marks, ramp marks, and
magazine marks. Write a short report regarding your findings. Photograph the results of your
comparisons.

This will complete Section I #4 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 206 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 48

Test fire a 22 Long Rifle caliber Smith and Wesson (or similar) revolver using six 22 Long Rifle caliber
cartridges and six 22 Short caliber cartridges of the same manufacturer. Mark each cartridge to note the
chamber in which it is fired.

Using the test cartridge cases and bullets from the above, microscopically examine all of the markings
with each other. Include the following types of cartridge case markings in your microscopic comparisons:
firing pin impression, breechface marks, chamber marks, anvil marks. Pay particular attention to any
changes you see in the bullets. Write a short report describing what you have encounter in this exercise.
Photograph the results of your comparisons.

This will complete Section I #5 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 207 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 49

Prepare a written report concerning comparing and identifying reloading-type marks on cartridges and/or
cartridge cases. Your report should cover the “tell-tale” signs of a reloaded cartridge and what types of
things to look for. Identify the various types of marks which may be indicative of reloaded ammunition.

Become familiar with the equipment used in the reloaded of ammunition components and describe the
functions of this equipment. Examine several cartridges and compare reloading-type marks of known
reloaded cartridges in the Ammunition Reference Collection. Photograph the results of your
comparisons.

Research the feasibility of comparing and identifying manufacturing toolmarks on a fired cartridge case
from the scene of a crime with cartridges which can be associated with the suspect. Prepare a written
report on your findings and cite your references. Obtain samples and examples of these toolmarks.
Conduct microscopic comparison of these various types of manufacturing toolmarks which may be
present on cartridges or cartridge cases.

This will complete Section I #6 and 7 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 208 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 50

Test fire a 30 caliber Carbine U.S. Carbine three times from the Firearm Reference Collection and
examine the test fired cartridge cases with each other. Evaluate all of the marks present. Load and
extract two cartridges from this same firearm. Note and compare all of the marks imparted to the test
cartridges. Note any different or unusual markings. Make microscopic comparisons of these areas and
photograph the results.

Examine and evaluate test fired cartridge cases from a Heckler & Koch rifle, MP-5 sub-machine gun, or
P7 pistol (tests are attached to this assignment). Discuss the chamber marks produced by this type of
firearm. Obtain photographs of your findings.

This will complete Section I #8 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 209 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 51

Obtain test firings from the following types of firearms and then thoroughly clean the breech and
bore areas of each firearm. Test fire these firearms again and compare the bullets and cartridge
cases. Note and photograph any differences determined.

a. Semiautomatic centerfire pistol

b. Semiautomatic rimfire pistol
c. Centerfire revolvers
d. Rimfire revolvers
e. Semiautomatic centerfire rifle (gas operated)

This will complete Section I #11 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 210 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 52

You have been selected to attend an FBI Gunpowder and Primer Residues Course. You will need to
prepare an after action report on the class upon your completion. Your Technical Lead will coordinate
class time and location.

This will complete Section K #1 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 211 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 53

Demonstrate your proficiency in preparing the chemicals used in the modified Griess test, the Sodium
Rhodizonate test and copper testing, including the test media and the photographic paper.

Prepare a written report which describes in detail the chemical reactions which take place in the burning
of smokeless powder, the modified Griess test, the Sodium Rhodizonate test and copper testing.

Review the policies related to distance determination

These policies can be found in the Firearms and Toolmark Technical Manual. Be prepared to discuss
them.

This will complete Section K #2 and 3 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 212 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 54

Read the following articles and prepare a short report detailing the limitations of the examination
performed for distance determinations in casework. Note the necessary evidence in a case request like
this and all the variables that need to be considered and discussed with the requesting agency.

“Black Powder Background” in the AFTE Journal, Volume 23, Number 2, April 1991

“The Manufacture of Conventional Smokeless Powder” in the AFTE Journal, Volume 23, Number 2,
April 1991

“The Sodium Rhodizonate Test: A Chemically Specific Chromophoric Test for Lead in Gunshot
Residues” in the AFTE Journal, Volume 22, Number 3, July 1990

“A Protocol for Gunshot Residue Examinations in Muzzle-To-Target Distance Determinations” in

the AFTE Journal, Volume 22, Number 3, July 1990

"Graphical Analysis of the Shotgun/Shotshell Performance Envelope in the Distance

Determination Cases" in the AFTE Journal, October 1989

This will complete Section K#7 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 213 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 55

Familiarize yourself with the use of the Standard Ammunition File (SAF) in regard to the
determination of gauge and manufacturer of fired shotshell components. Know the limitations in
regard to making such determinations. Demonstrate your proficiency in using the SAF to
conduct this type of search to your Training Officer.

Research the current U. S. Shot sizes and weights. Obtain a chart reflecting this data.
Familiarize yourself with the variations worldwide in shot sizes and composition. Learn the
significance of the “Rule of 17’ as it applies to shot size.

This will complete Section J #2 and 7 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 214 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 56

Determine what type of examinations may be conducted and the conclusions which may be reached from
the examination of the following components. Prepare a written report concerning these examinations
and obtain examples of each of the components. Photograph areas of interest where applicable.

a. shot, deformed and undeformed

b. fired card or fiber wads
c. fired plastic wads
d. fired shotshells
e. unfired shotshells
f. shot buffer material
g. shot collar and shot cup

As part of this week assignments, you are to complete PRACTICAL EXERCISE

#17.

This will complete Section J #1 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 215 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 57

Using a 12 Gauge Remington 1100 (or similar) shotgun from the Firearm Reference Collection (FRC),
obtain at least two test fired shotshells with each of the following types of ammunition. Also, recover a
representative number of the fired pellets and fired wadding from each test firing. Compare markings on
these test fired shotshells with each other. Examine the fired components which were recovered and
compare them to unfired components of the same type. Discuss the significance of your findings. If you
cannot locate the below ammunition, discuss with your Technical Lead or an experienced examiner as to
what ammunition to shoot.

a. 12-gauge Remington, 2 3/4" Express, #4 Buck

b. 12-gauge Remington, 2 3/4" Dove/Quail, #8 shot
c. 12-gauge Federal, 2 3/4" Hi-Power, 00 Buck
d. 12-gauge Federal, 2 3/4" Game Load, #6 shot
e. 12-gauge Activ, 2 3/4" Field Load, #7 1/2 shot
f. 12-gauge Activ, 2 3/4" Penetrator, #6 shot
g. 12-gauge Winchester, 2 3/4" Xpert, #8 shot
h. 12-gauge Winchester, 2 3/4" Dove/Quail, #7 1/2 shot

This will complete Section J #5 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 216 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 58

Test fire the following (or similar) shotguns using at least two test fired shotshells from each shotgun and
microscopically examine the marks imparted to these fired shotshells. Include in your examinations the
following types of marks: firing pin impression, breechface marks (primer,
battery cup, and head), extractor marks, ejector marks, chamber marks, and any other
mechanism marks. Photograph these marks and discuss the significance of identifying any of
these types of marks.

a. Mossberg, Model 500, pump—action shotgun

b. Remington, Model 1100, semiautomatic shotgun
c. Marlin, Model 55, bolt-action shotgun
d. J. C. Higgins, Model 1011, top-break single shot shotgun
e. Beretta, Silver Snipe Model, over-under double-barrel shotgun
f. Stevens, Model 311, side by side double barrel shotgun

Data in italic will vary from firearm to firearm depending on your Laboratory
Firearm Reference Collection (FRC).

This will complete Section J #4 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 217 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 59

Obtain a sawed-off shotgun from the Firearm Reference Collection (FRC). Test fire this using three types
of ammunition in order to recover the wads. Include both plastic wads and fiber wads in your test
ammunition. Conduct microscopic examinations of the recovered wads. Photograph the results of your
examinations.

Saw off one inch of the barrel. Test fire this shotgun again using a Remington shotshell with a power
piston wad. Recover the shotshell wads and make microscopic comparisons of marks imparted to the
test wads.

This assignment is to be worked together to obtain the test fires from a single shotgun. Microscopic
comparison should be done independently.

This will complete Section J #3 of your training manual

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 218 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 60

Coordinate with your Technical Lead or an experienced examiner to go to a shotgun range to pattern
shotguns. A variety of shotguns, chokes, and ammunition are required for this assignment. You will
create patterns at differing distances using different combinations of shotguns, chokes, and ammunition.
Different target surfaces will be used.

Prepare a report which discusses in detail the procedures used in reloading shotshells. List your
references.

Know how to recognize reloaded shotshells from an examination of a shotshell and/or its components.
Demonstrate you results to the Technical Lead or and Experience Examiner.

Familiarize yourself with shotshell reloading equipment.

Reload shotshells using reloading equipment and examine the reloaded shotshells for reloading-type
marks. Make microscopic examination of the marks produced by the reloading equipment. Photograph
the results of you examination.

This will complete Section J#6 and 8 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 219 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 61

Review your notes in reference to the section entitled “Manufacture of Modern Firearms”. Discuss your
review with the Firearm Section Training Officer.

Define the word “tool” and “toolmark identification” in the narrow sense of the expression. Also, define
toolmark identification in its broadest sense, and determine the kinds of conclusions which may be
reached in toolmark identification casework. (See AFTE Glossary)

Be prepared to discuss the significance of examining submitted tools first for foreign deposits/trace
evidence.

Discuss reports concerning cases involving a toolmark examination wherein no tool is submitted. Include
the types of conclusions which can be reached. Also include such things as the type of tool, size of the
tool, action employed by the tool, value of toolmarks for comparison purposes, and unusual tool features.

Investigate pressure/contact examinations in regard to objects which may have been in contact with each
other for an extended time. Research several cases of this type and set these out in your notes.

Discuss and demonstrate the making of casts of toolmarks. Also discuss the potential of such casts and
of photographs alone in making toolmark identifications.

This will complete Section L #1 through 4 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 220 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 62

Prepare a written report defining the following terms as they relate to toolmark identification. Give three
examples of tools or methods which could produce each category:

a. Shearing
b. Pinching
c. Fracture
d. Scrape mark
e. Impression
f. Slicing

Be prepared to discuss the term "class characteristics" as it applies to toolmark identification. Using the
tools or methods selected as examples in the paragraph above, describe their respective class
characteristics in detail.

Select at least two tools which are representative of each category in the above paragraph from the
Firearm Section. Produce toolmarks with each tool and observe the class characteristics of the toolmark.
Vary the angle and force with which each tool is used. Be prepared to demonstrate how this might
change or alter the questioned toolmarks.

This will complete Section L #5 and 6 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 221 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 63

Read the Handbook of Methods for the Restoration of Obliterated Serial Numbers, by Treptow. Be
prepared to discuss the theory of serial number restoration.

Prepare a sketch of the entire stressed area above and below the indentation of a stamped item and
depict what remains when the indented area is removed.

Make a list of the various methods used to mark items by private industry. This list should include but not
be restricted to: casting, stamping, embossing, debossing, coining, vibratory pencil, laser and electrical
discharge machining.

Prepare a written report which covers the following areas: (2-3 pages)

a. The effect each of the above methods of marking techniques has on the subsurface of
the marked area.
b. How and why each of the above marking methods will affect the ability of the examiner to
restore any obliterated markings.

Define in your notebook the term "plastic deformation" of metal and briefly discuss the difference between
cold rolled steel and cast iron metal.

Prepare a short oral presentation discussing the effect that the following types of alterations will have on
the subsurface of the marked item and how it will impact on the results of the examiner.

a. grinding
b. restamping
c. peening
d. gouging
e. heating
f. puddling
g. welding
h. removal
i. combinations of the above

This will complete Section M #1 through 6 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 222 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 64

Discuss the telltale signs that can be left by the various alteration methods and how these signs will
determine your specific approach to the restoration attempt.

Be prepared to discuss the different types of lighting (e.g., incandescent, infrared, UV, and fluorescent)
and how they can improve or enhance the restoration results.

Prepare a short written paper discussing the various methods of surface preparation and how they will
affect the results in the restoration attempt.

Determine the chemical reaction that takes place when etching is done and place in your notebook the
appropriate chemical formulations for the general reactions of acid with steel and aluminum.

Become familiar with the following chemicals:

a. CuNH4Cl2 g. K2SO4
b. CuCl2 h. Aqua Regia
c. NaOH i. H2SO4
d. HCl j. FeCI3
e. HNO3 k. H2O2
f. KCN l. Tartaric acid
m. Ammonium Persulfate

Be prepared to discuss the following areas:

If the reaction rate for a stressed area is faster or slower than the etching rate of the rest of the
surface and why.
Specialized equipment that might be used in number restoration.
The appropriate photography techniques and procedures to be used before, during, and after
restoring obliterated serial numbers.
The various kinds of magnifying and enhancing equipment used for number restoration and when
and why each would be used.

This will complete Section M #7 through 15 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 223 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 65
Obtain a copy of the chemical hygiene policies of the Firearm Section. Know where the proper safety
equipment (e.g., eye wear, masks, gloves, and lab coats) is maintained.

Define and place in your notebook these common chemical terms:

a. Frys Reagent d. Turner’s Reagent
b. Acidic Ferric Chloride e. 25% Nitric Acid
c. Ferric Chloride f. Atlanta Two Step
Determine the types of files contained in the National Crime Information Center NCIC and how they might
assist the examiner in number restoration.
Prepare a written report discussing the numbering systems and methods used by various firearms
manufacturers including but not limited to Colt, Ruger, Smith & Wesson, US Repeating Arms
(Winchester) and Remington.
Be prepared to discuss the best chemicals and techniques to use in number restoration of the following
firearms:
a. Colt pistol
b. Smith & Wesson revolver
c. RG Industries revolver
d. Ruger stainless steel revolver
e. chrome/nickel 25 caliber auto loading pistol
f. shotgun alloy receiver
g. shotgun case hardened receiver
h. Winchester rifle
Be prepared to discuss with your Training Officer the following subjects:
How the combination of brief application of CuNH4Cl2 followed by normal NaOH application can
shorten the processing time on aluminum.
Why alternating HNO3 and HCl can work so well on chrome or nickel plated firearms.
Obtain several firearms, alter the serial numbers using different methods and then attempt to restore
them. Prepare notes and photographs to substantiate your conclusions and results.
Research the effect of electricity on the reaction time of the different chemical techniques you have
learned. Be prepared to discuss and demonstrate this method.
This will complete Section M #17 through 21 and #23 through 25 of
your training manual.
Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 224 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 66

You will receive a total of sixteen metal bars made from four different metals. Each bar has four altered
serial numbers. Using the reagents found in Treptow and Training Assignment 65, restore these
numbers. Make note of how the different reagents react with the metals and determine which reagents
work the best. Consult with your Technical Lead or an experienced examiner for how to record the
restoration process. If possible, make use of the direct current and/or magnaflux during some of the
restorations.

This will complete Section M #22 and 26 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 225 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Training Assignment 67
The purpose of this training is hands on experience for the well established methodology of soaking
garments to eliminate blood masking of gunshot residue patterns. Using four soaking agents will allow
each analyst the opportunity to personally evaluate their efficiency. The mapping exercise will assist in
evaluating the value of microscopic examinations.

The trainee will be given four gunshot residue patterns. These patterns will be divided in half, numbered
and one half of each pattern soaked with blood and dried.

Each four blood soaked gunshot residue patterns will be microscopically examined and identifiable
gunpowder mapped onto a transparency marked for orientation.

Prior to the soaking exercise each person will chemically process one test pattern for nitrites, lead and
copper to evaluate the masking properties of the blood.

Each of the four blood soaked gunshot residues patterns will be rinsed with:
• Saline solution
• Phosphate buffered saline solution
• Haemasol
• Fisher brand Sparkleen Detergent

The rinse solutions should be examined for powder particles and noted if any. The material will be left to
dry overnight.

Each of the four blood soaked gunshot patterns will be microscopically examined again and any
identifiable gunpowder particles mapped onto the original transparency with a different colored pen.

Each of the dried gunshot residue patterns will be chemically processed for nitrites.

Each of the corresponding halves to the rinsed patterns will be chemically processed for nitrites and the
two halves of each pattern compared to each other.

The two halves will also be chemically tested for lead and copper residues.

Write a brief discussion about your results of this exercise; include photos and notes.

References:
Haag, L A method for improving the Griess and Sodium Rhodizonate Tests for GSR patterns on bloody
garments, AFTE Journal volume 23, number 3, July 1991, page 808.

Hueske, E Gunshot residue testing of blood stained garments, AFTE Journal volume 26, number 1,
January 1994, page 26

Haag, L Rebuttal to Hueske article, AFTE Journal volume 26, number 2, April 1994, page 155

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 226 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

APPENDIX B – PRACTICAL EXERCISES

FATM Training Manual Page 227 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 1
You have received a plastic bag which contains ammunition and ammunition components. These items
are to be used in this exercise. Each term listed below is represented in at least one of the items of
ammunition or ammunition components in the bag. Mark the items with the proper letter by the term.
Some of the items will have more than one definition and each will have at least one.

a. Cartridge t. Bullet
b. Cartridge case u. Round-nosed bullet
c. Primer v. "Hollow-point" bullet
d. Shotshell w. Jacketed bullet
e. Fired shotshell x. Wadcutter bullet
f. Bottleneck cartridge y. Semi-wadcutter bullet
g. Rebated-rim cartridge z. Soft point bullet
h. Rimless cartridge aa. Spitzer bullet
i. Rimmed cartridge bb. Cast lead bullet
j. Semi-rimmed cartridge cc. Truncated-nosed bullet
k. Shoulder dd. Cannelure
l. Neck ee. Ogive
m. Mouth ff. Copper-coated lead bullet
n. Head gg. Nylon-coated lead bullet
o. Headstamp hh. Crimp
p. Brass-coated lead bullet ii. Lubaloy
q. Tapered cartridge jj. Wadding
r. Extractor groove kk. Berdan primer
s. "Silvertip" bullet ll. Battery cup
mm. Boxer primer

Make sure the marks are legible.

This will complete Section E #1 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 228 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 2
Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to update and maintain the Standard Ammunition File
(SAF) used for reference. This reference file will contain examples of a particular caliber
type typically examined in Firearm Section casework, such as 22 Long Rifle, 38 Special,
9mm Luger, 357 Magnum, 7.62 x 39mm and others.

Procedure: 1. Each trainee will meet with the Technical Lead or Supervisor to select a caliber type
for this project. This coordination will preclude any duplication of effort.

2. Prepare corrugated cards similar to those already present in the SAF to

accommodate the specimens. The cards will be labeled with appropriate information
on the front (such as manufacturer, caliber, cartridge name, bullet type and weight,
etc.). An unfired specimen shall be paired with each pulled specimen.

3. Survey the ammunition supply for examples to be included, consisting of common

brands and their variations as far as cartridge case and bullet types within a given
caliber type.

4. Number the various cartridge/pulled bullet pair sets and organize them into the
proper storage units within the Section and update the SAF database.

5. Coordinate with the Technical Lead or Supervisor and other trainees to attain a
degree of uniformity in the appearance of these specimens.

This will complete Section E #4 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 229 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 3
Purpose: This exercise is designed to introduce the student to proper techniques in conducting
examinations of revolvers submitted as evidence. The exercise is designed to familiarize
the student with the proper unit forms used in note taking, proper methodology for
determining operability, trigger pull and safety feature testing.

Procedure: 1. The trainee will receive three double-action revolvers.

2. The trainee will use the “Firearms Worksheet” and prepare a work sheet on each
firearm examined.

3. The trigger pull in both single and double action modes should be determined on
each of the submitted revolvers.

4. Test fire each revolver three times in the single-action mode and three times in the
double-action mode. Keep the single-action test fires and double-action test fires
separate. These will be used in a later practical exercise.

5. Prepare a written report concerning each of the submitted revolvers using Firearm
Section standard terminology and style.

6. Upon completion of the above activities provide your reports, worksheets, notes, test
fires and revolvers to the Technical Lead or experienced examiner for a critique of
your work.

This will complete Section G #12, 13, and 14, of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 230 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 4
Purpose: This exercise is designed to provide the student with an opportunity to develop proper
techniques conducting examinations of revolvers submitted as evidence. The exercise is
designed to familiarize the student with revolvers that may be damaged, dirty, rusted or
unusual in design.

Procedure: 1. The trainee will receive three double-action type revolvers.

2. The trainee will use the “Firearms Worksheet” and prepare a work sheet on each
firearm examined.

3. The trigger pull in both single and double action modes should be determined on
each of the submitted revolvers.

4. Test fire each revolver three times and retain the test fires.

5. Prepare a written report concerning each of the submitted revolvers using Firearm
Section standard terminology and style.

6. Upon completion of the above activities provide your reports, worksheets, notes, test
fires and revolvers to the Technical Lead or experienced examiner for a critique of
your work.

This will complete Section G #12, 13, and 14 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 231 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 5
Purpose: This exercise is designed to provide the student with an opportunity to develop proper
techniques conducting examinations of handguns submitted as evidence. The exercise
is designed to familiarize the student with different types of handguns that may have
safety problems.

Procedure: 1. The trainee will receive three handguns.

2. The trainee will use the “Firearms Worksheet” and prepare a work sheet on each
firearm examined.

3. The trigger pull in both single and/or double action modes should be determined on
each of the submitted handguns.

4. Test fire each handgun three times and retain the test fires.

5. Prepare a written report concerning each of the submitted handguns using Firearm
Section standard terminology and style.

6. Upon completion of the above activities provide your reports, work sheets, notes, test
fires and handguns to the Technical Lead or experienced examiner for a critique of
your work.

This will complete Section G #12 through 16 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 232 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 6
Purpose: This exercise is designed to provide the student with an opportunity to develop proper
techniques conducting examinations of handguns submitted as evidence. The exercise
is designed to familiarize the student with semiautomatic pistols that may have been
altered.

Procedure: 1. The trainee will receive three pistols.

2. The trainee will use the “Firearms Worksheet” and prepare a work sheet on each
firearm examined.

3. The trigger pull should be determined on each of the submitted pistols.

4. Test fire each firearm three times and retain the test fires. Also test each firearm to
determine if it functions as a full automatic firearm.

5. Prepare a written report concerning each of the submitted revolvers using Firearm
Section standard terminology and style.

6. Upon completion of the above activities provide your reports, work sheets, notes, test
fires and pistols to the Technical Lead or experienced examiner for a critique of your
work.

This will complete Section G #12, 13, 14, 19 and 20 of your training
manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 233 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 7
Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to acquaint the student with the comparison
microscope. This exercise is designed to familiarize the student with the controls and
capabilities of the comparison microscopes located in the Firearm Section. It is not
designed to test the student's ability to make comparative examinations.

Procedure: 1. Each trainee will use cartridge cases that have been fired from the same
firearm. (Use test fires provided.)

2. The student will use the different styles of comparison microscopes present in the
laboratory.

3. Learn and understand all of the control mechanisms that are present on each of the
comparison microscopes. Be able to discuss each of these controls and how they
function.

4. Determine if there are other lighting methods available within the laboratory. If there
are different light sources available, use these with the various microscopes and
discuss your findings.

5. Observe the comparisons with each of the objectives present. Note the differences
in depth of field, field of view and individual stria comparison at each objective size.
Also adjust the aperture and observe the difference in light and depth of field
produced by constricting the opening.

6. Take images of the cartridge cases showing the comparison of the breech face
impression and also of the firing pin impression (ejector marks if present). Keep all of
your images for discussion and be able to discuss problems encountered in
photographing comparisons through the comparison microscope.

7. Demonstrate to an experience examiner your ability to calibrate one of the

comparison microscopes.

This will complete Section F # 1 through 6 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 234 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 8

Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to acquaint the student with the capabilities of the
comparison microscope. This exercise is designed to familiarize the student with various
types of evidence which will be examined with the comparison microscopes located in the
Firearm Section. The student's ability to make comparative examinations is also a part of
this assignment.

Procedure: 1. Each trainee will receive a plastic bag containing four items. Each item contains
three bullets.

Item 1. full metal jacketed bullets

Item 2. coated lead bullets
Item 3. Nyclad bullets
Item 4. plain lead bullets

2. The student should conduct microscopic comparisons of each individual bullet within
an item to determine if they have been fired from the same firearm. Proper notes and
photographs should be made. Before proceeding, have all comparisons verified by
one of the training officers.

3. After the microscopic comparisons have been completed on each individual item you
should attempt to compare one item to another to determine how many firearms
might have been used to discharge these bullets.

4. Prepare a written report indicating your findings on the differences encountered with
the different bearing surfaces that you have examined. Detail those areas that
seemed easier for comparison and those that were harder. What are your findings
concerning the comparison of different type bullets? What are some of the pitfalls
that might be present during these types of examinations?

This will be a part of Section F5 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 235 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 8A

Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to acquaint the student with the capabilities of the
laboratory reference material concerning “no gun” cases. This exercise is designed to
familiarize the student with the Standard Ammunition File (SAF), the Manufacturers
Literature file, the Firearms Section Reference Library, and the General Rifling
Characteristics (GRC) database.

Procedure: 1. Each trainee will receive twelve bullets.

2. The student should determine the weight, diameter, number of land and groove
impressions, and direction of twist. Measure the land and groove impressions for use
with the GRC database. Use the forms that are currently in use by the section
examiners.

3. Report verbally your findings as to the caliber, brand and type of each projectile of
each exhibit. Provide a listing of the possible firearms which could have fired each
exhibit.

Provide all documentation to your Training Officer upon completion of this exercise.

This will be a part of Section H #6 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 236 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 9

Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to acquaint the student with the capabilities of the
laboratory reference material concerning "no gun cases." This exercise is designed to
familiarize the student with the Standard Ammunition File (SAF), the Known Specimen
File and the General Rifling Characteristics (GRC) database located in the Firearm
Section.

Procedure: 1. Each trainee will receive a plastic bag containing seven bullets.

2. The student should determine the weight, diameter, number of lands and grooves,
and direction of twist. Measure the land and groove impressions for use with the
GRC database. Use the forms that are currently in use by unit examiners.

3. Prepare a written report indicating your findings as to the caliber, brand and type of
bullet of each exhibit. Prepare a listing of the possible guns that could have fired
each bullet. Also, include your notes when you turn in the assignment.

4. As with all Practical Exercises treat this as a case. Remember to mark your evidence
and maintain custody records.

This will complete Section H #2 through 5 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 237 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 10

Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to acquaint the student with the capabilities of the
laboratory reference material concerning "no gun cases.” This exercise is designed to
familiarize the student with the Standard Ammunition File (SAF), the Known Specimen
File and the General Rifling Characteristics (GRC) database located in the Firearm
Section.

Procedure: 1. Each trainee will receive six plastic bags each containing a bullet.

2. The student should determine the weight, diameter, number of lands and grooves,
and direction of twist. Measure the land and groove impressions for use with the
GRC database. Use the forms that are currently in use by the Firearms Section.

3. Prepare a written report indicating your findings as to the caliber, brand and type of
bullet of each exhibit. Prepare a listing of the possible guns that could have fired
each bullet. Also, include your notes when you turn in the assignment.

4. As with all Practical Exercises treat this as a case. Remember to mark your evidence
and properly seal the items when completed.

This will be a part of Section H #6 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 238 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 11

Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to begin development of casework procedures and
"real" case scenarios. The student will be provided with several items of evidence which
will require firearm examinations, microscopic bullet comparisons and limited microscopic
cartridge case comparisons. In addition, the student will no longer be able to ask
another qualified examiner for assistance.

Procedure: 1. The student will receive the following (or similar) items of evidence:

Item #1 full metal jacketed bullet

Item #2 cartridge case
Item #3 Browning semi-auto pistol, 9mm Luger
Item #3A three (3) cartridges from Item 3
Item #4 Browning semi-auto pistol, 9mm Luger
Item #4A three (3) cartridges from Item 4

2. The student should examine all the evidence involved in this "case" and determine if
the bullet (Item #1) and the cartridge case (Item #2) were fired by either pistol
submitted.

3. Prepare a written report indicating your findings. Also, include your notes when you
turn in the assignment.

4. As with all Practical Exercises treat this as a case. Remember to mark your evidence,
but not the firearms.

This will complete Section H #14 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 239 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 12

Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to begin development of casework procedures and
"real" case scenarios. The student will be provided with several items of evidence which
will require firearm examinations, microscopic bullet comparisons and limited microscopic
cartridge case comparisons. In addition, the student will no longer be able to ask
another qualified examiner for assistance.

Procedure: 1. The student will receive the following items of evidence:

Item #1 full metal jacketed bullet

Item #2 cartridge case
Item #3 round nose lead bullet
Item #4 three (3) cartridge cases from Item 5
Item #5 Ruger, double-action revolver, 357 Magnum

2. The student should examine all the evidence involved in this "case" and determine if
the bullets (Item #1 and Item #3) and the cartridge cases (Item #2 and Item #4) were
fired by the revolver (Item #5) submitted.

3. Prepare a written report indicating your findings. Also, include your notes when you
turn in the assignment.

4. As with all Practical Exercises treat this as a case. Have your comparisons verified
and remember to mark your evidence.

This will complete Section H #13 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 240 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 13

Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to begin development of casework procedures and
"real" case scenarios. The student will be provided with several items of evidence which
will require firearm examinations, microscopic bullet comparisons and limited microscopic
cartridge case comparisons. In addition, the student will no longer be able to ask
another qualified examiner for assistance.

Procedure: 1. The student will receive the following items of evidence:

Item #1 One fired full metal jacketed bullet.

Item #2 One fired cartridge case.
Item #3 One Ruger double action revolver.
Item #4 One Ruger double action revolver.

2. The student should examine all the evidence involved in this "case" and determine if
the bullet (Item #1) and the cartridge case (Item #2) were fired by either revolver
submitted.

3. Prepare a written report indicating your findings. Also, include your notes when you
turn in the assignment.

4. As with all Practical Exercises treat this as a case. Remember to mark your
evidence, except for the firearms.

This will complete Section I#12 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 241 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 14

Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to begin development of casework procedures and
"real" case scenarios. The student will be provided with several items of evidence which
will require firearm examinations, microscopic bullet comparisons and limited microscopic
cartridge case comparisons. In addition, the student will no longer be able to ask
another qualified examiner for assistance.

Procedure: 1. The student will receive the following items of evidence:

Item #1 full metal jacketed bullet

Item #2 round nose lead bullet
Item #3 round nose lead bullet
Item #4 full metal jacketed bullet
Item #5 cartridge case
Item #6 cartridge case
Item #7 H & R revolver
Item #8 Walther pistol

2. The student should examine all the evidence involved in this "case" and determine
which (if any) of the bullets and cartridge cases were fired by either firearm
submitted.

3. Prepare a written report indicating your findings. Also, include your notes when you
turn in the assignment.

4. As with all Practical Exercises treat this as a case. Remember to mark your
evidence, except the firearms.

This will complete Section H #17 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 242 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 15

Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to begin development of casework procedures and
"real" case scenarios. The student will be provided with several items of evidence which
will require firearm examinations, microscopic bullet comparisons and limited microscopic
cartridge case comparisons. In addition, the student will no longer be able to ask
another qualified examiner for assistance.

Procedure: 1. The student will receive the following (or similar) items of evidence:

Item #1 three lead bullets

Item #2 Smith & Wesson revolver
Item #3 three cartridge cases
Item #4 three lead bullets
Item #5 Smith & Wesson revolver
Item #6 three cartridge cases

2. The student should examine all the evidence involved in this "case" and determine
which (if any) of the bullets and cartridge cases were fired by either firearm
submitted.

3. Prepare a written report indicating your findings. Also, include your notes when you
turn in the assignment.

4. As with all Practical Exercises treat this as a case. Remember to mark your
evidence, except the firearms.

This will complete Section H #12 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 243 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 16
Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to continue development of casework procedures and
‘real’ case scenarios. The student will be provided with several items of evidence which
will require firearm examinations, microscopic bullet comparisons and cartridge case
comparisons. This practical exercise is to be considered as an examination. You may ask
the training officer for guidance, but all conclusions will be made by the trainee without
benefit of verification. In addition, the student needs to prepare for moot court concerning
this evidence. Unlike casework, the “no conclusion” answer is not an acceptable
response on this exercise.

Procedure: 1. The student will receive the following items of evidence:

Item #1 Caliber .45 Auto pistol, SN:
Item #2 Caliber .45 Auto pistol, SN:
Item #3 Caliber .45 Auto pistol, SN:
Item #4 Caliber .45 Auto pistol, SN:
Item #5 Caliber .45 Auto pistol, SN:
Item #6 cartridge case
Item #7 cartridge case
Item #8 cartridge case
Item #9 cartridge case
Item #10 cartridge case
Item #11 bullet
Item #12 bullet
Item #13 bullet
Item #14 bullet
Item #15 bullet

Data in italic will vary from firearm to firearm depending on your Laboratory
Firearm Reference Collection (FRC).

2. The student should examine all the evidence involved in this “case” and determine which (if
any) of the bullets and cartridge cases were fired by the firearms submitted.

3. Prepare a written report indicating your findings. Also, include your notes when you turn in the
assignment.

4. As with all Practical Exercises treat this as a case. Remember to mark your evidence and
maintain custody records.

This will complete Section I#12 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 244 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 17

Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to observe the differences and similarities in fired
shotshell cases and determine identifiability by microscopic examination.

Procedure: 1. Each trainee will receive a plastic bag containing seven (7) fired shotshell cases.

2. The student should conduct all suitable examinations to determine how many
firearms were involved and identify which (if any) of the fired shotshell cases were
fired from the same firearm. Use the forms that are currently in use by unit
examiners.

3. Prepare a written report indicating your findings concerning each exhibit. Prepare a
listing the possible types of guns that could have fired each shotshell case. Also,
include your notes when you turn in the assignment.

4. As with all Practical Exercises treat this as a case. Remember to mark your evidence
and maintain custody records.

This will complete Section J #1 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 245 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 18

Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to conduct examinations of evidence submitted from
crime scenes that are part of an ongoing investigation. The receipt of bullets and
cartridge cases will be the first phase of this exercise. Conduct all examinations as if it
were a real case and prepare the proper notes and reports that might be required.

Procedure: 1. The trainee will receive a plastic bag containing six (6) fired bullets and cartridge
cases.

2. The student should conduct all suitable examinations to determine how many firearms
were involved and identify which (if any) of the bullets and cartridge cases were fired from
the same firearm. Use the forms that are currently in use by unit examiners.

3. Prepare a written report indicating your findings concerning each exhibit. Prepare a
listing of the possible types of guns that could have fired the bullets and cartridge cases.
Also, include your notes when you turn in the assignment.

4. As with all Practical Exercises treat this as a case. Remember to mark your evidence
and maintain custody records.

This will complete Section I #12 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 246 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 19

Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to conduct examinations of evidence submitted from
crime scenes that are part of an ongoing investigation. The receipt of three suspect
firearms will be the second phase of this exercise. Conduct all examinations as if it were
a real case and prepare the proper notes and reports that might be required.

Procedure: 1. The trainee will receive a plastic bag containing three firearms.

2. The student should conduct all suitable examinations to determine if any of these
firearms were used to fire any of the bullets and cartridge cases received in Practical
exercise #18. Use the forms that are currently in use by unit examiners.

3. Prepare a written report indicating your findings concerning each exhibit. Also, include
your notes when you turn in the assignment.

4. As with all Practical Exercises treat this as a case. Remember to mark your evidence
and maintain custody records.

This will complete Section I #12 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 247 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 20

Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to conduct examinations of toolmark evidence

submitted from crime scenes that are part of an ongoing investigation. Conduct all
examinations as if it were a real case and prepare the proper notes and reports that
might be required.

Procedure: 1. The trainee will receive a paper bag containing three items, bolt cutters and two
plastic bags with lead items that contain questioned toolmarks.

2. The student should conduct all suitable examinations to determine if any of these
questioned toolmarks were made by the submitted bolt cutters. Use the forms that
are currently in use by unit examiners.

3. Prepare a written report indicating your findings concerning each exhibit. Also,
include your notes when you turn in the assignment.

4. As with all Practical Exercises treat this as a case. Remember to mark your evidence
and maintain custody records.

This will complete Section L #18 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 248 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 21

Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to conduct examinations of evidence submitted from
crime scenes that are part of an ongoing investigation. Conduct all examinations as if it
were a real case and prepare the proper notes and reports that might be required.

Scenario: A shooting occurred involving at least two individuals. Suspect #1 the owner of the .380
Automatic pistol claims suspect #2 the owner of the .22 caliber rifle fired first from across
a street and he returned fire in self-defense.

Procedure: 1. The student will receive a paper bag containing the evidence listed below.

2. The student should conduct all suitable examinations on all submitted evidence.

3. Prepare a written report indicating your findings concerning each exhibit. Also,
include your notes when you turn in the assignment.

4. As with all Practical Exercises treat this as a case. Remember to mark your evidence
and maintain custody records.

Evidence:

Item 1 Marlin brand 22 caliber rifle

Item 2 three (3) lead bullets
Item 3 three (3) cartridge cases
Item 4 Semiautomatic pistol caliber 380 automatic
Item 5 three (3) jacketed bullets
Item 6 three (3) cartridge cases
Item 7 piece of shirt from suspect #2

Data in italic will vary from firearm to firearm depending on your Laboratory
Firearm Reference Collection (FRC).

This will complete Section K #5 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 249 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 22

Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to conduct examinations of evidence submitted from
crime scenes that are part of an ongoing investigation. Conduct all examinations as if it
were a real case and prepare the proper notes and reports that might be required.

Scenario: A homicide occurred in an apartment. The suspect claims he was cleaning the firearm
when it went off accidentally and struck his wife in the chest. She was supposed to be
standing in the doorway about six (6) feet from him when the shot was fired.

Procedure: 1. The student will receive a paper bag containing the evidence listed below.

2. The student should conduct all suitable examinations on all submitted evidence.

3. Prepare a written report indicating your findings concerning each exhibit. Also,
include your notes when you turn in the assignment.

4. As with all Practical Exercises treat this as a case. Remember to mark your evidence
and maintain custody records.

Evidence: Item #1 cartridge case from crime scene.

Item #2 revolver from crime scene.
Item #3 portion of shirt from victim.
Item #4 bullet from victim.

This will complete Section K #5 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 250 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 23

Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to begin development of casework procedures and
"real" case scenarios. The student will be provided with an item of evidence which will
require a gunshot distance determination.

Procedure: 1. The student will receive the following items of evidence:

Item #1 One pair of pants with apparent gunshot damage.

Item #2 One Remington 20 ga. shotgun.
Item #3 One box of remaining ammunition from Suspect’s house.

2. The student should microscopically and chemically process the victim’s pants in this
"case" and attempt to determine if there are any bullet holes present and if so, the
proximity from which the firearm was discharged.

3. Prepare a written report indicating your findings. Also, include your notes,
photographs, and any diagrams when you turn in the assignment.

4. As with all Practical Exercises treat this as a case. Remember to mark your
evidence, and photograph necessary items.

This will complete Section K #6 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 251 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 24

Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to begin development of casework procedures and
"real" case scenarios. The student will be provided with an item of evidence which will
require a gunshot distance determination.

Procedure: 1. The student will receive the following items of evidence:

Item #1 One shirt with apparent gunshot damage.

Item #2 One Ruger semiautomatic 22 caliber rifle.
Item #3 One box of remaining ammunition from Suspect’s house.

2. The student should microscopically and chemically process the victim’s shirt in this
"case" and attempt to determine if there are any bullet holes present and if so, the
proximity from which the firearm was discharged.

3. Prepare a written report indicating your findings. Also, include your notes,
photographs, and any diagrams when you turn in the assignment.

4. As with all Practical Exercises treat this as a case. Remember to mark your
evidence, and photograph necessary items.

This will complete Section K #5 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 252 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 25

Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to begin development of casework procedures and
"real" case scenarios. The student will be provided with an item of evidence which will
require a gunshot distance determination.

Procedure: 1. The student will receive the following items of evidence:

Item #1 One pair of pants with apparent gunshot damage.

Item #2 One Bryco 58, 380 auto pistol.
Item #3 One box of remaining ammunition from Suspect’s house.

2. The student should microscopically and chemically process the victim’s pants in this
"case" and attempt to determine if there are any bullet holes present and if so, the
proximity from which the firearm was discharged.

3. Prepare a written report indicating your findings. Also, include your notes,
photographs, and any diagrams when you turn in the assignment.

4. As with all Practical Exercises treat this as a case. Remember to mark your
evidence, and photograph necessary items.

This will complete Section K #5 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 253 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 26

Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to begin development of casework procedures and
"real" case scenarios. The student will be provided with an item of evidence which will
require a gunshot distance determination.

Procedure: 1. The student will receive the following items of evidence:

Item #1 One dress with apparent gunshot damage.

Item #2 One 30 caliber semiautomatic rifle.
Item #3 One box of remaining ammunition from Suspect's house.

2. The student should microscopically and chemically process the victim’s dress in this
"case" and attempt to determine if there are any bullet holes present and if so, the
proximity from which the firearm was discharged.

3. Prepare a written report indicating your findings. Also, include your notes,
photographs, and any diagrams when you turn in the assignment.

4. As with all Practical Exercises treat this as a case. Remember to mark your
evidence, and photograph necessary items.

This will complete Section K #5 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 254 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 27

Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to conduct examinations of toolmark evidence

submitted from crime scenes. Conduct all examinations as if it were a real case and
prepare the proper notes and reports that might be required.

Procedure: 1. The trainee will receive four items. A pair of bolt cutters and three cut sections of
wire that contain questioned toolmarks.

2. The student should conduct all suitable examinations to determine if any of these
questioned toolmarks were made by the submitted bolt cutters. Use the forms that
are currently in use by unit examiners.

3. Prepare a written report indicating your findings concerning each exhibit. Also,
include your notes when you turn in the assignment.

4. As with all Practical Exercises treat this as a case. Remember to mark your evidence
and maintain custody records.

This will complete Section L #18 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 255 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4
 Washington State Patrol Crime Laboratory Division
Firearms/Toolmarks Training Manual

Student Date Assigned Date Due

Practical Exercise 28

Purpose: The purpose of this assignment is to conduct examinations of toolmark evidence

submitted from crime scenes. Conduct all examinations as if it were a real case and
prepare the proper notes and reports that might be required.

Procedure: 1. The trainee will receive six items:

Item 1 Craftsman 1" wood chisel.

Item 2 Craftsman 1" wood chisel.
Item 3 Piece of cut lead wire.
Item 4 Piece of cut lead wire.
Item 5 Piece of cut lead wire.
Item 6 Piece of cut lead wire.

2. The student should conduct all suitable examinations to determine if any of these
questioned toolmarks were made by the submitted chisels.

3. Prepare a written report indicating your findings concerning each exhibit. Also,
include your notes when you turn in the assignment. Document your findings with
photographs.

4. As with all Practical Exercises treat this as a case.

This will complete Section L #18 of your training manual.

Technical Lead or Experienced Examiner Date Completed

FATM Training Manual Page 256 of 256 Revision December 28, 2016
Approved by CLD Quality Manager All Printed Copies Are Uncontrolled Revision 4